OPERATION MANUAL NT20S Programmable Terminal Cat No. V020-E1-04

OPERATION MANUAL NT20S Programmable Terminal Cat No. V020-E1-04
Cat No. V020-E1-04
NT20S
Programmable Terminal
OPERATION MANUAL
i
ii
NT-series
Programmable Terminal
Operation Manual
Revised August 1997
iii
iv
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to an
OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything
else.
The abbreviation “Host” means PC that controls NT20S.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information.
Note
1, 2, 3...
Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
© OMRON, 1997
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON
is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
v
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
3
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1
Functions of the NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
Role and Operation of NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions of NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Connection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications with PC by Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications by RS-232C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
Hardware Settings and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
Description of Parts and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection to a PC by the Host Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection to a PC by the NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host Connections by RS-232C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
System Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
Operation Flow by the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host
by Using the Memory Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registering the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Various System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
xiv
xiv
xiv
1
2
4
10
12
15
18
19
21
22
27
31
32
45
49
58
63
65
66
67
68
72
75
86
90
91
99
vii
SECTION 4
NT20S Functions and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
Creating and Transmitting Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outline of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeral Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
112
118
122
126
129
133
136
140
SECTION 5
How to Use the Host Link/NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
Overview of Direct Connection Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NT20S Status Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notification of the Operating Status to the PC
(Determining the NT20S Operating Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
163
178
191
196
SECTION 6
Using the RS-232C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
Table of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232C Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling the NT20S Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key to Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXAMPLE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
200
201
204
205
208
214
216
222
223
SECTION 7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
viii
Hardware Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responding to Displayed Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance of the NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
236
237
239
241
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
A. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
243
B. Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
248
C. Handling the RS-232C/RS-422A Converter Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
249
D. NT20S Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251
E. NT20S Internal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
252
F. Function Restrictions Depending on the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
255
G. Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
256
H. Making the Cable for Connection to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
268
I.
Connecting to an RS-232C/RS-422A Converter Unit (1:1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
269
J.
Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
271
K. Option List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
276
L. PC Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
278
M. Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
279
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
ix
x
About this Manual:
This manual describes the basic functions and operation procedures of the NT-series programmable terminal NT20S, its operations when connected to a PC or a Host, and includes the sections described below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting
to install and operate the NT-series programmable terminal NT20S.
WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal
injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section in its
entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
Section 1 describes the operation functions, system configuration, and the direct connection function of
the NT20S.
Section 2 describes the NT20S hardware settings, its installation in an operation panel, its connection to
the Host, etc.
Section 3 describes the procedure before operating the NT20S, and useful functions when operating it.
Also describes how to perform an operation check.
Section 4 describes the functions of the NT20S when it is connected to a Host.
Section 5 describes how to operate the NT20S when the host link/NT link is used for communication.
Read this chapter only when using the NT20S-ST121j/ST161j/ST122j.
Section 6 describes how to operate the NT20S when the RS-232C interface is used for communication.
Read this chapter only when using the NT20S-ST128j/ST168.
Section 7 describes the procedures to follow when the system does not operate correctly, and the procedure for routine maintenance of the NT20S.
APPENDIX describes the specifications and the method for making connecting cables, and includes an
area list for the PC.
xi
Related Manuals and Their Contents:
The related manuals are indicated below.
The j symbol at the end of the manual number is the revision history symbol.
[Operating the programmable terminal and communicating with the host]
S NT20S Programmable Terminal Operation Manual (V020-E1-j)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This manual
This operation manual is the manual for the NT20S itself.
The NT20S is a unit which integrates a programmable terminal body and host
interface unit. This operation manual describes the functions and handling of
both the programmable terminal body and the host interface function.
[Creating and transferring screen data]
S NT Series Support Tool Ver.2j Operation Manual (V028-E1-j)
The screens displayed on the NT20S are created with the support tool and transferred to the NT20S. This manual describes how to create and transfer screen
data.
[For Connection to Other Makers’ PCs]
S PC Connection V042-E1-j
NT600S-ST121(B)-EV3 and NT600S-ST211(B)-EV3 can be connected to Mitsubishi A series PCs. This manual describes how to make the connection and
how to make settings when connecting the PT to a Mitsubishi A series PC.
In order to use the PT while connected to a PC made by a manufacturer other
than OMRON, the Ver. 2.3 support tool must be used.
xii
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Terminal.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable
Terminal. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a Programmable Terminal.
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
xiv
xiv
xiii
Safety Precautions
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
S Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
S Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
S Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for using the Programmable Terminal. Be sure
to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this manual
close at hand for reference during operation.
WARNING It is extremely important that Programmable Terminals and related devices be
used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in
applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with
your OMRON representative before applying Programmable Terminals to the
abovementioned applications.
WARNING Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where danger to human life or serious damage is possible, or for emergency switch applications.
3
Safety Precautions
Read these safety precautions carefully and make sure you understand them before using the Programmable Terminal so that you can use it safely and correctly.
Safety Conventions and
their Meanings
DANGER!
This operation manual uses the following conventions and symbols to indicate
cautions, warnings, and dangers in order to ensure safe use of the PT. The cautions, warnings, and dangers shown here contain important information related
to safety. The instructions in these cautions, warnings, and dangers must be
observed.
The conventions used and their meanings are presented below.
Indicates information that, if not heeded, is likely to result in loss of life or serious
injury.
WARNING Indicates information that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.
CAUTION
xiv
Indicates information that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor
injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation.
Safety Precautions
WARNING: Do not attempt to take the PC apart and do not touch any internal parts while the
power is being supplied. Doing either of these may result in electrical shock.
Turn off the power before replacing the backlight. Otherwise you could sustain an
electric shock.
CAUTION: If the DIP switch settings have been changed when the NT20S is powered, reset
the power to the NT20S. The changes with the DIP switches become effective
only after the power supply is reset.
With systems in which the user program operates in accordance with the PC
cycle time, since there is some fluctuation in the PC cycle time, the system operation may not be consistent, and this should be born in mind when designing the
system.
S When making the connection, switch off the power to the NT20S and PC before
disconnecting or connecting any connector.
When screen data transmission is in screen units, if there is data other than
screen data, for example memory table or direct access changes, transmit this
data also.
S Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where
danger to human life or serious property damage is possible or for emergency
switch applications.
During work at the panel, take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the unit.
Otherwise, the product may malfunction.
For the connection to the power supply terminal block, twisted wires of 2 mm2 or
greater cross sectional area and M3.5 size crimp terminals must be used.
Tighten the screws on the terminal block to a torque of 0.8N·m.
Otherwise fire may occur.
S After connecting the communication cable, always secure it with the screws.
Otherwise the cable may disconnect, causing operation to fail.
S The cable’s tensile load is 30 N. Do not subject it to loads greater than this.
Otherwise a discontinuity may occur, causing operation to fail.
Do not install the NT20S at sites subject to the following conditions.
Otherwise, the product may malfunction.
S Severe temperature variations
S Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifications
S High humidity, condensation
S Splashing chemical agents
S Severe oil splashing
S Corrosive or flammable gases
S Strong vibrations or shocks
xv
Safety Precautions
S Direct exposure to wind and rain (outdoor sites)
S Strong ultra-violet irradiation
Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the NT20S is used at a location
subject to any of the following conditions.
S Static electricity, or noise from other equipment
S Strong electric or magnetic fields
S Nearby power cables
S Potential exposure to radioactivity
S Do not install at a site exposed to chemicals, steam, etc, or subject to excessive
airborne dust.
S Do not install the unit at locations where the ambient temperature goes outside
the range 0 to 50_C or where the relative humidity goes outside the range 35 to
85% RH.
If the ambient temperature exceeds the range indicated above, install a fan or
an air conditioner.
S Do not install the unit directly above equipment that generates a lot of heat
(heaters, transformers, large capacity resistors, etc.)
S Take the following points into account in order to prevent noise
(1) Avoid installing the unit in panels in which high-voltage equipment is
also installed.
(2) Install the unit at a distance of at least 200 mm from power lines.
(3) If the unit is installed next to equipment that generates a strong electric
or magnetic field (solenoids, etc.), provide a gap of at least 40 mm.
S Secure sufficient space for ventilation.
S Do not install in sites subject to severe vibration or strong shocks.
S Install at a distance from high-voltage devices and power equipment in consideration of operability and safety during maintenance.
S Press touch switches with a force of no greater than 30 N.
S If touch switches are pressed in rapid succession, their inputs may not be successfully received.
Confirm that the input of a touch switch has been successfully received before
moving on to the next operation.
S Do not press touch switches carelessly while the backlight is off or while nothing is displayed on the screen. Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
Only press touch switches after confirming system safety.
Confirm system safety carefully before changing monitor data.
xvi
Safety Precautions
To ensure system safety, be sure to periodically read the PT operating status bit
from the host in order to ensure that the PT is always operating normally.
S Always turn off the power at the PC and PT before connecting the C200H interface cable. Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
If the actual character string is longer than the specified character string length,
the specified number of characters is written and the remainder are discarded.
A timeout error message is displayed if the actual character string is shorter than
the specified character string length.
This command cannot be used to write negative numbers. Use the 8-digit Write
Command (refer to 6-3 8-digit Write Numeral Memory Table).
The display attributes set with the Support Tool determine if lamps #0 to #31 light
continuously or flash. The display status set with this command is ignored.
This command cannot be used for negative numbers. Always set “8” as the number of transferred digits when negative numbers may be input.
xvii
xviii
SECTION 1
Functions of the NT20S
NT20S is a new programmable terminal (PT) which incorporates a host interface unit and a RS-232C interface unit in a programmable terminal body. It can be easily installed and used.
This section gives the operation examples and characteristics of the NT20S so that you will understand the applications of the
NT20S.
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
Role and Operation of NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1 Operations of NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions of NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2 Principal Functions of NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-3 Comparison between NT20S and NT20M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-4 Differences Between the NT20S-ST121-EV3 and NT20S-ST122-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-5 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1 Host Link/NT Link (1:1)/C200H direct Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-2 NT Link (1:N) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Connection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1 NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-2 C200H Direct Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications with PC by Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-1 Functions of the Allocated Bits and Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications by RS-232C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
3
4
4
6
7
8
9
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
18
19
1
Role and Operation of NT20S
1-1
Section 1-1
Role and Operation of NT20S
NT20S is a programmable terminal used to display and transmit the information in
an FA site. The following gives a general description of the role and operation of
the NT20S for those who use a programmable terminal (PT) for the first time.
Production Line Status
Monitoring
The NT20S displays real-time information about the system and equipment
operating status, etc.
Production Control
Product
1994/1/25
NT20M
Today’s target
560 units
441 units
Current Production
305 units
275 units
54.5 %
63.0 %
% achieved
Messages
NT600M
The NT20S warns of system or equipment failures and prompts the appropriate
remedial action.
Alarm
Assembly line B
–
Positioning pin
is defective.
Panel Switch Functions
Setting touch switches on the NT20S allows workers to use the NT20S as an operating panel. Production data input to the NT20S or the Host can be transmitted to a
PC.
Electroplating Control
Transport
Clamp
2
UnClamp
Role and Operation of NT20S
1-1-1
Section 1-1
Operations of NT20S
Displays Screens
The information to be displayed (screen data) can be created on a computer by
using support tools and stored in the NT20S. The screen data can be displayed on
the NT20S in response to the instructions from a Host or touch switch operation.
Host
The screen data designated by
instructions from Host or touch
switch operation is displayed.
Receives Data from a Host
The NT20S can be connected to the Host using the host link or NT link communication method, or by using the RS-232C interface or C200H direct communication to enable reception of the required data from the Host.
Host link, NT link, RS-232C,
C200H direct communication
Sends Data to a Host
Host
Data input through a touch panel can be sent to a Host.
Host
Touch panel
ON/OFF information,
numeric data, etc.
Screen Data
The screen data to be displayed on the NT20S can be created by a computer by
using support tools. Connect the NT20S to a PC/AT with an RS-232C cable so that
the screen data are transferred to the NT20S.
Create screen data.
RS-232C
PC/AT
(support tools)
Screen data
This connection is made only to transmit the
screen data by using NT20S and tools.
(If C200H direct communication is used, the
support tool and Host can both be connected
at the same time.)
3
Functions of NT20S
1-2
Section 1-2
Functions of NT20S
The NT20S has the following features which are different from those of existing
NT20M;
1-2-1
Features
Downsized Body
S The NT20S has the thinnest depth (54 mm or less in the panel) in the NT series.
S The width is shorter by 30 mm, maintaining the existing display area.
S The system keys and tool connectors are located at other than the front side.
S The communication cable connectors are housed in the unit so that they do not
protrude from the unit.
S The tool connectors and the Host communication connectors are used in common (when the host link/NT link or RS-232C is used).
Construction Best Suited to the FA Environment
S Easy-to-read screen even in direct sunlight.
(The monochrome mode liquid crystal display of ST16j models is even easier
to read.)
S The angle of visibility is equal to that of NT20M-DT131.
S Its backlight unit can be replaced at the operation site.
S Conforms to IP65 waterproof requirements.
256 dots
128 dots
Wide angle of visibility "35_
A Host Link I/F Unit, Screen Data Memory, and a System ROM are All Incorporated
S With the NT link communication method, 1:1 and 1:N connections are possible.
S There is no complicated installation work except a simple connection to a Host.
S A flash memory is used for the screen data memory. There is no need of backup
battery.
S The following communication systems are standard for each model:
NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST161-EV3: Host link (direct) and NT link
NT20S-ST122-V1
: C200H direct communication
NT20S-ST128/ST168
: RS-232C communication (command control)
S NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST161-EV3 can be connected to Mitsubishi FX series and
Mitsubishi A series PCs.
(Refer to “PC Connection, Operation Manual” V042-E1-j.)
4
Functions of NT20S
Section 1-2
Touch Switch Operation
The System Menu can be displayed by using the touch switches located in four
corners of the screen.
Compatibility with NT20M
Existing screen data, user programs, are compatible.
5
Functions of NT20S
1-2-2
Section 1-2
Principal Functions of NT20S
Functions Related to the Data Display
S Character display
Characters of various sizes can be displayed. Characters can flash or be highlighted.
S Figure display
Straight lines, circles, and other graphic figures can be displayed.
S Memory data display
Contents of the character-string memory table and the numeral memory table can be displayed. The memory table contents can be changed from the PC/Host.
S Bar graph display
Bar graphs corresponding to the contents of the numeral memory table can be displayed.
S Lamp display
Lamps which turn on or flash as controlled by the Host can be displayed.
Functions Related to the Data Input
S Input by the touch switch
Data can be input by simply touching the screen.
S Numeric setting function
The touch keys can be assigned with numeric values so that the numeric values can be input at the
operation site and sent to the PC/Host.
Other Functions
S Buzzer
A built-in buzzer can be used.
S Communications with a PC
By connecting the NT20S with a PC using the host link, NT link, C200H,
or RS-232C communication method, data can be received from the host
and touch switch status information can be sent to the host.
S System function
The system setting and maintenance can be executed by using the System Menu on the screen.
S Screen data creation
The screen data can be created by using support tools on the computer
and stored in the unit.
S Unrestricted screen display
When the NT20S is connected to the host via an RS-232C interface,
characters and graphics can be displayed independently of the registered screens.
(Terminal function) (NT20S-ST128/ST168)
6
Functions of NT20S
1-2-3
Section 1-2
Comparison between NT20S and NT20M
The NT20S is a unitary PT which incorporates a system ROM, screen memory,
and a host I/F unit (Host link, NT link, RS-232C, and C200H direct communication)
as the standard equipment in one body.
The NT20S has the following features which are different from those of existing
NT20M;
Function
Communication
NT20S
S Host link/NT link incorporated
NT20S-ST121-EV3
S C200H direct communication incorporated
NT20S-ST122-V1
S RS-232C incorporated
NT20S-ST128
(other host I/F units cannot be connected)
NT20M-DT121-V2
Host I/F units are required.
Communication connector S The communication connector (9-pin) for a
Host is shared with that for a support tool.
(NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST128)
S Connectors for support tool (9-pin) and Host
connections on the rear face
(NT20S-ST122-V1).
The support tool connector (9-pin) is located
on the front side. The Host connector (25-pin)
is located on the back side.
Host RUN input terminal/
Alarm output terminal
Not provided
Provided
System keys
Not provided
Provided
Contrast control
Back side
Front side
Waterproof performance
Conforms to IP65.
Conforms to IP54F.
Visibility in direct sunlight
Excellent
Average
Allowable momentary
power interruption time
Not guaranteed
5 msec
System ROM
Built in (not replaceable)
System ROM compatible with host I/F unit is
required.
Resume function
Not provided
Provided
History retaining function
Not provided
Provided
Screen transfer
f
f (Only possible if screen data memory is an
SRAM)
Screen data compatibility
f (Note)
–
PC ladder compatibility
f
–
Backlight replacement
f
Possible with NT20M-DT131.
Screen data memory
Built in (flash memory only)
Optional (select from EP-ROM, SRAM, and
EEP-ROM)
Screen data memory
capacity
96KB
128 KB max.
Outside dimensions
190
Note:
110
58mm
220
110
82mm
If a system key function is required on continuous screens or for numerical setting
or buzzer stop, use a support tool and set the touch switches which have the system key function in such screens.
For details, refer to “System Key Functions” on page 139.
7
Functions of NT20S
1-2-4
Section 1-2
Differences Between Existing Models and NT20S-ST121-EV3
The differences between the existing NT20S-ST121, NT20S-ST121-V1/
ST122-V1/ST121-V2 models for direct connection and the upgraded version
NT20S-ST121-EV3 are indicated in the table below.
Item
ST121-V1/
ST122-V1
ST121
ST121-EV3
Communication type
Host link/NT link (1:1 connection) built in
ST121-V1:
S Host link/NT link (1:1
Host link/NT link (1:1 concommunication)/NT link
nection) built in
(1:N connection) built in
ST122-V1:
C200H direct communication
built in
“PT type” setting made with
support tool
“20M”
“20S” (“20M”–compatible mode available)
Memory capacity
64KB
96KB
Max. number of screens
250
500
Screen transmission speed
Standard only
Standard, high-speed
Screen transmission unit
File units only
File units, screen units
Direct connection version
Ver.4 only
Ver.4, Ver.5
()Refer to the “PC Connection, Operation Manual” (V042-E1-j).
Differences between NT20S-ST12j and NT20S-ST16j.
S The only way in which NT20S-ST161 differs from NT20S-ST121 is that the display is a monochrome liquid crystal display. Functionally, the NT20S-ST121 and
NT20S-ST161 are absolutely identical and therefore if you are using an
NT20S-ST161 please refer to the explanations for the NT20S-ST121.
S The only way in which NT20S-ST168 differs from NT20S-ST128 is that the display is a monochrome liquid crystal display. Functionally, the NT20S-ST128 and
NT20S-ST168 are absolutely identical and therefore if you are using an
NT20S-ST168 please refer to the explanations for the NT20S-ST128.
Difference between direct connection Ver.4 and Ver.5
Ver.5 of the direct connection function has the following additional functions in
comparison with Ver.4.
S “Thumbwheel” type setting possible with the numeral setting function.
S Upper and lower limit check can be set with the numeral setting function.
S The type of operation (alternate, set, reset) can be selected for touch switch input notification.
S Indirect specification possible for numeral display and character string display
functions.
8
Functions of NT20S
1-2-5
Section 1-2
Displays
The NT20S can display various kinds of elements such as characters, lamps,
touch switches, and bar graphs on a screen. The screen data displayed on the
NT20S are created by using support tools on a computer.
Touch switches
Characters
(character string)
Characters (text)
Emergency
stop
Line 1 Status
Machine name
:
NT20M-DT131
Production qty.
:
137 units
Restart
Numeric value
(Numeral table)
30%
Bar graph
0%
Stage 1
Characters (text)
50%
Stage 2
100%
Stage 3
Lamps
Characters and marks which do not need to be changed can be written directly to
the screen.
Characters (character-string memory table)
Character-strings stored in the character-string memory table are displayed. The
display characters can be changed by changing the data stored in the characterstring memory table.
Numeric Values (numeral tables)
Numbers stored in the numeral table are displayed. The display numbers can be
changed by changing the data stored in the numeral table. Hexadecimal values
can also be displayed.
Lamps
Lamps are displayed as square or round frames and indicate the operating status.
They are controlled by the Host and can be lit (reversed) or made flash (alternates
normal with reversed displays).
Touch Switches
Touch switches can be set anywhere on the screen. Touching the screen at a touch
switch location can switch the display (display switch function) or notify the Host
(notification function). The touch switches can be lit or made flash by controlling
from the Host in the same way as the lamps.
Numeric Keys
These are the touch switches used to input numeric values.
Bar Graphs
The bar graph extends and contracts in proportion to the data stored in the numeral table. A percentage value can also be displayed simultaneously.
Marks
Marks can be designed, created, and handled like characters by the user.
9
System Configuration
1-3
Section 1-3
System Configuration
This section gives the basic configuration of a system which uses an NT20S. Refer
to the manual for individual device for information on the equipment other than the
NT20S in the system.
Reference: Refer to Section 3-5 “Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by
Using the Memory Switches” on page 75 for the communication method and the
conditions of communications between the NT20S and the Host. It is impossible to
connect a computer to use a support tool and a Host together at the same time.
(except when using an NT20S-ST122-V1)
The principal optional devices for NT20S are as follows;
Replacement backlight NT20S-CFL01 (one white light)
Anti-glare sheet NT20M-KBA04 (five sheets in a pack)
Chemical-resistant cover (made of silicone rubber) NT20S-KBA01
1-3-1
Host Link/NT Link (1:1)/C200H direct Systems
D When using host link/NT
link, RS-232C
RS-232C cable
(for host link)
(Max. 15 m)
D When using C200H direct
communication
I/O connection cable
Host (PC manufactured by OMRON, personal computer, etc.)
Controls NT20S as required while controlling machines and
monitoring the production line.
Host link: C series, CQM1, CVM1/CV series PC, CjjH, CQM1,
C200HS, CVM1/CV series:
NT20S can be connected directly to the CPU unit.
CVM1/CV series: NT20S can be used with version [-EV1]
and subsequent versions.
Note that the C series requires a host link unit.
In the CVM1/CV series system, the NT20S can be
connected also to the host link unit.
NT link:
CQM1, CVM1/CV series PC
CQM1 can be used with CPU41/42/43/44-E.
C200HS can be used with CPU21/23/31/33-E.
CVM1/CV series can be used with [-EV1] CPU unit and
subsequent versions.
RS-232C: Personal computer, FA computer
C200H direct communication:
C200H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE, CjjH PC
Support tool
NT20S
Gives displays of production line
monitoring and instructions to the
operation site and notifies the switch
ON/OFF status and numeric value
inputs to the Host.
10
Computer (support tool)
Connected to NT20S as required and used to transfer
the NT20S screens and make settings for the NT20S.
Computer:
IBM PC/AT or compatible
Support tool: NT-ZA3AT-EV2
System Configuration
1-3-2
Section 1-3
NT Link (1:N) Systems
When NT20S is connected to a PC in a 1:N connection, use an RS-232C cable and
RS-422A/485 cables.
C200HX/HG/HE
OMRON PC
While controlling machinery and monitoring lines,
controls the NT20S when necessary.
C200H/HG/HE can be used.
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m)
RS-232C/RS-422A converter
unit, type NT-AL001
RS-422A/485 cable ()
RS-232C/RS-422A converter
unit, type NT-AL001
RS-422A/485 cable ()
() Total cable length: 500 m
RS-232C/RS-422A converter
unit, type NT-AL001
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m)
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m)
NT20S
NT20S
In an NT link (1:N), up to eight NT20S units
can be connected to one PC port.
Apart from monitoring
production lines and
displaying instructions
on site, also notifies
switch ON/OFF
statuses and numerical
inputs to the PC.
Support tool
Computer (support tool)
Connected to an NT20S as required, to transmit
created NT20S screens and set NT20S settings.
Computer
:IBM PC/AT or compatible
Support tool
:NT-ZA3AT-EV2
Reference: When connecting the C200HX/HG/HE and an RS-232C/RS-422A converter unit,
use a converter unit whose lot number is 15Y5 or later. Converter units of lot numbers previous to 15Y5 cannot be connected.
11
Direct Connection Function
1-4
Section 1-4
Direct Connection Function
The communication method applied between the NT20S-ST121-EV3 and the PC
is either a host link or NT link. To connect an NT20S-ST122-V1 and PC, the C200H
direct communication function is used.
The following describes the “direct connection” function available with the
NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1, and communication with a PC.
' The NT20S-ST128 uses an RS-232C interface for communication with the PC
(refer to Section “Communications by RS-232C”).
The NT20S can be used to refer to the contents necessary for the display information or to allocate the bits and words used for storing the input data to any area in
the PC. The NT20S can directly write and read such allocated bits and words so as
to change the display elements, control the operating status, and notify the status.
This function is called the “direct connection function”. The NT20S-ST121-EV3/
ST122-V1 is designed exclusively for use with the direct connection.
The bits and words allocated by the direct connection function are called “allocated
bit” and “allocated word” respectively.
This function allows to read the information to be displayed on the NT20S from the
memory area in the PC and to write it to the memory table in the NT20S. Also, the
data input on the NT20S can be written to the PC’s memory area. The NT20S
screen status can be switched according to the PC’s memory area, and the
NT20S’s status data can be written to the PC’s memory area.
' The NT20S-ST121-EV3 can only communicate with a PC that supports the
host link or NT link function. The NT20S-ST122-V1 can only communicate with
PCs that support the C200H direct communication function.
NT20S
PC
DM area
Auxiliary relay area
12
Internal relay area
Timer/counter
Direct Connection Function
Section 1-4
Features of the Direct Connection Function
S The bits and words referring to operating status and work instruction information
and those for storing input data can be freely allocated to almost any part of the
PC memory. Bits and words in the PC can be referenced from any memory table.
S The NT20S can directly refer to PC bit and word data so that it can be connected
to a PC without changing the PC program which controls currently running production line.
S The area to control and notify the NT20S status, including display screens, backlighting or a flash control, and alarms and buzzers can be freely allocated to any
part of the PC memory.
S Can be used irrespective of the operating mode of the PC.
The direct connection function allows the NT20S to directly read and write almost
all bits and words in the PC and to automatically change the NT20S screen display.
This function can reduce the load on the PC so that the program development efficiency of the PC improves.
1-4-1
NT Link
The NT link uses the direct connection function and can execute high-speed communications with the CPU (with built-in host link) of the CPM1, CQM1, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE, or CVM1/CV series,
When using the NT20S in an NT link, two communications modes are possible: a
single NT20S can be connected to one PC (1:1 NT link), or alternatively, up to eight
NT20S units can be connected to a single PC port (1:N NT link).
However, the 1:N connection NT link can be used with C200HX/HG/HE only. In
the following sections, the NT link communication mode in general will be indicated
by the term “NT link”, a 1:1 connection NT link will be indicated by “NT link (1:1)”,
and a 1:N connection NT link will be indicated by “NT link (1:N)”.
Features of the NT Link
S High speed communications with specific types of PCs can be executed.
S Writing in units of bits to the PC memory area is possible.
This enables another bit of a word data to which a touch switch has been allocated to be used for other purpose (e.g., to allocate a lamp).
S Can be used even while the PC is in the run mode. When using a host link, the
NT20S switches from the run mode to the monitor mode.
S With NT link (1:N), up to eight NT20S units can be connected to a single PC port
and used simultaneously.
S When using C200HX/HG/HE, by installing an expansion communication board
in the option slot of the CPU unit, it is possible to connect up to three NT link (1:N)
systems (comprising a total of 24 NT20S units). For details on communication
boards, refer to the SYSMAC C200HW-COM01 to C200HW-COM06-E Communication Board OPERATION MANUAL (W304-E1-j).
The NT link is compatible with the host link. The NT20S screen data and the PC
programs handled by the host link direct connection can be used with for the NT
link as they are.
13
Direct Connection Function
1-4-2
Section 1-4
C200H Direct Communication
C200H direct communication is a communication method that uses C200H,
C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE and CjjH I/O extensions.
The C200H direct communication function of the NT20S-ST122-V1 allows communication with a PC (C200H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE, CjjH) using the direct connection function.
Characteristics of C200H direct communication
C200H direct communication has the following characteristics.
S High-speed communication is possible through an I/O cable easily connected to
the CPU unit.
S Data can be written to the PC memory area in bit units.
This means that the unused bits of words allocated to touch switches can be
used for other applications (for example, lamp allocations).
Since the C200H direct communication function is compatible with the host link,
the NT20S screen data and PC programs for host link direct connection can also
be communicated by C200H direct communication without alteration.
Caution:
14
With systems in which the user program operates in accordance with the PC cycle
time, since there is some fluctuation in the PC cycle time, the system operation
may not be consistent, and this should be born in mind when designing the system.
Communications with PC by Direct Connection
1-5
1-5-1
Section 1-5
Communications with PC by Direct Connection
Functions of the Allocated Bits and Words
When using an NT20S-ST121-EV3 with the direct connection function (host link or
NT link), NT20S-ST122-V1 (C200H direct communication), the elements displayed on the NT20S and the NT20S status can be allocated to the bits and words
of the PC. By changing the contents of the bits and words, the NT20S can be controlled by the PC. It is also possible to send data to the PC by pressing the touch
switches on the NT20S.
S Controlling the NT20S by a PC
The following NT20S functions can be controlled by a PC.
Screens
: Display of designated screens, confirmation of
screen numbers, etc.
Memory tables
: Writing to a memory table, copying from a
memory table to another memory table, etc.
Lamps and touch switches
: Display instructions, confirmation of display
status, etc.
System control
: Buzzer ON/OFF, backlight ON/OFF, and other
NT20S status
S Notifying from the NT20S to a PC
Data in the NT20S is sent to a PC when a touch switch is pressed. The following
types of data are sent to a PC.
- NT20S status
- Touch switch status
- Numerical values input with touch switches by using the numeral setting function
- Changes in a memory table after copying between memory tables
Functions of Display Elements
S Lamps
Allocation destination: Bit
Lamp #1 (Bit 000100)
NT20S
PC
Lit
Switch 1: ON (Bit 000100)
Unlit
Switch 2: OFF (Bit 000101)
Lamp #2 (Bit 000101)
PC’s bit status is displayed by the “Lamp” on the NT20S.
The lamp comes on (flashes) when the PC’s bit status (lamp bit) is ON (1), and
goes off when it is OFF (0).
15
Communications with PC by Direct Connection
Section 1-5
S Touch switches
Allocation destination: Bit
Touch switch
12 Bit 009012
NT20S
PC
Bit 009012: ON
The lamp comes on (flashes) when the PC’s control bit is ON (1) and goes off
when it is OFF (0). When the touch switch is pressed, the PC’s notification bit
comes ON (1) or goes OFF (0).
S Numeral memory table
Allocation destination: Word
Numeral memory
table 1 (TIM003)
NT20S
PC
Numeral memory table 150 (0005CH)
Allocate numeral memory tables to arbitrary words in the PC. If word contents
change when corresponding numeral memory table is displayed on the screen,
the value on the screen will also change. Monitoring of words can also be made
easily.
Reading and writing are executed so that the contents of allocated words and
contents of numeral memory tables are always the same during display.
S Character-string memory table
Allocation destination: Word
NT20S
PC
(“a”, “b”)
(“c”, “d”)
(“e”, “f”)
Character-string memory table 1
Allocated word number: 3ch
First word: DM0100
Allocate character-string memory tables to arbitrary words in the PC. If word
contents change when corresponding character-string memory table is displayed on the screen, the value on the screen will also change. Messages can be
displayed easily.
Reading and writing are executed so that the contents of allocated words and
contents of character string memory tables are always the same during display.
16
Communications with PC by Direct Connection
Section 1-5
Functions of the PT Status Control Area (PC to NT20S)
The “PT status control area” is used to control the NT20S status. When data is
written to this area in the PC, the NT20S reads the contents and operates according to the contents.
[Example of the PT status control area application]
When data is written to the PT status control area, the NT20S will operate as given
below.
Screen 3
display
NT20S
PC
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
Memory table
Copy setting
PT status control bits
Continuous
buzzer sound
Numeral memory table 50
Copy
Numeral memory table 7
Functions of the PT Status Notify Area (NT20S to PC)
The “PT status notify area” is used to notify the changes of the NT20S status.
When a change is made in the NT20S status, the change is written to this area in
the PC. By reading the data from the area, the NT20S status can be checked.
[Example of the PT status notify area application]
When a change is made in the NT20S status, such change will be notified to the PT
status notify area as mentioned below.
NT20S
12345678
PC
Numeral memory table 13
PT status notify area
12345678
Currently display screen
Content update memory table
PT status
Allocated word (numeral table 13)
12345678
Start
Start + 1
17
Communications by Rs-232C
1-6
Section 1-6
Communications by RS-232C
This section gives a brief description of the NT20S control commands sent from
the host through the RS-232C interface when the NT20S-ST128 is used.
' For details of each of the commands sent through the RS-232C interface, refer
to Section 6 “Using the RS-232C”.
Control of the NT20S by a Host is executed by two kinds of commands supported
by the RS-232C interface which is built into the NT20S.
Operation commands
Operation commands are used to control the display and status of the running
NT20S as well as to notify information.
They are used for purposes such as screen display, data writing, and enquiries.
Notification of the NT20S operation contents to the Host.
Terminal commands
Terminal commands are used to use the NT20S as a display terminal of the Host.
When the NT20S is used as a display terminal, it can display characters and figures in accordance with instructions given by the Host, independently of the
screens registered to the NT20S.
These commands are also used if unexpected problems occur.
18
Before Operating
1-7
Section 1-7
Before Operating
Follow the procedure given below to start the system of the NT20S.
Host
NT20S
Check and change
the Host settings.
S For the host link, refer
to page 36 and the
manuals for the host
link unit and peripheral
tools.
S For the NT link (1:1),
refer to page 47.
S For the NT link (1:N),
refer to page 49.
S When using C200H direct communication, no
settings are required.
S For the RS-232C, refer
to page 63 and the
manuals for the Host.
Connect to the NT20S.
Support tool
Set the DIP switches.
(page 24)
Install to the operation
panel.
(page 28)
Connect the power
supply.
(page 29)
Connect to the Host.
S
S
S
S
(Host link: page 32)
(NT link (1:1) : page 45)
(NT link (1:N) : page 49)
(C200H direct communication: page 58)
S (RS-232C: page 63)
Check the settings and
communications.
Create the PC program.
Install support tools
to the computer.
Create the screens.
Transfer the
screen data.
(page 86)
(refer to Section 4 and the
manuals for the support tools)
Start operation.
Reference: As far as possible, use NT series support tool Ver.2.j as the support tool. For
details on the support tools that can be used, see Appendix F “Function Restrictions Depending on the Support Tool” (page 255).
19
Before Operating
Section 1-7
Refer to the following manuals for the equipment and software.
Equipment or Software
Manual Title
Manual Number
Support tools
NT-series Support Tool
Operation Manual
V028-E1-j
PCs
SYSMAC C20H/C28H/C40H/C60H Operation Manual
(Programming/RS-232C Interface)
W176-E1-j
Peripheral tools
Host link Unit
20
SYSMAC C120/C500 User’s Manual (Programming)
W060-E1-j
SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual
W130-E1-3j
SYSMAC C200HS Installation Guide
W236-E1-j
SYSMAC C200HS Operation Manual
W235-E1-2j
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Installation Guide
W302-E1-j
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Operation Manual
W303-E1-j
SYSMAC C1000H/C2000H Operation Manual
W140-E1-j
SYSMAC CQM1 Operation Manual
W226-E1-j
SYSMAC CQM1-CPM1 Programming Manual
W228-E1-j
SYSMAC CV500/CV1000/CV2000 Operation Manual (Ladder)
For a PC of the CVM1 series, refer to the SYSMAC
CV500/CV1000/CV2000 User’s Manual.
W202-E1-j
SYSMAC C-series and CVM1 PCs SYSMAC Support Software
Operation Manual:C-series PCs
W248-E1-j
SYSMAC C-series and CVM1 PCs SYSMAC Support Software
Operation Manual:CVMQ PCs
W249-E1-j
SYSMAC C Series Host Link Unit System Manual
W143-E1-j
SYSMAC CVM1/CV Series Host Link System Operation Manual
W205-E1-j
SECTION 2
Hardware Settings and Connections
This section describes the settings of the NT20S, connections to a Host, and other hardware settings.
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
Description of Parts and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 Description of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2 Operation Status DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-3 Setting the Communication Condition Setting Switches (NT20S-ST122-V1 Only) . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2 Installation to the Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3 Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection to a PC by the Host Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-1 Compatible PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-2 Connecting the NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-3 PC Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection to a PC by the NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-1 Compatible PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-2 Connecting the NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5-3 PC Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6-1 Compatible PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6-2 Connecting the NT20S Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6-3 PC Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-1 Applicable PC Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-2 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7-3 Switching the Power ON/OFF When Using C200H Direct Communication . . . . . . . . .
Host Connections by RS-232C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8-1 Host Computer Communication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8-2 Connector Pin Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
22
24
25
27
27
28
29
31
32
32
34
36
45
45
46
47
49
49
49
57
58
58
59
62
63
63
63
21
Description of Parts and Settings
2-1
Section 2-1
Description of Parts and Settings
Before getting to the operation, confirm the names and functions of parts. Also set
the DIP switches on the NT20S.
2-1-1
Description of Parts
Front View
POWER LED
Lit when the power is supplied.
RUN LED
Lit when the unit is in
RUN mode.
Display
An STN LCD screen with a backlight. The
whole area of the screen is a touch panel
which works as an input device.
Reference: The NT20S comes in two body colors.
S NT20S-ST12j: beige
S NT20S-ST12jB: black
22
Description of Parts and Settings
Section 2-1
Rear View
Lid for backlight replacement
The backlight unit is installed behind
this lid.
Contrast control
Use a fine flat-blade screwdriver. Clockwise
turns will increase the brightness.
Warning label
The NT20S-ST122-V1 has the
support tool connector and
communication condition setting
switches under this cover.
Power input terminals
Connect the power to the
NT20S at these terminals.
Reset switch
The NT20S statuses are reset to the
initial statuses by pressing this switch.
The screen data memory and the
memory switch will retain the status
even if this switch is pressed.
Host I/F tool connector
Connect the cable here from a PC/Host or support tool.
(On the NT20S-ST122-V1 this connector is for connection to a host only.)
23
Description of Parts and Settings
2-1-2
Section 2-1
Operation Status DIP Switch Settings
Set the NT20S operation status with the DIP switches located in the bottom right
corner on the rear side of the body.
Switch #
SW2-1
SW2-2
Function
Screen data forced initialize effective/ineffective
ON
The NT20S will start in a special RUN mode in which the screen
data memory is initialized. When it is started, the memory initialization menu will be displayed. For the initialization procedure,
refer to Section 3-4 Initializing Memory (page 72).
[OFF]
The NT20S will start in normal RUN mode.
Screen display language mode
[ON]
Messages are displayed in English.
OFF
SW2-3
SW2-4
Switching to the System Menu enabled/disabled
ON
The System Menu cannot be displayed. If an error occurs during
a start-up, the System Menu will be automatically displayed.
However, “transfer mode” cannot be entered.
[OFF]
The System Menu can be displayed.
Reserved for system use
ON
[OFF]
Must always be OFF.
[ ] indicates factory setting.
CAUTION: If the DIP switch settings have been changed when the NT20S is powered, reset
the power to the NT20S. The changes with the DIP switches become effective only
after the power supply is reset.
Reference: S In addition to the DIP switches, set also the “communication type”, “host link
baud rate”, etc. at the memory switches when host link/NT link is used.
When using the RS-232C interface, set the “RS-232C communication conditions” and other appropriate settings.
For these settings, refer to Section 3-5” Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches” (page 75)
S It may be necessary to change the DIP switch settings after installing the NT20S
in an operation panel. Bear this in mind when deciding the installation position.
During work at the panel, take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the unit.
24
Description of Parts and Settings
2-1-3
Section 2-1
Setting the Communication Condition Setting Switches
(NT20S-ST122-V1 Only)
When using the NT20S-ST122-V1, the communication conditions are set with the
rotary switch (SW4) under the cover at the top right of the back of the terminal.
Rotary switch (SW3)
Connector for peripheral device
Setting the rotary switch
The rotary switch is used to set the unit number.
Since the NT20S-ST122-V1 serves as a C200H special I/O unit, it requires a unit
number setting. Make sure the set unit number does not duplicate the unit number
set for any other special I/O unit.
SW3
9 0 1
8
7
2
3
6 5 4
(Factory setting)
25
Description of Parts and Settings
Section 2-1
When using a C200H/C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE, the words indicated below are
occupied according to the set unit number. However, since the NT20S-ST122-V1
executes processing using allocated bits and words, these words are not used for
processing.
These words can be used as internal auxiliary relays.
Unit No.
Word No.
0
100 to 109
1
110 to 119
2
120 to 129
3
130 to 139
4
140 to 149
5
150 to 159
6
160 to 169
7
170 to 179
()
180 to 189
9 ()
190 to 199
8
() Cannot be set with CjjH.
Reference: S If “8” or “9” is set as the unit number when using CjjH, a special I/O unit error
will occur.
S When an NT20S-ST122-V1 is connected to a CjjH, I/O extension units cannot be connected. In other words, it is not possible to connect another special
I/O unit, so whatever unit number is set will not duplicate an existing one.
26
Installation
2-2
Section 2-2
Installation
Install the NT20S to the operation panel and connect the power to the NT20S as
described below.
2-2-1
Installation Environment
Observe the following points when installing the PT in an operation panel.
Caution:
Do not install the NT20S at sites subject to the following conditions.
Otherwise, the product may malfunction.
S Severe temperature variations
S Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifications
S High humidity, condensation
S Splashing chemical agents
S Severe oil splashing
S Corrosive or flammable gases
S Strong vibrations or shocks
S Direct exposure to wind and rain (outdoor sites)
S Strong ultra-violet irradiation
Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the NT20S is used at a location
subject to any of the following conditions.
S Static electricity, or noise from other equipment
S Strong electric or magnetic fields
S Nearby power cables
S Potential exposure to radioactivity
27
Installation
2-2-2
Section 2-2
Installation to the Operation Panel
The NT20S can be flush mounted to an operation panel.
Use the panel fittings and tools included in the product package and follow the procedure below.
Caution:
Note:
During work at the panel, take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the unit.
Otherwise, the product may malfunction.
The thickness of applicable operation panel is 1.6 mm to 4.8 mm. All fittings must
be tightened uniformly to a torque of at least 0.5 to 0.6 N·cm in order to ensure
water- and dust-resistance. The panel must not be soiled or warped, and must be
able to support an installation that will remain secure and strong.
(1) Open a hole, shown below, in the panel and install the NT20S from the front
side of the panel.
+0.5 mm
0 mm
100.5
mm
178.5+0.50 mm
(2) Attach the panel fittings at four positions, shown below, on the rear side of the
NT20S.
Fit the hook of the fitting in the square hole in the body and tighten the screw
with a Phillips head screwdriver while lightly pulling the fitting.
Note:
28
In order to ensure adequate water and dustproof performance, tighten the four
panel fittings uniformly and make sure there are no gaps between the fittings and
the NT20S panel.
Installation
2-2-3
Section 2-2
Power Supply Connection
Connect a 24 VDC power supply to the power input terminals.
Note:
S Check the wiring carefully before turning on the power.
S Do not connect an AC power supply to the power supply terminals.
S Use a DC power supply with low voltage fluctuation.
S If complying with EC directives (low voltage directives), use a power supply with
reinforced insulation.
Reference: When using an NT20S-ST122-V1, the NT20S must be started up before the host.
For details, refer to “Switching the Power ON/OFF When Using C200H Direct”
(page 62). When not using C200H direct communication, there are no restrictions
on the order in which power supplies are switched ON and OFF.
24 VDC
Breaker
Power Supply
24 VDC
S Power supply
The specifications of the power supply that can be connected are as follows.
Item
Value
Power supply voltage
24 VDC
Allowable power supply voltage
fluctuation range
20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC
(24 VDC –15%, +10%)
Power supply capacity
10 W or over
29
Installation
Section 2-2
S Parts used for connection
Caution:
For the connection to the power supply terminal block, twisted wires of 2 mm2 or
greater cross sectional area and M3.5 size crimp terminals must be used.
Tighten the screws on the terminal block to a torque of 0.8N·m.
Otherwise fire may occur.
Fork type
7 mm or less
Round type
7 mm or less
[Recommended terminals]
Type
(fork type)
Type
(round type)
Japan Solderless Terminal MFG
2-YS3A
2-3.5
Fuji Terminal
2-YAS3.5
V2-S3.5
Nichifu Terminal
2Y-3.5
2-3.5
Maker
30
Applicable Wire
(stranded wire)
2.00 to 2.63 mm2
Connecting to the Support Tool
2-3
Section 2-3
Connecting to the Support Tool
Connect the NT20S to a computer with an RS-232C cable to transfer the screen
data created by using a support tool to the NT20S.
An NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST128 cannot be connected to both a personal computer
running the support tool and a Host at the same time. Connect the personal computer only when transmitting screen data.
[NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST128]
[NT20S-ST122-V1]
S Communication conditions
Communication conditions are set when a support tool is started.
Reference: To make a connector cable, refer to Appendix H Making the Cable for Connection
to the Support Tool (page 268).
31
Connection to a PC by the Host Link
2-4
Section 2-4
Connection to a PC by the Host Link
Connect the NT20S-ST121-EV3 to an OMRON PC by the host link method.
To connect the NT20S to a PC using the host link method, the NT20S “Comm.
Type” memory switch must be set to “Host Link”. For details on the “Comm. Type”
setting, refer to “Selecting the Host Communication Method” (page 78).
2-4-1
Compatible PCs
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the host link function built in. In the
C200HX/HG/HE series, there are CPU units that can support host link connections by installing an expansion communication board.
When making a connection, check the series and model of the PC to which the
connection is being made, and the type of host link unit that is installed. The following is a list of the PCs that can be connected to the NT20S via a host link.
PC Series
Units with Built-in Host Link Function
Host Link Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Units Connectable Using an
Expansion Communication Board
C20H/C28H/
C40H/C60H
C series
CjjH
C120-LK201-V1
C120
C200H
C500 (F)
C1000H
C2000 (H)
C200H-LK201-V1
C200H
C200H-LK201-V1
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200H-LK201-V1
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HE-CPU32-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HE
C200H-LK201-V1
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HG-CPU33-E
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU53-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HG
C200H-LK201-V1
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU64-E
C200HX-CPU34-E
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU54-E
C200HX-CPU64-E
C200HX
C200HS
C500 (F)
C1000H (F)
C2000 (H)
C500-LK201-V1
C500-LK203
32
Connectable to
CPM1-10CDR-j
CPM1-20CDR-j
CPM1-30CDR-j
CPM1
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-E
CQM1-CPU42-E
CQM1-CPU43-E
CQM1-CPU44-E
CQM1
Connection to a PC by the Host Link
PC Series
CV series
CVM1 series
Section 2-4
Units with Built-in Host Link Function
Host Link Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Units Connectable Using an
Expansion Communication Board
Connectable to
CV500-LK201
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500
CV500-LK201
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV500-LK201
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000
CV500-LK201
CVM1-CPU01-EVj
CVM1-CPU11-EVj
CVM1-CPU21-EVj
CVM1
Connection is not possible to the CPU units of CVM1/CV series PCs that do not have the suffix “-EVj”.
In the case of these CPU units, make the connection to NT20S by using a host link unit.
33
Connection to a PC by the Host Link
2-4-2
Section 2-4
Connecting the NT20S
Refer to the illustrations below to select the appropriate cable for the unit connectors and connect the NT20S to the PC/Host.
To make a connector cable, refer to Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for
Connection to the Host (page 256).
Caution:
S After connecting the communication cable, always secure it with the screws.
Otherwise the cable may disconnect, causing operation to fail.
S The cable’s tensile load is 30 N. Do not subject it to loads greater than this.
Otherwise a discontinuity may occur, causing operation to fail.
Connecting to a PC with a 25-pin Connector
Use a connector cable with a 25-pin connector on one end and a 9-pin connector
on the other end (NT20S side) to connect the NT20S to a PC with a 25-pin connector.
Host link unit/CPU unit
NT20S
SYSMAC C series
PC, CVM1/CV
series PC
9-pin connector
25-pin connector
Host I/F connector
(RS-232C 9-pin type)
RS-232C connector cable
Use the following recommended cables (OMRON);
Connector
Specification
Type
Applicable
Host Link Unit
Cable Length
XW2Z-200S
2m
XW2Z-500S
5m
C500-LK203
C500-LK201-V1
C120 LK201 V1
C120-LK201-V1
C200H-LK201
CV500-LK201
25 pin to 9-pin
25-pin
9 pin
Connecting to a PC with a 9-pin Connector
Use a connector cable with a 9-pin connector on both ends to connect the NT20S
to a PC with a 9-pin connector.
NT20S
Host link unit/CPU unit
SYSMAC C series
PC, CVM1/CV
series PC
9-pin connector
Host I/F connector
(RS-232C 9-pin type)
9-pin connector
RS-232C connector cable
Note:
34
The connector cable wiring for the C series CPU unit (CjjH) is different from that
for the other PCs. For details, refer to Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for
Connection to the Host (page 256).
Connection to a PC by the Host Link
Section 2-4
Connecting the NT20S to a CVM1/CV Series Host Link Unit
Two types of connectors are provided to CV500-LK201 host link unit. Both of these
connector types can connect to the NT20S with an RS-232C connector cable. Select the connector cable which matches the connector type.
S To connect to communication port 1
This is a 25-pin RS-232C connector. Use a connector cable with a 25-pin connector on one end and a 9-pin connector on the other end (NT20S side).
Communications
port 1
(RS-232C)
S To connect to communication port 2
Communications
port 2
(RS-232C/
RS-422A)
This is a 9-pin RS-232C/RS-422A connector. Use a connector cable with a
9-pin connector on both ends.
I/O port
selector
switch
RS-232C
↔
Set the I/O port selector switch to the RS-232C side (upper side) to use this port.
RS-422A
Connecting the NT20S to a C Series CQM1 Unit
CQM1 can connect to the NT20S by the RS-232C method. Use an RS-232C 9-pin
type connector cable.
S To connect to the RS-232C port
This is a 9-pin RS-232C connector. Use a connector cable with a 9-pin connector on both ends.
Connecting to C Series C200HX/HG/HE
When using C series C200HX/HG/HE models, the NT20S can be connected to the
standard port of the CPU unit, or to ports A and B of the expansion communication
board. Procure an RS-232C 9-pin type connection cable for the connection. For
details on the specifications, installation method, etc., of the communication board
used for the connection, refer to the “SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Installation
Guide” (W302-E1-j).
Connecting to C Series CPM1
The CPM1 is connected via an RS-232C adapter (type CPM1-CIF01).
Procure an RS-232C 9-pin type connection cable for the connection.
When a Connection Cable Longer Than 5 m is Required
When a connection cable longer than 5 m is required, it must be specially made.
However, note that the maximum transmission distance is 15 m. For details on the
method for making the connection cable, refer to Appendix G
“Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host” (page 256).
35
Connection to a PC by the Host Link
Section 2-4
When Long-Distance Transmission is Required
When transmission over a distance exceeding the RS-232C specification is required, it can be achieved by using an RS-232C/RS-422A converter unit (type NTAL001) to switch to RS-422A communication (RS-485 communication cannot be
used).
For details, refer to “Connecting to an RS-232C/RS-422A Converter Unit (1:1)”
(page 269).
2-4-3
PC Switch Settings
When the NT20S and PC are connected to each other, set the conditions at the PC
host link unit or the CPU as given in the table below.
The following is a general description of switch settings.
Refer to the manual for respective units for the details of the switch settings.
Item
Note:
Switch Setting
I/O port
RS-232C
Baud rate
Set the same baud rate as the NT20S. (1)
Transfer code
ASCII 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Parity
Even
1-to-1/1-to-N
1-to-N (2)
Instruction level
Level 1, 2, 3
Unit #
00
1. Set the host link baud rate at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the memory switch
for “host link baud rate”. For the details, refer to “Selecting the Host Link Communication Speed” (page 79).
2. The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character).
It is not possible to connect more than one NT20S in a single host link.
When using CVM1/CV series, always set CPU execution processing (execution
control 2) in the PC system settings to simultaneous processing.
36
Connection to a PC by the Host Link
Section 2-4
Connecting to a Host Link Unit
Two types of host link units are available: a rack-mounting type and a CPUmounted type. The switch settings differ according to the type of host link unit. Set
the switches according to the unit type.
S C200H rack-mounting type: C200H-LK201(-V1)
[Setting the front switches]
Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the
setting value window agree with the following.
S Unit # (SW1, SW2)
Set these switches to “0”.
5
2
S Instruction level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)
Set this switch to “2”.
S Baud rate (SW3)
Set this switch to “5” to select 9600 bps.
Set this switch to “6” to select 19200 bps.
[Setting the rear switches]
S 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP switch)
Set #3 to “ON”.
CTS
selector
switch
External
S CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to “0V” (ON).
0V (ON)
S C500/C1000H/C2000(H) rack-mounting type: C500-LK201-V1
[Setting the front switches]
Host
Local
S Mode control (key switch)
Set this to “host link”.
37
Connection to a PC by the Host Link
Section 2-4
[Setting the rear switches]
S I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
S Unit # (DIP SW1)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to “OFF” (“0”).
I/O port
RS-422A
RS-232C
Synchronization
Internal
External
NO
Termination
resistance
OFF
ON
CTS
0V
External
NO
S Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to “Internal”.
S Baud rate (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to “1010” to select 9600 bps.
Set these switches to “0010” to select 19200 bps.
(0 : OFF 1 : ON)
S 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to “0” (1-to-N).
S Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to “1”.
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
S CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to “0V” (ON).
38
Connection to a PC by the Host Link
Section 2-4
S C500/C1000H/C2000(H) rack-mounting type: C500-LK203
[Setting the rear switches]
S I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
S Unit #, parity, and transfer code (DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to “OFF” (“0”).
5V supply
ON
OFF
I/O port
RS-422A
RS-232C
Synchronization
Internal
External
Termination
resistance
OFF
ON
NO
CTS
0V
External
NO
S Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to “Internal”.
S Baud rate (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to “1010” to select 9600 bps.
Set these switches to “0010” to select 19200 bps.
(0 : OFF 1 : ON)
S 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to “0” (1-to-N).
S Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to “1”.
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
S CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to “0V” (ON).
39
Connection to a PC by the Host Link
Section 2-4
S CPU-mounted type: C120-LK201-V1
[Setting the rear switches]
S Unit #, parity, and transfer code (DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to “OFF” (“0”).
Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is fixed
at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.
S Baud rate (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to “1010” to select 9600 bps.
Set these switches to “0010” to select 19200 bps.
(0 : OFF 1 : ON)
S 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to “0” (1-to-N).
S Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to “1”.
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
S CTS selection (DIP SW3-1 and SW3-2)
Set SW3-1 to “ON” (1) and SW3-2 to “OFF” (0). (Set
this always to “0V”.)
S Synchronization (DIP SW3-3 to SW3-6)
Set SW3-3, SW3-5, and SW3-6 to “ON“ (1), and
SW3-4 to “OFF” (0). (Set these to “Internal”.)
40
Connection to a PC by the Host Link
Section 2-4
S CVM1/CV series backplate mounted type: CV500-LK201
[Setting the front switches]
Set the operating conditions with the PC System Setting functions when a
CVM1/CV series host link unit is connected to the NT20S. The PC system settings
can be made directly from the peripheral tool (LSS etc.) or the PC system setting
information created with a peripheral tool can be transferred to the CPU.
The following describes the switch settings so as to enable the PC system settings. For the details of the PC system settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV
Series Host Link User’s Manual (W205-E1-j).
S Unit # (SW3 and SW4)
Set these switches to “0”.
Communications
port 1
(RS-232C)
Communications
port 2
(RS-232C/
RS-422A)
I/O port
selector
switch
RS-232C
S I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
S CTS selection (DIP SW2 and SW3)
Set SW2 or SW3 to “ON”. (Set this always to “0V”.)
To use communication port 1, set SW2. To use communication port 2, set SW3.
↔
RS-422A
S PC system setting (DIP SW1)
Set SW1 to “OFF”.
Communication is performed in accordance with the
values set in the PC CPU special I/O unit system settings. The initial values in the system settings are as
follows:
Baud rate
:9600 bps
Communication mode
:Full duplex
Parity
:Even
Stop bit
:2 bits
Xon/Xoff control :Not performed
Data length
:7 bits
41
Connection to a PC by the Host Link
Section 2-4
Connecting to a CPU
S C-series CjjH, CVM1/CV-series (-EVj)
Set the operating conditions with the PC System Setting functions when a C
jj H, CVM1/CV-series host link unit is connected to the NT20S. The PC system settings can be made directly from the peripheral tool (LSS etc.) or the PC
system setting information created with a peripheral tool can be transferred to
the CPU.
The following describes the switch settings so as to enable the PC system settings. For the details of the PC system settings, refer to the “SYSMAC CjjH
User’s Manual (Programming)” (W176-E1-j) and the CVM1/CV500/CV1000/
CV2000 User’s Manual (W195-E1-j).
(1) C-series CjjH
: C20H/C28H/C40H/C60H
No switch settings are required when connecting to a C-series CjjH CPU.
(2) CVM1/CV-series
: CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EVj
CVM1-CPU11-EVj
CVM1-CPU21-EVj
Only CVM1/CV series CPU units designated “-EV1” or higher can be connected.
When connecting to a CVM1/CV-series CPU, set the switches as given below.
[Setting the front switches]
S I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
I/O port
selector
switch
RS-232C
RS-422A
42
S System setting (DIP SW4)
To effect the existing DIP switch settings, set SW4 to “ON”.
To effect the existing PC system settings, set SW4 to “OFF”.
Note: In the case of CPU units manufactured before June
1995 (lot No. “jj65”), the factory settings of the DIP
switches do not agree with the factory settings for the
PC system settings.
S The factory settings for the DIP switches are:
2400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7-bit data length.
S The factory settings for the PC system settings are:
9600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7-bit data length.
For CPU units manufactured from July 1995 (lot No.
“jj75”) onward, the factory settings for the DIP
switches are also 9600 bps and 2 stop bits.
Connection to a PC by the Host Link
Section 2-4
[Making the PC system settings]
The possible settings and existing settings which can be set by the PC system setting are as given below.
Item
Possible Setting
Existing Setting
Baud rate
1200/2400/4800/9600/19200 bps
9600 bps
Stop bit
1 or 2 stop bits
2 stop bits
Parity
Even/odd/non-parity
Even parity
Data length
ASCII 7 bits or JIS 8 bits
ASCII 7 bits
Unit #
00 to 31
Unit #00
S C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE, CPM1, CQM1
Set the operating conditions to the PC system setting area when a C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE, CPM1 or CQM1 CPU is connected to the NT20S. The PC system setting area (data memory) can be directly accessed from the peripheral
tool (LSS etc.).
The following describes the switch settings so as to enable the PC system settings. For the details of the operation with the PC system setting area, refer to the
manual for the PC you are using.
[Switch setting] (C200HX/HG/HE, CQM1)
DIP switch settings
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6
S RS232C port communication
condition settings
Set DIP switch 5 to OFF (right side)
to enable the PC system settings.
ON ↔e OFF
[Switch setting] (CPM1)
Set the mode setting
switch to the “HOST”
(upper) position.
CPM1CIF01
CPM1
[PC system setting area settings]
Write values to the PC system setting area (data memory) in accordance with the
CPU unit port used for connection to the NT20S.
S When using the RS232 port of C200HX/HG/HE, CQM1
Channel #
Writing Value
DM6645
0001
Host link mode
Set the conditions with the contents of DM.
0303
Data length: 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
baud rate: 9600 bps.
0304
Data length: 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
baud rate: 19200 bps.
0000
Unit No. 0
DM6646
DM6648
Settings
43
Connection to a PC by the Host Link
Section 2-4
S When using port A of C200HX/HG/HE
Channel #
Writing Value
DM6555
0001
Host link mode
Set the conditions with the contents of DM.
0303
Data length: 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
baud rate: 9600 bps
0304
Data length: 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
baud rate: 19200 bps
0000
Unit No. 0
DM6556
DM6558
Settings
S When using port B of C200HX/HG/HE
Channel #
Writing Value
DM6550
0001
Host link mode
Set the conditions with the contents of DM.
0303
Data length: 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
baud rate: 9600 bps
0304
Data length: 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
baud rate: 19200 bps
0000
Unit No. 0
DM6551
DM6553
Settings
S When using CPM1
Channel #
DM6650
Writing Value
0001
0303
Data length: 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
baud rate: 9600 bps
0304
Data length: 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity,
baud rate: 19200 bps
0000
Unit No. 0
DM6651
DM6653
44
Settings
Host link mode
Set the conditions with the contents of DM.
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:1)
2-5
Section 2-5
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:1)
Connect the NT20S-ST121-EV3 to an OMRON PC by the NT link method.
To connect the NT20S to a PC by the NT link (1:1) method, the NT20S memory
switch for “host communication” must be set for the NT link. For the “host communication” setting, refer to “Selecting of the Host Communication Method”
(page 78).
2-5-1
Compatible PCs
Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the host link function built in. In the
C200HX/HG/HE series, there are CPU units that can support host link connections by installing an expansion communication board.
When making a connection, check the series and model of the PC to which the
connection is being made, and the type of host link unit that is installed. The following is a list of the PCs that can be connected to the NT20S via a host link.
The compatible PCs are listed in the table below.
PC Series
C series
CV series
CVM1 series
CPU Unit
CPU Units Connectable
Using an Expansion
Communication Board
Connectable to
CPM1-10CDR-j
CPM1-20CDR-j
CPM1-30CDR-j
CPM1
CQM1-CPU41-E
CQM1-CPU42-E
CQM1-CPU43-E
CQM1-CPU44-E
CQM1
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HS
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HE-CPU32-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HE
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HG-CPU33-E
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU53-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HG
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU64-E
C200HX-CPU34-E
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU54-E
C200HX-CPU64-E
C200HX
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV1000
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000
CVM1-CPU01-EVj
CVM1-CPU11-EVj
CVM1-CPU21-EVj
CVM1
45
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:1)
2-5-2
Section 2-5
Connecting the NT20S
Refer to the illustrations below to select the appropriate cable for the unit connectors and connect the NT20S to the PC.
A host link connector cable can also be used. To make a connector cable, refer to
Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host (page 256).
Caution:
S After connecting the communication cable, always secure it with the screws.
Otherwise the cable may disconnect, causing operation to fail.
S The cable’s tensile load is 30 N. Do not subject it to loads greater than this.
Otherwise a discontinuity may occur, causing operation to fail.
Use a connector cable with a 9-pin connector on both ends to connect the NT20S
to a PC with a 9-pin connector.
CPU unit
NT20S
SYSMAC C series
PC, CVM1/CV
series PC
Host I/F connector
(RS-232C 9-pin type)
9-pin connector
9-pin connector
RS-232C connector cable
The following are the recommended cables (manufactured by OMRON).
Connector Specification
9 pin ↔ 9 pin
Model
Cable Length
XW2Z-200T
2m
XW2Z-500T
5m
If a Cable Longer Than 5 m is Required
If a cable longer than 5 m is required, a connector cable will have to be made. Refer
to Appendix F Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host (page 256).
The maximum transmission distance is 15 m.
When Long-Distance Transmission is Required
When transmission over a distance exceeding the RS-232C specification is required, it can be achieved by using an RS-232C/RS-422A converter unit (type NTAL001) to switch to RS-422A communication (RS-485 communication cannot be
used).
For details, refer to “Connecting to an RS-232C/RS-422A Converter Unit (1:1)”
(page 269).
46
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:1)
2-5-3
Section 2-5
PC Switch Settings
When the NT20S and PC are connected to each other, set the conditions at the PC
CPU so as to enable the NT link communications.
The following is a general description of switch settings.
S C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE, CPM1, CQM1
Set the operating conditions to the PC system setting area when a C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE, CPM1 or CQM1 CPU is connected to the NT20S. The PC system setting area (data memory) can be directly accessed from the peripheral
tool (LSS etc.).
The following describes the switch settings so as to enable the PC system settings. For the details of the operation with the PC system setting area, refer to the
manual for the PC you are using.
[Switch setting] (C200HX/HG/HE, CQM1)
DIP switch settings
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6
ON ↔ OFF
S RS-232C port communication
condition settings
Set DIP switch 5 to OFF (right side)
to enable setting of the PC system
settings.
[PC system setting area settings] (C200HX/HG/HE, CPM1, CQM1)
Write values to the PC system setting area (data memory) in accordance with the
CPU unit port used for connection to the NT20S.
PC Side
Channel #
RS-232 port of
C200HX/HG/HE,
CQM1
DM6645
Port A of C200HX/
HG/HE
DM6555
Port B of C200HX/
HG/HE
DM6550
CPM1
DM6650
Writing Value
4000
Settings
Use NT link (1:1)
47
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:1)
Section 2-5
S CVM1/CV-series (-EVj)
When connecting to a CVM1/CV-series (-EVj) CPU, set the switches as given
below.
↓
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6
S I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to “RS-232C”.
S NT link setting (DIP SW3)
Set SW3 to “ON”.
OFF ↔ ON
When using CVM1/CV series, always set CPU execution processing (execution
control 2) in the PC system settings to simultaneous processing.
48
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:N)
2-6
Section 2-6
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:N)
Connect the NT20S to an OMRON PC by the NT link method.
To connect the NT20S to a PC by the NT link (1:N) method, the communication
conditions must be set with the memory switches.
S Setting NT link (1:N)
(Refer to “Selecting the Host Communication Method” (page 78))
S Setting the unit No. of the connected NT20S
(Selecting Unit Numbers (page 80))
2-6-1
Compatible PCs
The only OMRON PCs that can be connected in an NT link (1:N) are the C series
C200HX/HG/HE models. When making a connection, check the series and model
of the PC to which the connection is being made, and the type of host link unit that
is installed.
The following is a list of the PCs that can be connected to the NT20S via a host link
(1:N).
PC Series
C series
2-6-2
CPU Units Connectable
Using an Expansion
Communication Board
Connectable to
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HE-CPU32-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HE
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HG-CPU33-E
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU53-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HG
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU64-E
C200HX-CPU34-E
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU54-E
C200HX-CPU64-E
C200HX
CPU Unit with Built-in
NT Link Function
Connecting the NT20S Units
Referring to the illustrations below and using a cable appropriate for the CPU unit’s
connector, connect the NT20S units and the PC using RS-232C/RS-422A converter units (type NT-AL001).
An NT link connection cable can be used as the RS-232C cable. For details on
making a connection cable, refer to Appendix G “Method for Making the Cable for
Connection to the Host” (page 256).
Caution:
S After connecting the communication cable, always secure it with the screws.
Otherwise the cable may disconnect, causing operation to fail.
S The cable’s tensile load is 30 N. Do not subject it to loads greater than
this.
Otherwise a discontinuity may occur, causing operation to fail.
Reference: When connecting the C200HX/HG/HE and an RS-232C/RS-422A converter unit,
use a converter unit whose lot number is 15Y5 or later. Converter units of lot numbers previous to 15Y5 cannot be connected.
49
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:N)
Section 2-6
Connection Diagram
As shown in the figure below, connect multiple NT20S units to one PC. In an NT
link (1:N), up to eight NT20S units can be connected to one PC port.
C200HX/HG/HE
OMRON PC
While controlling machinery and
monitoring lines, controls the
NT20S units when necessary.
C200HX/HG/HE can be used.
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m),
or directly
connected
RS-422A/485 cable
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-422A/485 cable ()
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-422A/485 cable ()
() Total cable length: 500 m
RS-232C/RS-422A converter
unit, type NT-AL001
(Not required if the connection is
made at the RS-422A/485 port.)
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m)
NT20S
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m)
NT20S
(Up to eight NT20S units can be connected.)
[Maximum Number of NT20Ss Connectable to One Port]
The maximum numbers of NT20S units that can be connected to one port of each
of the C200HX, -HG, and -HE CPU units are indicated below.
50
S C200HE
:Up to 4 NT20S units per port (unit Nos. 0 to 3)
S C200HG, C200HX
:Up to 8 NT20S units per port (unit Nos. 0 to 7)
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:N)
Section 2-6
Converter Unit Connector Specifications
The terminal block specifications of the RS-232C/RS-422A converter unit are indicated here. For details on the method for making the connection cable, refer to
“Making the Cable” (page 265).
NT-AL001 RS-422A terminal block specifications
S Connected terminal block RS-422A terminal block (M3 screws)
S Electrical characteristics
Conform to EIA RS-422A
S Signal direction
Signal input and output is relative to the NT-AL001.
Terminal
Block Pin
No.
Signal Direction
Signal Name
Abbreviation
Input
Output
8
Request to send (*)
CSA
Ę
7
Request to send ())
CSB
Ę
6
Receive data (*)
RDA
Ę
5
Receive data ())
RDB
Ę
4
Send data (*)
SDA
3
Send data ())
SDB
2
Signal ground
SG (GND)
1
Functional ground
Ę
Ę
*
*
*
*
The CSA and CSB signals are for special applications.
Terminal Screws and Crimp Terminals
The terminal screws are M3 screws. Use M3 size crimp terminals. Tighten the terminal screws with a torque of 0.4 N·m.
Note:
During wiring, crimp terminals must be used for connections.
[Recommended crimp terminals]
Fork Type
6.2mm or less
Maker
Round Type
6.2mm or less
Type
Japan Solderless
Terminal MFG
1.25-N3A (Fork)
Molex
Y1.25-3.5L (Fork)
Recommended Wire Size
AWG22 to 18 (0.3 to 0.75mm2)
51
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:N)
Section 2-6
Wiring Method
For the connections between the PC and NT20S units, wire as shown below. The
wiring method differs depending on the cables used for connection.
S RS-422A connection
C200HX/HG/HE
OMRON PC
While controlling machinery and
monitoring lines, controls the
NT20S units when necessary.
C200H/HG/HE can be used.
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m),
or directly
connected RS-422A
cable
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-422A cable ()
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-422A cable ()
(1)
(2)
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m)
RS-422A cable ()
NT20S
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-422A cable ()
(2)
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m)
NT20S
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
(2)
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m)
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m)
NT20S
NT20S
() Total cable length: 500 m
[RS-232C Cable Wiring]
PT, PC
NT-AL001
Abbrev.
Pin No.
Pin No.
RS-232C
interface
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
SG
2
3
4
5
6
9
The pin numbers are the numbers at the
NT20S. For the pin numbers at the PC,
refer to the manual for the PC used.
52
Abbrev.
Connector
cover
Connector
cover
2
3
4
5
6
9
Shielding
wire
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
SG
RS-232C
interface
: Only connected at PC
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:N)
Section 2-6
[RS-422A Cable Wiring (1)]
S RS-232C connection at the PC side
NT-AL001
NT-AL001
Abbrev.
RS-422A
terminal
block
Functional
ground
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
Pin No.
Abbrev.
1
1
Functional
ground
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
Pin No.
RS-422A
terminal
block
Shielding
wire
S RS-422A connection at the PC side
PC
NT-AL001
Abbrev.
Pin No.
Abbrev.
Connector cover
1
Functional
ground
SDA
SDB
RDA
RDB
3
4
5
6
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
RS-422A
interface
RS-422A
terminal
block
Shielding
wire
[RS-422A Cable Wiring (2)]
NT-AL001
RS-422A
terminal
block
NT-AL001
Abbrev.
Pin No.
Pin No.
Abbrev.
Functional
ground
1
1
Functional
ground
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
RS-422A
terminal
block
Shielding
wire
53
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:N)
Section 2-6
S RS-485 connection
C200HX/HG/HE
OMRON PC
While controlling machinery and
monitoring lines, controls the
NT20S units when necessary.
C200H/HG/HE can be used.
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m), or
directly connected
RS-485 cable
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-485 cable ()
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m)
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-485 cable ()
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m)
NT20S
NT20S
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-485 cable ()
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m)
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-485 cable ()
RS-232C cable
(max. length: 2 m)
NT20S
NT20S
() Total cable length: 500m
[RS-232C Cable Wiring]
Same as for an RS-422A connection. Refer to “RS-422A connection” (page 52).
[RS-485 Cable Wiring]
S NT-AL001 to NT-AL001
NT-AL001
NT-AL001
Abbrev.
RS-422A
terminal
block
Functional
ground
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
Pin No.
Pin No.
Abbrev.
1
1
Functional
ground
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
RS-422A
terminal
block
Shielding
wire
S PC to NT-AL001
PC
NT-AL001
Pin No.
Abbrev.
Connector cover
1
Connector
cover
SDA
SDB
3
4
SDB
SDA
Abbrev.
RS-422A
interface
Shielding
wire
54
RS-422A
terminal
block
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:N)
Section 2-6
NT-AL001 Converter Unit DIP Switch Settings
The DIP switch settings to be made at an NT-AL001 used in the wiring depend on
whether it is connected part way along the RS-422A/485 cable or is at the end of
the RS-422A/485 cable.
S RS-422A connection, RS-232C at the PC side
C200HX/HG/HE
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
(End connection)
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-422A
cable ()
RS-422A
cable ()
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
() Total cable length: 500 m
(End connection)
NT20S
NT20S
NT20S
S RS-485 connection, RS-232C at the PC side
C200HX/HG/HE
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
(End connection)
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-485 cable ()
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-485 cable ()
() Total cable length: 500m
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
(End connection)
NT20S
NT20S
NT20S
55
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:N)
Section 2-6
S RS-422A connection, RS-422A at the PC side
C200HX/HG/HE
(End connection)
RS-422A
cable ()
(End connection)
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
(Communication board)
RS-422A
cable ()
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
NT20S
NT20S
() Total cable length: 500 m
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
NT20S
RS-485 connection, RS-485 at the PC side
C200HX/HG/HE
(End connection)
RS-485
cable ()
(End connection)
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
(Communication board)
RS-485
cable ()
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
NT20S
56
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
NT20S
NT20S
() Total cable length: 500 m
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
Connection to a PC by the NT Link (1:N)
2-6-3
Section 2-6
PC Switch Settings
When the PC and NT20S units have been connected, set the switches at the CPU
module at the PC side in order to enable communication using the NT link method.
S C series, C200HX/HG/HE
Write the communication conditions directly to the “PC system area” (data
memory) using a peripheral tool (e.g., SYSMAC support software). For details on
the operation for setting the “PC system area”, refer to the “SYSMAC C200HX/
HG/HE Installation Guide” (W302-E1-j).
[PC system setting area setting]
With C200HX/HG/HE, the setting area differs according to which port among the
standard port of the CPU unit and the port of the expansion communication board
is used for the connection.
Port
Channel #
C200HX/HG/HE
RS-232C port
DM6645
C200HX/HG/HE
port A
DM6555
C200HX/HG/HE
port B
DM6550
Writing Value
5j00
Settings
Use NT link (1:N)
j = highest unit No.
No
in the maximum
number of connect
connectable PTs (1 to 7). ()
() When using C200HE, the PT unit No. range is 1 to 3.
57
Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication
2-7
Section 2-7
Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication
Connect an NT20S-ST122-V1 and PC made by OMRON with an I/O cable.
2-7-1
Applicable PC Units
Before making the connection, check the series and model of the PC to which the
connection is to be made. A list of the PCs that can be connected to an NT20S
using C200H direct communication is presented below.
CPU Unit
C20H/C28HC40H/C60H
Model Name
CjjH
C200H-CPU01-E
C200H-CPU03-E
C200H-CPU11-E
C200H-CPU21-E
C200H
C200H-CPU23-E
C200H-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU01-E
C200HS-CPU03-E
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU11-E
C200HE-CPU32-E
C200HE
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HG-CPU33-E
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU53-E
C200HG
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HX-CPU34-E
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU54-E
C200HX
C200HX-CPU64-E
Caution:
58
With systems in which the user program operates in accordance with the PC cycle
time, since there is some fluctuation in the PC cycle time, the system operation
may not be consistent, and this should be born in mind when designing the system.
Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication
2-7-2
Section 2-7
Connection Method
Connect the NT20S and PC.
The connection conditions are different for C200H/HS, C200HX/HG/HE and
CjjH.
Caution:
S Always turn off the power at the PC and PT before connecting the C200H interface cable. Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
S After connecting the communication cable, always secure it with the screws.
Otherwise the cable may disconnect, causing operation to fail.
[I/O connection cable]
Use the following models of I/O connection cable.
Model
For connecting
C200H/HS/HE/HG/HX
For connecting CjjH
Caution:
Cable Length (L)
C200H-CN311
30 cm
NT20M-CNP711
C200H-CN711
70 cm
NT20M-CNP221
C200H-CN221
2m
NT20M-CNP521
C200H-CN521
5m
NT20M-CNP131
C200H-CN131
10 m
C20H-CN312
30 cm
NT20M-CNP712
C20H-CN712
70 cm
NT20M-CNP222
C20H-CN222
2m
The C200H interface side connector of NT20M-CNPjjj has been downsized.
S Keep the total length of I/O cables used within 12 m (6 m for CjjH).
S The cable’s tensile load is 30 N. Do not subject it to loads greater than this.
Otherwise a discontinuity may occur, causing operation to fail.
Reference: If a C200H-CNjjj or C20H-CNjjj is used as the I/O connection cable, the
connector will project beyond the bottom face of the NT20S.
If the I/O cable is passed through a hole or other opening, the hole or opening must
be at least 53 mmφ. Removing the top cover reduces this requirement to 33 mmφ
or larger. During installation, this cover must be replaced before securing the PT.
59
Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication
Section 2-7
Connection to C200H/C200HS and C200HX/HG/HE
Connect the CPU unit or I/O extension unit with an I/O cable. The following restrictions apply when making this connection.
S A maximum of one CPU unit and one I/O extension unit can be connected. Connection to two I/O extension units is not possible.
S Connection to a remote I/O slave station is not possible.
S There is only one C200H interface unit interface connector. This means that it is
not possible to connect an NT20S between a CPU unit and an I/O extension unit.
It must be the final connection in the system.
CPU unit
I/O connection cable
(C200H-CNjj1)
I/O extension unit
Max. 1 unit
(Rear face of NT20S)
I/O extension cable
(NT20M-CNPjj1
/C200H-CNjj1)
Host interface connector
60
Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication
Section 2-7
Connection to CjjH
Connect the CPU unit with an I/O connection cable. The following restrictions apply when making this connection.
S A maximum of one CPU unit can be connected.
S Up to two I/O units can be connected for the one CPU unit, but I/O extension
units cannot be connected.
S It is not possible to connect a CjjH I/O unit after the NT20S. It must be the final
connection in the system.
CPU unit
I/O connection cable
(C20H-CNjj2)
I/O unit
I/O connection cable
(C20H-CNjj2)
I/O unit
Max. 2 units
(Rear face of NT20S)
I/O connection cable
(NT20M-CNPjj2
/C20H-CNjj2)
Host interface connector
Note:
When connecting a CjjH, always install a noise filter.
1. Insert the noise filter in the power supply line of the CjjH.
2. Make the distance between the noise filter and the CjjH as short as possible
and separate it from the power supply line.
3. Install the noise filter case on the FG face.
4. Use a ZGB2202-01U(manufactured by TDK) or equivalent as the noise filter.
Noise filter
1
+24V
2
4
IN
OUT
3
+
24V
–
61
Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication
2-7-3
Section 2-7
Switching the Power ON/OFF When Using C200H Direct
Communication
The NT20S-ST122-V1 functions as an I/O extension unit of the PC. Use the following procedure to switch the power ON and OFF.
Caution:
Power ON
Depending on the method used to switch the power ON and OFF, the entire system may stop. Follow the procedure described below to switch the power ON and
OFF.
Switch the power ON as follows:
[NT20S power ON] . . . . “Connecting to Host” is displayed on the NT20S screen.
↓
[PC power ON] . . . . . . . After “Connecting to Host” has been displayed for
approximately 1 second, normal operation starts.
Note:
S If the power to the PC is switched on first, the CPU of the PC is subjected to a
system reset, making operations such as programming console impossible.
Then, when the power to the NT20S is switched on, “Connecting to Host” is displayed on the NT20S screen for approximately 1 second, after which normal operation starts.
S If the I/O connection cable is disconnected during system operation, an I/O bus
error occurs at the PC side and operation stops. If this happens, connect the I/O
connection cable and cancel the error.
Power OFF
Switch the power OFF as follows:
[Switch the power supplies to the PC and NT20S off simultaneously]
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The next time the power is switched ON, the NT20S displays the screen that was displayed when the power
was switched OFF.
Note:
S If the power to the NT20S is switched off first, the CPU of the PC is subjected to a
system reset, making operations such as programming console impossible.
S Switch off the system temporarily before replacing the NT20S (when a fault occurs, for example). If the power to the NT20S only is switched off, the system
stops immediately and this could cause an accident or damage machinery.
62
Host Connections by RS-232C
2-8
Section 2-8
Host Connections by RS-232C
Connect NT20S-ST128 with an RS-232C Interface Unit installed to the host computer with an RS-232C cable.
RS-232C connection allows a single NT20S to be connected to the host.
A computer or other control device with a built-in RS-232C interface is a suitable
host for connection to the NT20S.
2-8-1
Host Computer Communication Settings
Set the host communication conditions according to the following table.
Item
Note:
Setting
Baud rate
Set to the same baud rate as the NT20S: 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200
Data bits
7 bits/8 bits
Stop bits
1 bit/2 bits
Parity
Even, Odd, None
Flow control
RS/CS control
XON/XOFF control
None
Set the same communication conditions at the NT20S and Host.
Refer to the appropriate instruction manuals for the method of setting the Host
communication conditions.
Set to the maximum baud rate supported by both the NT20S and Host.
The communication condition settings of the NT20S-ST128 are set with the
RS-232C communication conditions memory switches. For details, refer to “Setting RS-232C Communication Conditions” on page 82.
2-8-2
Connector Pin Arrangement
The RS-232C connection between the NT20S and Host is described below.
NT20S Interface Unit
The connector specification is described below.
Electrical characteristics: Conforms to EIA RS-232C specifications.
Signal direction: Signal input and output are relative to the host computer.
1
5
6
9
63
Host Connections by RS-232C
Section 2-8
Connector
pin #
Note:
Signal name
Abbreviation
Signal direction
NT20S ← → Host
2
Send data
SD (TXD)
→
3
Receive data
RD (RXD)
←
4
Request to send
RS (RTS)
→
5
Clear to send
CS (CTS)
←
6
+5 V output, max. 150 mA
+5V
→
9
Signal ground
SG (GND)
—
Unlisted pins are not used.
For cable parts and the wiring method, refer to APPENDIX G Method for Making
the Cable for Connection to the Host (page 256).
Connecting to the Host Computer
Use a cable that is compatible with the RS-232C connector of the host to connect
the NT20S and the host (see the example in the figure below).
In the example shown here, the cable connects the 9-pin connector of the NT20S
and 25-pin connector of the host. If the host has a 9-pin RS-232C connector, use
an RS-232C cable with 9-pin connectors at both ends.
NT20S
9-pin connector
Host Interface connector
(RS-232C, 9-pin type)
25-pin connector
RS-232C cable
Caution:
S When making the connection, switch off the power to the NT20S and PC before
disconnecting or connecting any connector.
S After connecting the communication cable, always secure it with the screws.
Otherwise the cable may disconnect, causing operation to fail.
Note:
64
If using the +5 V supply of pin No.6, check first that the equipment that is to receive
the supply has a current capacity no greater than 150 mA. The +5 V output of the
NT20S is +5 V DC "5%, max. 150 mA.
SECTION 3
System Menu Operation
This section describes the operation of the System Menu focusing on the procedure to start up the NT20S.
Functions which will be convenient to use the NT20S and those which are useful for the system maintenance are also explained here.
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
Operation Flow by the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1 Changing the System Settings etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 System Menu and the Operation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2 Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-3 Operations with the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1 Initialization by Using the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2 Initialization by Using the DIP Switch (Forced Initialization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches . . .
3-5-1 Selecting the Host Communication Method (NT20S-ST121-EV3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2 Selecting the Host Link Communication Speed (NT20S-ST121-EV3 only) . . . . . . . . .
3-5-3 Selecting Unit Numbers (NT20S-ST121-EV3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-4 Setting RS-232C Communication Conditions (NT20S-ST128) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-5 Selecting the Automatic Reset Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registering the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Various System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8-1 Setting the Key Press Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8-2 Using the Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8-3 Backlight OFF Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8-4 Support Tool Mode Setting (NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8-5 Lamp Bit Control (NT20S-ST128) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9-1 I/O Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9-2 Checking the PT Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9-3 Checking the NT20S DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
67
67
68
68
69
70
72
72
74
75
78
79
80
82
84
86
90
91
91
92
94
95
97
99
99
107
109
65
Operation Flow by the System Menu
3-1
Section 3-1
Operation Flow by the System Menu
Follow the procedure below when using the NT20S for the first time or when
changing the system.
Create the Screen Data
Create the screen data to be displayed on the NT20S by using a support tool.
For the screen data creation, refer to the “NT-series Support Tool Operation Manual” (V028-E1-j).
Start Up the NT20S (Display the System Menu.) (page 68)
Turn ON the power to the NT20S.
When no screen data has been registered, the “SYSTEM MENU” will be displayed. If the NT20S enters the RUN mode, press appropriate touch switches to
display the System Menu.
Initializing Memory (page 72)
Select a System Menu and initialize the NT20S unit memory.
Memory Switch Settings (page 75)
Select the System Menu and make settings such as the communication conditions
for communication with the Host by setting the memory switches.
Registering the Screen Data (page 86)
Connect a support tool to the NT20S and transfer the screen data from the support
tool to the NT20S.
For the connection of a support tool, refer to Section 2-3 Connecting to the Support
Tool. (page 31)
Starting the Operation (page 90)
Connect to the PC/Host and start the operation.
System Maintenance (page 99)
If an error has occurred during operation, check the I/Os, settings, etc. referring to
this guide.
66
Starting the NT20S
3-2
Section 3-2
Starting the NT20S
When the NT20S is started, it will enter the RUN mode if system settings and
screen data registration have been completed. If no screen data has been registered or the screen data are destroyed, the System Menu will be displayed.
Before turning ON the power, check the following DIP switch settings on the
NT20S.
S SW2-3 “Switch to the System Menu enabled/disabled” is set to OFF (enabled).
S SW2-1 “Screen data forced initialize Yes/No” is set to No (ineffective).
For the DIP switch settings of the unit, refer to the “DIP switch settings” (page 24).
3-2-1
Changing the System Settings etc.
Follow the procedure below to change the system settings or screen data contents.
Procedure
1. Turn ON the power to the NT20S.
The NT20S will enter the RUN mode and the start-up screen will be displayed.
The start-up screen varies according to registered screen data.
2. Press appropriate touch switches to display the System Menu, and change
system settings. For the method for calling the System Menu, refer to the “Operations with the System Menu” (page 70).
Note:
If the NT20S has failed to start up normally; an error message is displayed or no
screen is displayed, memory needs to be initialized.
For the memory initializing procedure, refer to Section 3-4 Initializing memory
(page 72).
67
Operation modes and the System Menu
3-3
Section 3-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu
The NT20S operates in either “RUN”, “Transmit”, or “Maintenance” mode. The operation modes can be switched by using the System Menu.
3-3-1
System Menu and the Operation Modes
Select an operation mode by pressing the corresponding touch switch in the System Menu. The operation modes with respect to the System Menu are related to
each other as shown below.
For the operations with the System Menu, refer to the “Operations with the System
Menu” (page 70).
RUN mode
The NT20S runs in this
state. Controls from the
Host are enabled and
various indications and
I/O operations are made.
Transmit mode
When system settings
To change system settings or
and screen data
screen data contents
registration have been
completed
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Screen data and other
data are transmitted
between the NT20S and
a support tool.
Quit
Power ON
Transmit Mode
Maintenance mode
Maintenance mode
The NT20S maintenance
operations such as
memory initialize and
setting check are
executed.
68
Operation modes and the System Menu
3-3-2
Section 3-3
Menu Tree
The System Menu allows to effect various NT20S functions by using the touch
switches. The NT20S’s functions with respect to the System Menu are related as
shown below.
For the operations with the System Menu, refer to the “Operations with the System
Menu” (page 70).
SYSTEM MENU
Quit
Transmit Mode (page 86)
Maintenance Mode
MAINTENANCE MENU
Quit
PT Setting (page 107)
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
DIP-SW Status (page 109)
I/O CHECK MENU
Quit
LED Check (page 105)
Buzzer (page 104)
Touch Switch (page 99)
Data Memory (page 106)
LCD Display (page 103)
Comm. Check
INITIALIZE MEMORY MENU
Quit
Init. Screen (page 72)
NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1
COMM. CHECK MENU
Quit
Tool I/F (page 100)
NT20S-ST128
COMM. CHECK MENU
Quit
Tool I/F (page 101)
RS-232C I/F (page 102)
NT20S-ST121-EV3
MEMORY SWITCH MENU
Comm. Type (page 78)
Key Press Sound (page 91)
Buzzer Sound (page 92)
Backlight Off (page 94)
Support Tool Mode (page 95)
Automatic Reset (page 84)
Baud Rate (page 79)
NT20S-ST122-V1
First screen
Second screen
MEMORY SWITCH MENU
Key Press Sound (page 91)
Buzzer Sound (page 92)
Backlight Off (page 94)
Comm. Type (page 78)
Automatic Reset (page 84)
Support Tool Mode (page 95)
NT20S-ST128
MEMORY SWITCH MENU
Key Press Sound (page 91)
Buzzer Sound (page 92)
Backlight Off (page 94)
Automatic Reset (page 84)
First screen
Data Bits (page 82)
Stop Bits (page 82)
Parity Check (page 82)
Flow Control (page 82)
Baud Rate (page 82)
LMP Bit Control (page 97)
Second screen
69
Operation modes and the System Menu
3-3-3
Section 3-3
Operations with the System Menu
The following gives the procedure to call the System Menu, select the menu items,
and other operations with the System Menu.
Make sure that DIP SW2-3 “Switch to the System Menu enabled/disabled” is set to
OFF (enabled). If the setting is ON (disabled), the System Menu will not be displayed by following the procedure given below.
Displaying the System Menu Press appropriate touch switches to display the System Menu as mentioned below. The “RUN” LED goes off when the System Menu is displayed.
The NT20S display screen has four touch switches to display the System Menu in
the four corners (about 8 mm x 8 mm size). Press any two of these switches at the
same time to call the System Menu screen.
RUN mode
[SYSTEM MENU]
Press any two
of these four
corners at the
same time.
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance mode
Note that the touch switches used to call the System Menu are not displayed on
the screen. If a touch switch displayed in a corner is pressed first, the touch switch
will function and the System Menu will not be displayed. To successfully call the
System Menu, first press a corner where no touch key is displayed, and then,
press any other corner regardless of the presence of a touch key.
If a screen has the touch switches registered at all of the four corners, it is impossible to call the System Menu from the screen.
A “system key” function can be assigned to a touch switch. Pressing the touch
switch so assigned on the screen can easily display the System Menu. For the
relationship between the system key and the touch switch, refer to the “System
key functions” (page 139).
70
Operation modes and the System Menu
Selecting the Menu Items
Section 3-3
Press (touch) a menu item on the screen to select the item.
Menu items allow to make the ON/OFF selection or to call subsequent menu or
screen.
Example 1
To call the “Maintenance mode menu” by pressing the “Maintenance Mode” on the
System Menu screen:
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
System Menu Items
The System Menu items and the functions are as given below.
Menu Item
Function
Quit
The System Menu screen is cleared and the NT20S will return to
the RUN mode.
Transmit Mode
The Transmit Mode screen will be displayed to allow the transmission of the screen data between the NT20S and the support
tool. For the transmission of the screen data, refer to Section 3-6
Registering the Screen Data (page 86).
Maintenance Mode The MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed to allow the maintenance of the NT20S system.
Switching from the System Menu to the RUN mode
The NT20S will exit the System Menu and switch to the RUN mode in the cases
mentioned below.
S Selecting “Quit” in the System Menu.
S The screen (touch switches) is not pressed for over 10 seconds.
71
Initializing Memory
3-4
Section 3-4
Initializing Memory
If the NT20S is used for the first time or if the screen data is ruined and the NT20S
cannot be normally started, the memory needs to be initialized.
The memory initialization is required in the cases mentioned below.
S When the NT20S is used for the first time or when an error message indicating
that the screen data is ruined etc. when the NT20S is started.
á Use the “Maintenance Mode” – “Init. Memory” in the System Menu.
S When the NT20S has made a buzzer sound and the screen has disappeared
during the start-up or operation.
á Use the NT20S DIP SW2-1 “Screen data forced initialize Yes/No”.
When an error has occurred, the error messages such as “Screen data corrupted”
will be displayed. For the error messages displayed on the screen, refer to Section
7-2 “Responding to Displayed Error Messages” (page 237).
Note:
Initializing the screen data memory will erase entire screen data registered in the
NT20S. Make sure that there are backup copies of the screen data on floppy disks
before starting the initialization.
S Data of the NT20S to be initialized
Screen data
System memory
Memory table
Mark data
Direct information (NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1)
3-4-1
Initialization by Using the System Menu
Initialize the screen data memory by following the procedure given below.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
72
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Initializing Memory
Section 3-4
Select “Init. Memory”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
Select “Init. Screen”.
[ INITIALIZE MEMORY MENU ]
Quit
Init. Screen
Initialize Screen Memory?
Yes
No
No direct information is set!
Use the Support Tool
to set the PT Control Area
and PT Notify Area
Select “Yes”.
The screen data memory is initialized. During the initialization,
the “Initializing” message will be
displayed.
If “No” is selected, the memory
initialization will be canceled
and the NT20S returns to the
“operation mode”.
Example:
NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1
Direct information is also initialized. Set the direct information
with the support tool.
After initialization of the screen data memory, the system enters the operation
mode. At this point, nothing is displayed on the screen of the NT20S. Return to the
System Menu, select the Transmit Mode, and transmit the screen data from the
support tool.
If the screen data cannot be initialized for any reason, the message “An Error Occur Initializing Memory” is displayed.
73
Initializing Memory
3-4-2
Section 3-4
Initialization by Using the DIP Switch (Forced Initialization)
Note:
Be sure to turn the power OFF before setting the NT20S DIP switch.
Set the DIP switch as follows to initialize the screen data memory.
Operation 1. Set DIP SW2-1 on the NT20S to ON and turn the power ON or reset the
NT20S.
Initialize Screen Memory?
Yes
Select “Yes”.
The screen data memory is initialized. During the initialization,
the “Initializing” message will be
displayed.
No
Initialized the
Screen Data Memory.
Turn OFF the DIP Switch 2-1
and push the Reset Switch,
then return to RUN mode.
2. Turn the NT20S power to OFF.
3. Set NT20S DIP SW2-1 to OFF and turn the power ON.
Reference: S Selecting “No” will cancel the memory initialization. In either case, when changing the system settings or registering screen data, display the system menu after
setting DIP switch SW2-1 to the OFF position while the NT20S power is OFF,
then switching the power back ON.
S The NT20S DIP SW2-1 is used to set “Screen data forced initialize Yes/No”. Setting this to Yes selects “effective”, and No “ineffective”.
74
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC/Host by Using the Memory Switches Section 3-5
3-5
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host
by Using the Memory Switches
The communications between the NT20S and a PC/Host are called the host communications.
The NT20S models can be connected to the host using the following communication methods.
NT20S-ST121-EV3
NT20S-ST122-V1
NT20S-ST128
:Host link or NT link (both direct connection)
:C200H direct communication (direct connection)
:RS-232C communication (command control)
With NT20S-ST121-V3, the host link, NT link (1:1), and NT link (1:N) communication methods are set with memory switches. Other settings such as baud rate and
automatic resetting of communication are also set with memory switches.
This section describes the communications condition settings by using the
memory switches.
Memory Switches
The NT20S has the memory areas used to store the PC connection method, communications conditions, system settings, etc. which can be used as the switches
and called the “memory switches”. Since the memory switches use the flash
memory, the stored data can be held even when the power supply is turned OFF.
Setting Functions and the Memory Switch Menu
The memory switches can be set easily by using the memory switch menu in the
System Menu.
The following settings can be made with the memory switches. Refer to the subsequent pages and Section 3-8 Various System Settings for the details of each setting and function.
[When using NT20S-ST121-EV3, host link/NT link]
jHost link method
MEMORY SW MENU
(1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
Bk light Off
OFF
None
Tool Mode
NT20M
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
MEMORY SW MENU
(2/2)
Automatic Reset
No
Baud Rate
9600bps
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
75
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC/Host by Using the Memory Switches Section 3-5
jNT Link method (1:1)
MEMORY SW MENU
(1/2)
Comm. Type
NT Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
Bk light Off
OFF
None
Tool Mode
NT20M
Quit
MEMORY SW MENU
Automatic Reset
(2/2)
Quit
No
Page
Page
WRT&
EXIT
WRT&
EXIT
jNT Link method (1:N)
MEMORY SW MENU
(1/2)
Quit
Comm. Type
NT Link (1:N)
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
Bk light Off
OFF
None
Tool Mode
NT20M
Page
MEMORY SW MENU
Automatic Reset
No
Unit No.
7
WRT&
EXIT
(2/2)
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
S Key Press Sound 3-8 Various System Settings (page 91)
S Buzzer Sound
3-8 Various System Settings (page 92)
S Backlight Off
3-8 Various System Settings (page 94)
S Comm. Type
Selecting the Host Communication Method (page 78)
S Baud Rate
Selecting the Host Link Communication Speed (page 79)
S Automatic Reset
Selecting the Automatic Reset Function (page 84)
S Tool Mode
3-8 Various System Settings (page 95)
[NT20S-ST122-V1 C200H]
Key Sound
ON
Buzzer Sound
ON
Bk light Off
10min
Comm. Type
Automatic Reset
C200H
Yes
Tool Mode
NT20S
Quit
WRT&
EXIT
S Key Press Sound 3-8 Various System Settings (page 91)
76
S Buzzer Sound
3-8 Various System Settings (page 92)
S Backlight Off
3-8 Various System Settings (page 94)
S Comm. Type
Fixed as “C200H”
S Automatic Reset
Selecting the Automatic Reset Function (page 84)
S Tool Mode
3-8 Various System Settings (page 95)
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC/Host by Using the Memory Switches Section 3-5
[NT20S-ST128 RS-232C]
Key Press Sound
ON
Buzzer Sound
ON
Bk light Off
10min
Automatic Reset
Yes
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
Data Bits
8bits
Stop Bits
1bit
Parity Check
Even
Flow Control
RS/CS
Baud Rate
19200bps
LMP Bit Control
Enable
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
S Key Press Sound 3-8 Various System Settings (page 91)
S Buzzer Sound
3-8 Various System Settings (page 92)
S Backlight Off
3-8 Various System Settings (page 94)
S Automatic Reset
Selecting the Automatic Reset Function (page 84)
S Data Bits
Setting RS-232C Communication Conditions
(page 82)
S Stop Bits
Setting RS-232C Communication Conditions
(page 82)
S Parity Check
Setting RS-232C Communication Conditions
(page 82)
S Flow Control
Setting RS-232C Communication Conditions
(page 82)
S Baud Rate
Setting RS-232C Communication Conditions
(page 82)
S LMP Bit Control
3-8 Various System Settings (page 97)
77
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC/Host by Using the Memory Switches Section 3-5
3-5-1
Selecting the Host Communication Method (NT20S-ST121-EV3
only)
The NT20S-ST121-EV3 can be connected to a PC by the host link or the NT link.
Either link can be selected by setting the “Comm. Type” memory switch. The factory setting has been made to the “Host link”.
Select the host communication method by the menu operation from the System
Menu as mentioned below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “Memory Switch”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
MEMORY SW MENU
(1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
Bk light Off
OFF
None
Tool Mode
NT20M
Quit
Page
Repeatedly
pressing
the
“Comm. Type” touch switch
causes the setting to cycle
through the options “Host link”,
“NT link”, and “NT Link 1:N”, in
that order.
WRT&
EXIT
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT&EXIT] touch switch. To quit without setting, press [Quit].
Reference: The communication method must be selected according to the method that the
connecting PC supports.
78
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC/Host by Using the Memory Switches Section 3-5
3-5-2
Selecting the Host Link Communication Speed
(NT20S-ST121-EV3 only)
When using the NT20S-ST121-EV3 with the host link, the baud rate of the communications with the PC can be set. Use the “Baud Rate” switch and select 9600
bps or 19200 bps.
The factory setting has been made at 9600 bps.
Select the baud rate of the communication with the PC by the menu operation from
the System Menu as mentioned below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “Memory Switch”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
MEMORY SW MENU
(1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
Bk light Off
OFF
None
Tool Mode
NT20M
MEMORY SW MENU
Quit
Page
(2/2)
Automatic Reset
No
Baud Rate
9600bps
Select “Page”.
If the host link is not selected,
press the “Comm. Type” touch
switch and select “Host link”.
WRT&
EXIT
Quit
Page
Each time the “Baud Rate”
touch switch is pressed, the setting option alternates between
“9600 bps” and “19200 bps”.
WRT&
EXIT
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT&EXIT] touch switch. To quit without setting, press [Quit].
79
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC/Host by Using the Memory Switches Section 3-5
3-5-3
Selecting Unit Numbers (NT20S-ST121-EV3 only)
When using NT20S-ST121-EV3 with the NT link (1:N) communication method,
set unit numbers.
When using NT link (1:N), unit numbers are used to identify each of the multiple
PTs connected to a single PC port. Set a different unit number for each of the PTs
connected to the port.
The unit numbers that can be set differ in accordance with the type of host PC as
follows.
C200HE
C200HG, C200HX
:Unit Nos. 0 to 3
:Unit Nos. 0 to 7
Set the unit numbers by following the menu operation from the System Menu described below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “Memory Switch”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
MEMORY SW MENU
80
(1/2)
Comm. Type
NT Link 1:N
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
Bk light Off
OFF
None
Tool Mode
NT20M
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
Press the “Comm Type” touch
switch to select “NT link (1:N)”.
Select “Page”.
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC/Host by Using the Memory Switches Section 3-5
MEMORY SW MENU
Automatic Reset
No
Unit No.
7
(2/2)
Quit
Page
Repeatedly pressing the “Unit
No.” touch switch cycles
through the numbers that can be
set.
WRT&
EXIT
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT & EXIT] touch switch. To quit without
setting, press [Quit]. The run mode will be established.
81
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC/Host by Using the Memory Switches Section 3-5
3-5-4
Setting RS-232C Communication Conditions (NT20S-ST128)
When using an NT20S-ST128 (using the RS-232C interface for communication
with the host), set the following communication conditions.
S Data Bits
S Stop Bits
S Parity Check
S Flow Control
S Baud Rate
Set the same communication conditions at the host and the NT20S. You are recommended to set the highest baud rate that can be used by the host and NT20S.
The factory settings are as follows:
S Data Bits
8bits
S Stop Bits
2bits
S Parity Check
Even
S Flow Control
None
S Baud Rate
9600bps
Set the conditions of the communication with the Host by the menu operation from
the System Menu as mentioned below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “Memory Switch”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
82
DIP-SW Status
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC/Host by Using the Memory Switches Section 3-5
Key Press Sound
ON
Buzzer Sound
ON
Bk light Off
10min
Automatic Reset
Yes
Select “Page down”.
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
Data Bits
8bits
Stop Bits
1bit
Parity Check
Even
Flow Control
RS/CS
Baud Rate
19200bps
LMP Bit Control
Enable
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
' The selected option displayed when the corresponding touch switch is
pressed: the options for each switch are indicated below:
Note:
S Data Bits
7bits / 8bits
S Stop Bits
1bit / 2bits
S Parity Check
None / Even / Odd
S Flow Control
None / RS/CS / XON/XOFF
S Baud Rate
2400bps / 4800bps / 9600bps / 19200bps
S LMP Bit Control
Enable / Disable
Use the same condition settings as set for the host. It is recommended that the
highest baud rate possible is selected for both the host and the NT20S.
' For details on lamp bit control, refer to Section 3-8 “Various System Settings”
on page 91.
83
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC/Host by Using the Memory Switches Section 3-5
3-5-5
Selecting the Automatic Reset Function
The “Automatic Reset” memory switch is used to set whether or not the communication is automatically reset after the occurrence of a communication error.
The factory setting has been made at “No”.
Select the baud rate of the communication with the PC by the menu operation from
the System Menu as mentioned below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “Memory Switch”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
Select “Page”.
MEMORY SW MENU
84
(1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
Bk light Off
OFF
None
Tool Mode
NT20M
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC/Host by Using the Memory Switches Section 3-5
MEMORY SW MENU
(2/2)
Automatic Reset
No
Baud Rate
9600bps
Quit
Page
Each time the “Automatic Reset” touch switch is pressed, the
setting option “Yes” alternates
with “No”.
(The figure to the left shows the
NT20S-ST121-EV3 screen.)
WRT&
EXIT
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT&EXIT] touch switch. To quit without setting, press [Quit].
S “No”: If a communication error has occurred, corresponding error message is
displayed and the operation stops.
S “Yes”: If a communication error has occurred, corresponding error message will
not be displayed and the operation will be automatically reset.
85
Registering the Screen Data
3-6
Section 3-6
Registering the Screen Data
The screen data is created by using the support tool and registered to the NT20S
screen data memory. This section describes the procedure to register the screen
data to the NT20S. For the screen data creation and the support tool operation,
refer to the NT-series Support Tool Operation Manual (V028-E1-1).
Reference: The screen data transmission speed can be increased by setting “Hi speed” for
“Communication Mode” on the Tool Settings screen of the support tool.
Unit of Screen Transmission – Transmission in File Units
The NT20S uses several screens which are switched on its display. The screen
data of one NT20S unit corresponds to the files created by using the support tool.
Select a file which contains the screen data to be transmitted when selecting the
screen data to be transmitted to the NT20S so that the required screen data can be
transmitted to the NT20S.
Screen data file
NT20S
Screen 1
Screen 1
Screen 2
Screen 2
:
Screen N
All screen data are
transmitted by one operation.
:
Screen N
Memory table
Memory table
Mark data
Mark data
System memory
System memory
(Direct information)
(Direct information)
When the screen data is transmitted from the support tool to the NT20S, the
screen data already existing in the NT20S will be erased.
If an error message and the System Menu are displayed immediately after the
NT20S has been started, the screen data memory needs to be initialized.
86
Registering the Screen Data
Section 3-6
Data Transmission in Screen Units
The NT20S allows the transmission of data for specified screens. By selecting the
screen number of the screen to be transmitted using the support tool, it is possible
to transmit the required screen only to the NT20S (it is also possible to transmit
multiple screens in a batch).
When changes have also been made to the memory tables or direct connection
information, transmit the changed data to the NT20S too, for example by using
transmission in screen units.
Support Tool
NT20S
Screen 1
Screen 2
Screen 2
Only the required screen data
is transmitted
:
Screen N
Memory table
(Direct information)
Caution:
When screen data transmission is in screen units, if there is data other than screen
data, for example memory table or direct access changes, transmit this data also.
Reference: When screen data is transmitted to an NT20S, it is written into a free area of the
memory without overwriting the existing data. This means that if data transmission in screen units is performed frequently, there will come a time when there is no
more free area in the memory and further transmission is impossible. If this happens, transmit the data in file units to reorganize the contents of the NT20S
memory.
Transmitting the Screen Data from the Support Tool
To transmit the screen data from the support tool to the NT20S, connect the
NT20S to the computer on which the support tool is being used, and follow the procedure below.
Reference: When the screen data transmission is attempted, the screen data memory in the
NT20S is automatically initialized before new screen data is transmitted. It is not
necessary to initialize the screen data memory by using the menu before the
screen data transmission.
The NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST128 uses the same connector for screen data transmission and connection to the Host. If this connector is currently connected to the
host, disconnect the cable from it and connect it to the support tool (personal computer) before attempting screen data transmission.
87
Registering the Screen Data
Section 3-6
Operation 1. Connect the NT20S to a PC in which the support tool has been installed and
turn on the power to the NT20S.
2. Turn ON the computer and start up the support tool.
3. Enter the “Transmit Mode” by operating the menu of the NT20S as mentioned
below.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Select “Transmit Mode”.
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ TRANSMIT MODE ]
ABORT
Tool Mode : NT20S
The transmit mode is established. When using an NT20SST121-EV3/ST122-V1, the
“support tool mode” setting will
be displayed on the bottom line
of the screen, as shown in the
figure to the left (nothing is displayed here on the screen of the
NT20S-ST128).
4. Select a screen data to be transmitted to the NT20S in the File Selection
screen of the support tool, and press the Send key.
5. The NT20S will display the following screen when the screen data is being
transmitted.
[ TRANSMIT MODE ]
Tool → PT
Screen Data
0 KB
ABORT
88
Tool Mode : NT20S
Registering the Screen Data
Section 3-6
6. When the screen data transmission is completed, the support tool will display
the following screen.
– – – – – Help Message – – – – –
Data successfully transmitted
(Hit any key to continue.....)
7. Press any key on the support tool to return to the File Selection screen.
8. Pressing the ABORT touch switch in the Transmit Mode screen of the NT20S
will exit the Transmit Mode and enter the RUN Mode.
Note:
Press the “Abort” touch switch on the NT20S when the screen data transmission is
completed. Unless this touch switch is pressed, the screen data will not be correctly registered. If the “Abort” touch switch is pressed during transmission, the screen
data will not be correctly registered.
If screen data cannot be transmitted from the support tool, confirm normal communication between the NT20S and the support tool (Personal computer). Use the
tool communication check function in the Maintenance Mode of the NT20S to
check communication with the support tool. Refer to “Checking the Communications with the Support Tool” on page 100.
Precautions to be Observed During the Screen Data Transmission
When any of the following or a system error occurs during the screen data transmission, the transmitted screen data will not be registered correctly to the NT20S.
If an error message is displayed in the System Menu and the RUN Mode cannot be
selected, the screen data memory needs to be initialized.
S The power to the NT20S is interrupted or reset.
S The power to the computer on which the support tool is running is interrupted or
reset.
S The cable connecting the NT20S to the computer on which the support tool is
running is interrupted or reset.
S The “Abort” touch switch on the NT20S screen is pressed to end the transmission.
S The ESC key on the support tool is pressed to end the transmission.
When the power to the NT20S is turned ON or reset, the screen data is checked.
However, if any of the above occurs during the screen data transmission, the
screen may disappear and other unexpected problems may occur.
In the case of such problems, set DIP SW2-1 to ON to initialize the memory.
For the memory initialization by using the DIP switch, refer to the “Initialization by
using the DIP switch” (page 74).
89
Starting the Operation
3-7
Section 3-7
Starting the Operation
After completing the screen data transmission and setting the communication
conditions, connect the NT20S to the Host and start operation.
Switching to the RUN mode Press the Quit touch switch in the System Menu. The start-up screen in the RUN
mode will be displayed.
If the NT20S has failed to start correctly; e.g., the start-up screen is not displayed,
an error message is displayed, or the screen is not displayed at all, refer to Section
7-2 “Responding to Displayed Error Messages” (page 237) and take appropriate
action.
Reference: When using an NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1, the screen displayed on startup is
the one specified in the screen switch setting of the PT status control area.
When using an NT20S-ST128, the startup screen is specified with the support tool
when creating the screen data. If no startup screen is specified, screen No.1 becomes the startup screen. If no screen data is registered for the startup screen,
the error message “Screen not registered” is displayed. For details on screen
numbers, see 4-3 “Screen Display” (page 122).
Confirming the Communications between the NT20S and the PC/Host
When using the NT20S-ST128, use the RS-232C communication check function
in the Maintenance Mode to confirm normal communication between the NT20S
and the host. Refer to “Checking the Communications with the Host” on page 102.
When using the NT20-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1, run the Host program and check
that the following operations are executed normally.
S Confirm that the NT20S screens switch according to the Host program execution.
If the screens do not switch correctly, check the connection between the NT20S
and the Host and also check the settings.
Refer to Section 2 Hardware Settings and Connections.
S Confirm that the information selected by the NT20S touch switches has been
correctly sent to the PC by displaying the information of bits and words by using a
peripheral tool (LSS etc.). If the information sent from the NT20S has not been
correctly received by the PC, check the screen data settings (specifically the
switch settings).
For the details of the screen data creation, refer to the NT-series Support Tool
Operation Manual (V028-E1-j).
90
Various System Settings
3-8
Section 3-8
Various System Settings
The NT20S can set a variety of functions to the memory switches which are convenient during the operation. This section describes the memory switch settings related to the operation environment.
3-8-1
Setting the Key Press Sound
Whether or not the key press sound is given when the NT20S touch switch is
pressed can be set with the memory switch.
The factory setting has been set to give the key press sound when the touch key is
pressed.
Set the key press sound by the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “Memory Switch”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
MEMORY SW MENU
(1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
Bk light Off
OFF
None
Tool Mode
NT20M
Quit
Page
Each time the “Key Sound”
touch switch is pressed, the setting option “ON” alternates with
“OFF”.
(The figure to the left shows the
NT20S-ST121-EV3 screen.)
WRT&
EXIT
91
Various System Settings
Section 3-8
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT & EXIT] touch switch. To quit without
setting, press [Quit].
S ON: The key press sound will be given for 0.2 second when a touch switch is
pressed.
S OFF: The key press sound will not be given when a touch key is pressed.
3-8-2
Using the Buzzer
The NT20S can set a buzzer to indicate the occurrence of an emergency or an
NT20S error.
Setting the Buzzer
Except when the buzzer has been set so as not to sound at all, the buzzer will
sound when an error occurs. To set the buzzer to sound in other cases, the following two procedures can be used.
S Controlled by the Host
It is possible to control the NT20S from the Host to sound the buzzer during the
operation.
Refer to Section 5-4 NT20S Status Control (page 191).
S Set the buzzer as a screen data attribute by using the support tool.
When creating the screen data by using the support tool, set the buzzer as a
screen attribute so that the buzzer will sound. When the screen in which this attribute has been set is displayed, the NT20S will give the buzzer sound.
If the control by the Host and the display of the screen in which the buzzer attribute
has been set are executed simultaneously, the priority is given to the control by the
Host. Refer to the NT-series Support Tool Operation Manual (V028-E1-j).
To Stop the Buzzer Sound
The buzzer sound can be stopped by the following operation.
S Control by the Host
S Switch the screen to a screen which does not have a buzzer attribute.
S Press the touch switch to which the buzzer stop attribute has been set.
Reference: If a buzzer stop attribute has been set to a touch switch created on the screen in
which the buzzer attribute has been set, such touch switch can be used to stop the
buzzer sound. For details on setting buzzer attributes for touch switches, see “Allocation of System Key Functions” (page 139).
92
Various System Settings
Section 3-8
Types of the Buzzer Sounds The following buzzer sounds can be set.
S Continuous sound: The buzzer continues to sound.
S Intermittent sound: The buzzer sounds intermittently at constant intervals.
Reference: If both the continuous buzzer and the intermittent buzzer are instructed by the
Host, the continuous buzzer will sound.
Setting the Buzzer
Use the memory switches to set whether or not the buzzer sounds when the buzzer sound has been instructed by the Host or with a screen attribute or when an
error has occurred.
The factory setting is “ON”, which means that the buzzer will sound when a command is received from the host, when a screen for which the buzzer attribute is set
is displayed, and when errors occur.
Set the buzzer sound by the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned
below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “Memory Switch”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
MEMORY SW MENU
(1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
Bk light Off
OFF
None
Tool Mode
NT20M
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
Repeatedly pressing the “Buzzer Sound” touch switch cycles
through the setting options
“ON”, “ERR ON”, and “OFF”, in
that order.
(The figure to the left shows the
NT20S-ST121-EV3 screen.)
93
Various System Settings
Section 3-8
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT&EXIT] touch switch. To quit without setting, press [Quit].
S OFF: The buzzer will not sound at all during the operation.
S When “ON” is set, the buzzer will sound when a command is received from the
host, when a screen for which the buzzer attribute is set is displayed, and when
errors occur.
S When “ERR ON” has been set, the buzzer will sound only when an error has
occurred.
Reference: The buzzer will sound when “Buzzer check” is selected in the Maintenance Mode
regardless of the buzzer setting.
3-8-3
Backlight OFF Function
The NT20S has a function that turns off the backlight of the LCD panel to maximize
its service life if no operation is performed for a certain period of time.
Turning on the Backlight
When a touch switch on the NT20S is pressed or a screen is switched or redisplayed by the PC when the backlight is off by the backlight off function, the backlight will turn on. Any changes of numeric values or characters displayed on the
screen will not effect the backlight to turn on again.
Setting the Backlight OFF Function
Use the memory switches to set whether or not the backlight off function is used
and the length of time to turn off the backlight.
The factory setting has been made so as to turn off the backlight if no operation has
been performed for 10 minutes.
Set the backlight off function by the menu operation from the System Menu as
mentioned below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “Memory Switch”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
94
DIP-SW Status
Various System Settings
Section 3-8
MEMORY SW MENU
(1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
Bk light Off
OFF
None
Tool Mode
NT20M
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
Repeatedly pressing the “BK
light Off” touch switch cycles
through the setting options “10
min”, 1 hour, and None, in that
order.
(The figure to the left shows the
NT20S-ST121-V2 screen.)
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT&EXIT] touch switch. To quit without setting, press [Quit].
S None: The backlight off function is not used. As long as no operation is performed, the same screen remains to be displayed.
S 10 minutes: The backlight will be turned off when no operation has been performed for 10 minutes.
S 1 hour: The backlight will be turned off when no operation has been performed
for 1 hour.
Caution:
Correct Use:
3-8-4
Do not press touch switches carelessly while the backlight is off or while nothing is
displayed on the screen.
Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
Only press touch switches after confirming system safety.
Continuous display of the same pattern for an extended time (as a guide, about 1
hour) will lead to the formation of an afterimage.
In order to prevent this, either use the screen saver function or periodically switch
screens.
Support Tool Mode Setting (NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1 Only)
By setting “Tool Mode” to “NT20M”, the NT20M-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1 can be
used in the same way as the conventional NT20M, and it becomes possible to use
the NT20M/NT2000M/NT600M support tool (Ver.4.j).
However, the following restrictions apply when “NT20M” is set:
S Ver.5 of the direct connection function cannot be used.
S The PT type setting must be “NT20M”.
S High-speed data transfer with the support tool is not possible.
S It is not possible to transfer the direct information alone.
S When screen data transmission is in screen units, simultaneous transmission of
multiple screens is not possible. An attempt to transmit multiple screens may
destroy the screen data.
S When screen data transmission is in screen units, transmission with verification
set is not possible.
S The image data memory must be initialized before starting transfer in file units.
S Screen data for RS-232C communication cannot be used.
95
Various System Settings
Section 3-8
Set the support tool mode by the menu operation from the system menu shown
below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “Memory Switch”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
MEMORY SW MENU
(1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
Bk light Off
OFF
None
Tool Mode
NT20M
Quit
Page
Each time the “Tool Mode” touch
switch is pressed, the setting
option alternates
between
“NT20S” and “NT20M”.
(The figure to the left shows the
NT20S-ST121-EV3 screen.)
WRT&
EXIT
To quit after setting the selected item, press the WRT & EXIT touch switch. To quit
without setting, press the Quit touch switch. The NT20S will enter the RUN mode.
S When “NT20M” is set, the NT20M compatible mode is established and the terminal can be used as an NT20M.
S When “NT20S” is set, the terminal can be used as an NT20S.
96
Various System Settings
3-8-5
Section 3-8
Lamp Bit Control (NT20S-ST128)
When using the NT20S-ST128 (using the RS-232C interface for communication
with the host), you can select whether lamp statuses are controlled by bit designation or not.
The factory setting for this function is Enable (lamps numbered 0 to 31 controlled
by bits).
Set the lamp bit control function by the menu operation from the System Menu as
mentioned below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “Memory Switch”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
Key Press Sound
ON
Buzzer Sound
ON
Bk light Off
10min
Automatic Reset
Yes
Select “Page down”.
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
97
Various System Settings
Section 3-8
Data Bits
8bits
Stop Bits
1bit
Parity Check
Even
Flow Control
RS/CS
Baud Rate
19200bps
LMP Bit Control
Enable
Quit
Page
Each time the “LMP Bit Control”
touch switch is pressed, the setting option “Enable” alternates
with “Disable”.
WRT&
EXIT
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT&EXIT] touch switch. To quit without setting, press [Quit].
S When “Disable” is set, the control of lamp display statuses by bits is not possible.
The lamps numbered 0 to 31 can be controlled only by specifying lamp numbers.
S When “Enable” is set, lamp control by bits is possible. This means that the lamps
numbered 0 to 31 can be controlled by specifying either lamp numbers or bits.
However, it is not possible to make “lit”/“flashing” status selections by specifying
lamp numbers: the selection made when the screen data was created remains
effective.
98
System Maintenance
3-9
Section 3-9
System Maintenance
The NT20S has the self maintenance functions such as I/O check and setting status check.
3-9-1
I/O Check
The I/O operations for the following items of the NT20S are checked by the I/O
check function.
S Touch Switch
S Communications with the support tool
S Communications with the Host (NT20S-ST128 RS-232C only)
S LCD
S LED Check
S The Screen Data Memory
S Buzzer
Checking the Touch Switches
Execute a touch switch check by the menu operation from the System Menu as
mentioned below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “I/O Check”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
Select “Touch Switch”.
[ I/O CHECK MENU ]
Quit
LCD Display
LED Check
Comm. Check
Buzzer
Touch Switch
Data Memory
99
System Maintenance
Section 3-9
A panel of 6-row x 12-column touch switches, each switch sized 1 x 1 cm, will be
displayed.
“EXIT” switch to exit the
touch switch check menu.
The touch switch is normal if it is
highlighted while it is pressed.
S Press a touch switch on the screen. If the touch switch is highlighted while it is
pressed, the touch switch is normally functioning.
S When the check is finished, press the EXIT touch switch. The I/O check menu
will be redisplayed.
Reference: If memory switch setting for the key press sound has been made for ON, the key
press sound will be made when a touch switch is pressed.
The statuses of touch switches pressed during an I/O check are not notified to the
host.
Checking the Communications with the Support Tool
Execute a NT20S-to-support tool communication check by the menu operation
from the System Menu as mentioned below.
The NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST128 uses the same connector for connection to the
support tool and connection to the Host. If this connector is currently connected to
the host, disconnect the cable from it and connect it to the support tool (personal
computer) before attempting screen data transmission.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “I/O Check”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
100
DIP-SW Status
System Maintenance
Section 3-9
Select “Comm. Check”.
[ I/O CHECK MENU ]
Quit
LCD Display
LED Check
Comm. Check
Buzzer
Touch Switch
Data Memory
Select “Tool I/F”.
[ COMM. CHECK MENU ]
Quit
Tool I/F
[ TOOL I/F INPUT CHECK ]
The data received from the connected support tool are displayed in hexadecimal numbers.
EXIT
When the check is finished, press the Exit touch switch. The NT20S will enter the
I/O CHECK MENU.
101
System Maintenance
Section 3-9
Checking the Communications with the Host (NT20S-ST128)
Execute a NT20S-to-Host communication check by the menu operation from the
System Menu as mentioned below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “I/O Check”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
Select “Comm. Check”.
[ I/O CHECK MENU ]
Quit
LCD Display
LED Check
Comm. Check
Buzzer
Touch Switch
Data Memory
Select “RS-232C I/F”.
[ COMM. CHECK MENU ]
Quit
Tool I/F
RS-232C I/F
102
System Maintenance
Section 3-9
[ RS-232C I/F INPUT CHECK ]
The data received from the connected Host are displayed in
hexadecimal numbers.
EXIT
When the check is finished, press the EXIT touch switch. The NT20S will enter the
RUN mode.
Checking the LCD
Check the NT20S LCD by using the menu operation from the System Menu as
mentioned below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “I/O Check”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
Select “LCD Display”.
[ I/O CHECK MENU ]
Quit
LCD Display
LED Check
Comm. Check
Buzzer
Touch Switch
Data Memory
S The LCD displays dots (segments of the screen) line by line beginning with the
top left corner. If all the dots are displayed normally, the NT20S will enter the I/O
CHECK MENU after all the dots have been turned off.
S To cancel the LCD indication check, press any touch switch (anywhere) on the
screen. The I/O Check Menu will be redisplayed.
103
System Maintenance
Section 3-9
Checking the Buzzer
Check the NT20S buzzer by using the menu operation from the System Menu as
mentioned below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “I/O Check”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
Select “Buzzer”.
[ I/O CHECK MENU ]
Quit
LCD Display
LED Check
Comm. Check
Buzzer
Touch Switch
Data Memory
S If the buzzer function is normal, the continuous buzzer sound will be made.
S To stop the buzzer, press “EXIT” touch switch in the buzzer check screen. The
NT20S will enter the I/O CHECK MENU.
Reference: Though memory switch setting for the buzzer has been made for OFF, the buzzer
will sound when the buzzer check is executed.
104
System Maintenance
Checking the LED
Section 3-9
Check the LED by using the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned
below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “I/O Check”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
Select “LED Check”.
[ I/O CHECK MENU ]
Quit
LCD Display
LED Check
Comm. Check
Buzzer
Touch Switch
Data Memory
The “RUN” LED on the front face of the NT20S will flash. The “POWER” LED remains lit.
S To quit the LED check, press the “EXIT” touch switch. The NT20S will enter the
I/O CHECK MENU.
105
System Maintenance
Section 3-9
Checking the Screen Memory
Check the screen memory by using the menu operation from the System Menu as
mentioned below.
Reference: When the screen data memory is checked, the memory is initialized and all the
screen data is lost. Check that the screen data has been backed up using the support tool before executing a screen data memory check.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “I/O Check”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
Select “Data Memory”.
[ I/O CHECK MENU ]
Quit
LCD Display
LED Check
Comm. Check
Buzzer
Touch Switch
Data Memory
[ SCREEN DATA MEMORY CHECK ]
Caution!!
This test will destroy
the Screen Data.
CANCEL
106
TEST
START
Press “TEST START”.
Pressing “Cancel” will cancel
the memory check.
System Maintenance
Section 3-9
The screen memory check will start.
While the screen memory is checked, the “Memory checking...” message will be
displayed.
S If the memory check has been normally completed, the “Memory is OK” message will be displayed.
S To quit the memory check, press the “Cancel” touch switch. The NT20S will enter the I/O CHECK MENU.
S If the “Memory error!!” message is displayed, the screen data memory may have
been used up to its service life or there may be a hardware fault. In that case,
initialize the screen data memory and check the memory again. If the same error
message is displayed again, consult the OMRON Service Center.
3-9-2
Checking the PT Setting
Display the NT20S settings by using the menu operation from the System Menu as
mentioned below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “PT Setting”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
107
System Maintenance
Section 3-9
[NT20S-ST121-EV3]
(Host link)
[ PT SETTING ]
PT Control Area
PT Notify Area
Comm. Type
Baud Rate
(NT Link (1:1))
DM0000
DM0010
Host Link
9600bps
EXIT
[ PT SETTING ]
PT Control Area
PT Notify Area
Comm. Type
DM0000
DM0010
NT Link
EXIT
(NT Link (1:N))
[ PT SETTING ]
PT Control Area
PT Notify Area
Comm. Type
Unit No.
DM0000
DM0010
NT Link 1:N
7
EXIT
[NT20S-ST122-V1 (C200H direct communication)]
[ PT SETTING ]
PT Control Area
PT Notify Area
Comm. Type
Unit No.
DM0100
DM0200
C200H
0
EXIT
[NT20S-ST128 (RS-232C)]
[ PT SETTING ]
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Parity Check
Flow Control
Baud Rate
8bits
1bit
Even
RS/CS
19200bps
EXIT
If no unit number is set at the PC, “0” will be
displayed.
S The current PT settings will be displayed.
S Pressing the “EXIT” touch switch will exit the PT settings display, and the NT20S
will return to the RUN Mode.
108
System Maintenance
3-9-3
Section 3-9
Checking the NT20S DIP Switch Settings
Display the NT20S DIP switch settings by using the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “DIP-SW Status”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
[ DIP-SWITCH STATUS ]
1. Forced Init.
No
2. Message Mode
English
3. Mode Change
Enable
4. Reserved
OFF
1
EXIT
[SW2]
2
3
4
ON
OFF
S The NT20S DIP switch statuses are displayed.
S Pressing the EXIT touch switch clears the DIP switch status display from the
screen and causes the NT20S to enter the RUN mode.
Note:
If the DIP switch settings have been changed when the NT20S is powered, reset
the power to the NT20S. The changes with the DIP switches become effective only
after the power supply is reset.
109
110
SECTION 4
NT20S Functions and Operation
This section describes the functions of the NT20S.
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
Creating and Transmitting Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1 Setting the support tool for use with the NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2 Creating Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outline of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-1 NT20S Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-2 Characters and Figures Which can be Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-3 Communications with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1 Classification of Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2 Screen Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-1 Character-String Memory Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-2 Numeral Memory Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-1 Bar Graph Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6-1 Lamp Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7-1 Functions of Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7-2 Screen Switching Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7-3 System Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeral Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8-1 The Numeral Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8-2 Types of Numeral Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8-3 Creating Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8-4 Using Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8-5 Using The Thumbwheel Type of Numeral Setting (Ver.5 Direct Connection Only) . . .
4-8-6 Settings for Numeral Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
112
113
118
118
119
120
122
122
125
126
126
127
129
129
133
133
136
137
138
139
140
140
142
143
145
147
148
111
Creating and Transmitting Screen Data
4-1
Section 4-1
Creating and Transmitting Screen Data
This section describes briefly the support tool settings required for creating screen
data and the screen data creation procedure.
Reference: For the details of the support tool and screen data creation, refer to the “NT-series
Support Tool Operation Manual” (V028-E1-j).
4-1-1
Setting the support tool for use with the NT20S
To create the screen data for the NT20S, make settings with the support tool for
use with the NT20S.
Select “Tool Settings”.
To create the NT20S screen data, make settings in the “Tool Settings” screen as
follows.
112
Creating and Transmitting Screen Data
Section 4-1
NT20S-ST121-EV3 (Host link/NT link), NT20S-ST122-V1 (C200H direct communication)
PT Setting
: 20S
Memory Size
: 96 KB
Direct setting
: Ver.4 or Ver.5
Direct Macn Type: OMRON
NT20S-ST128 (RS-232C)
PT Setting
: NT20S
Memory Size
: 96 KB
Direct setting
: None
Direct Macn Type: OMRON
4-1-2
Creating Screen Data
Screen Data Creation Method
The screen data is created by using the support tool. The support tool registers the
screen data used with one NT20S to one file.
Screen data can be created by one of the following three methods:
S creating a new file;
S editing an existing file;
S reading and editing selected screens from an existing file.
Screen Data Creation Procedure
The following gives the basic screen data creation procedure. Required settings
and reference pages are given for each step of the procedure.
' Select “Tool Settings” in the Main Menu to display the “Tool Settings” screen.
Settings of PT setting, memory size, and direct setting are made in this screen.
Refer to “Setting the support tool for use with the NT20S” on the previous page.
113
Creating and Transmitting Screen Data
Section 4-1
Select “Tool Settings”.
' Select a file used for storing the screen data for the NT20S in the “File List”
screen.
To create a new file, select “New File”.
To edit an existing file, select a file to edit.
Select “New File” and press [Enter]. Enter filename on completion of creation.
Select “Screen Creation”.
Select a screen number to edit in the selected file in the “Screen List” screen.
Note that when using the host link, NT link, or C200H direct communication, the PT
status control area and PT status notify area must be set as described below before selecting the screen number.
To read the screen data from other file, press the [F5] (Read) function key.
114
Creating and Transmitting Screen Data
Section 4-1
Host link/NT link/C200H direct communication
' Press [F10] (Next) in the “Screen List” screen, then press [F2] (Direct) to display the Direct Conn. Setting screen. On this screen, specify the first words
allocated to the following areas in the PC memory.
S PT status control area: Section 5-4 NT20S Status Control (page 191)
S PT status notify area: Section 5-5 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC
(page 196)
S Numeral memory table: Numeral Memory Table (page 127)
S Character string memory table: Character-String Memory Table (page 126)
Common to All Communication Methods
Press [F4] (Attrib) in the “Screen List” screen to set the screen attributes in the
Help Message. The following attributes can be set.
S Buzzer (None/Cont/Long/Shrt)
S Bit In (YES/NO)
S Keypad (Syst/User)
S Backlight (ON/OFF)
' Bit input attributes can be set when using the NT20S-ST128 (RS-232C).
Select a screen number and
press [Enter].
Create screen data in the Edit screen. Data of one screen can be created by registering (laying out) the following display elements and attributes on the screen.
S Fix display:
Input character strings and figure.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . “Characters and Figures Which can be Displayed” (page 119)
S Numeral display:
Set numbers in the numeral memory table.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Numeral Memory Table” (page 127)
115
Creating and Transmitting Screen Data
Section 4-1
S Character string display:
Set the character string memory table number and display method.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Character-String Memory Table” (page 126)
S Lamp:
Set the lamp number or allocated bit and display method.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 4-6 Lamps (page 133)
S Touch switch:
Set the touch switch number, screen switching number, allocated bits for control
and notification, and display method.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 4-7 Touch Switches (page 136)
S Graph:
Set the numeral memory table number and display method.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 4-5 Bar Graphs (page 129)
S Input setting:
Set numbers in the numeral memory table.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section 4-8 Numeral Setting (page 140)
[Edit screen quit]
Return to the “Screen List”.
To successively create or modify another screen, select the screen number.
116
Creating and Transmitting Screen Data
Section 4-1
[To the File Selection]
Enter filename to newly created screen data.
Return to the “File List”.
Pressing the [F8] (Start-up screen) key allows setting of the screen number to be
displayed when the NT20S is booted. (Only effective when using RS-232C)
Transmitting Screen Data to the NT20S
Transmit the screen data created by using the support tool to the NT20S screen
data memory.
Pressing the [F6] (Tmx.) key on the “File List” screen will cause the created screen
data to be transmitted to the NT20S in file units. Pressing [F10] (Next) and then
[F6] (Tmx.) on the “File List” screen will cause the screen data to be transmitted in
screen units. Before attempting data transmission, connect the NT20S and support tool and set the NT20S to the transmit mode.
For the connection procedure to the support tool, refer to Section 2-3 Connecting
to the Support Tool (page 31). For the transmission of the screen data, refer to
Section 3-6 Registering the Screen Data (page 86).
Note:
When transmitting data in screen units, if changes have been made to memory
tables or direct information in addition to the screens, transmit this changed data
also.
117
Outline of Functions
4-2
4-2-1
Section 4-2
Outline of Functions
NT20S Screen
This section gives the outline of the screen which is the basis of all NT20S functions.
For specific operation procedure such as screen switching, refer to “Switching the
Screen Display” (page 157).
Composition of the Screen
The NT20S screen is composed of horizontal 256 dots x vertical 128 dots. Each
dot is set by the combination of the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) coordinates. The
origin of coordinates (0, 0) is set at the top left corner of the screen.
0
X coordinate (horizontal)
255
0
Y coordinate
(vertical)
127
Screen Management
Coordinates
(x, y)
255, 127
The screens displayed on the NT20S are managed by the screen numbers.
When using the NT20S, up to 495 screens can be created and screen numbers in
the ranges 1 to 250 and 256 to 500 can be used (numbers 251 to 255 are reserved
for system use).
The display screens can be switched or the start-up screen can be set by designating the screen number from the Host.
Special Screen Number
118
Screen number “0” is reserved for the system as the no-display screen. Select this
to display nothing on the NT20S screen.
Outline of Functions
4-2-2
Section 4-2
Characters and Figures Which can be Displayed
The NT20S screen can display characters, figures, and other various elements.
This section describes the types and attributes of the characters and figures which
can be displayed and do not need to be changed at all.
For the settings, display, and use of the characters, numeric values, and graphs
which change according to the system operation status and other conditions, refer
to Section 4-4 Memory Table (page 126).
The power of expression of the screen can be increased by giving various attributes such as the enlarged or reverse display to the characters and figures.
The character and figure attributes can be set in the edit screen when creating the
screen data by using the support tool.
When using the NT20S-ST128 (RS-232C), character strings can also be displayed in accordance with commands from the host, independently of the currently displayed screen (this is the “terminal function”).
Types and Attributes of Characters and Figures
The following types of characters can be input by using the support tool and be
displayed during operation.
Character
Type
Dots
(vertical x
horizontal)
Maximum Number of
Characters Displayed in One
Screen (without overwriting)
Half height
characters
8x8
Alphanumerics and
symbols
32 characters x 16 lines
(512 characters)
Normal
characters
16 x 8
Alphanumerics and
symbols
32 characters x 8 lines
(256 characters)
Marks
16 x 16
Create by using the
support tool
Character Set
S Marks
A mark is a graphic pattern created by combining 16 x 16 dots by using the support tool. Marks can be handled the same as the wide size characters. Up to 64
patterns can be defined within the total screen data using character code FF20
to FF5F.
S Enlarged display of the characters and marks
The characters and marks can be enlarged to the following scales.
x1 scale
Double
width scale
Double
height scale
x4 scale
x9 scale
x16 scale
Reference: Smoothing
The characters and marks enlarged to the x4 scale or larger are displayed with
the outline automatically smoothed. This function is called “smoothing”.
119
Outline of Functions
Section 4-2
S Reverse and flashing display
Reverse display:
The display brightness of the character and the
background is reversed comparing with the
normal display.
Flashing display:
Characters are displayed as they flash. The
normal display alternates with no-display.
Reverse and flashing display:
The reverse display alternates with the normal
display.
Types and Attributes of the Figures
The following types of figures can be input by using the support tool and be displayed during operation. Continuous straight lines including up to 256 vertexes
can be drawn (up to 255 straight lines can be connected).
Continuous straight lines
4-2-3
Circle
Communications with the Host
Communication using the host link/NT link/C200H direct communication
The NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1 can communicate with the PC through the
host link/NT link/C200H direct communication. Bits and words are allocated to
areas of the PC memory (selectable without restriction) and the NT20S can write
data to them or read from them directly. This makes the following functions possible:
S Control/Notification of display elements
S Control/Notification of the NT20S status
S Screen switching
S Ascertaining the number of the screen currently displayed
S Memory table operations
For details on actual operations, refer to Section 5 “How to Use the Host Link/NT
Link”
120
Outline of Functions
Section 4-2
Communication through RS-232C
The NT20S-ST128 can communicate with the host through the RS-232C interface. In other words, it can receive and send commands through the RS-232C interface, which allows various types of host to utilize the functions of the NT20S:
S Control/Notification of display elements
S Control/Notification of the NT20S status
S Memory table operations
S Screen operation
S Display/Deletion of characters/graphics
For details on actual operations, refer to Section 6 “Using the RS-232C”
Controllable NT20S functions
The following NT20S statuses can be controlled:
S Screen switching: Screen is displayed or cleared.
S Continuous/intermittent buzzer: Buzzer operation is started or stopped.
S Back light mode: Back light is lit or made to flash.
For details on how these NT20S functions are actually controlled, refer to Section
5-4 “NT20S Status Control” on page 191, “Screen Display Control” on page 215,
and “Buzzer Control” on page 215.
Ascertainable operating statuses of the NT20S
The following operating statuses of the NT20S can be ascertained:
S NT20S operating/stopped status: Whether the NT20S is active or inactive
S Screen number: Number of the screen currently displayed
S Numeral setting input: Whether or not numerical values have been input by numeral setting
For details on how these NT20S operating statuses are actually detected, refer to
Section 5-5 “Notification of the Operating Status to the PC (Determining the
NT20S Operating Status)” on page 196, “Screen Number Response” on page
205, and “8-digit Number Input Notify” on page 212.
Caution:
To ensure system safety, be sure to periodically read the PT operating status bit
from the host in order to ensure that the PT is always operating normally.
121
Screen Display
4-3
Section 4-3
Screen Display
This section describes the screen information required for the operation with the
NT20S.
For details on how to change the displayed screen, refer to “Switching the Screen
Display” on page 157, and “Display Specified Screen” on page 204. For the methods used to ascertain the screen number of the screen currently displayed, refer to
“Notifying the Display Screen to the PC (To Display the Number of Currently Displayed Screen)” on page 160, and “Request Screen Number” on page 204.
4-3-1
Classification of Screens
The NT20S is provided with the following types of screens which are classified by
the display method.
S Normal screen
S Overlapping screen
S Continuous screen
The screen type is set with each screen in the “Screen List” screen of the support
tool. Select a screen type according to the purpose, and create characters and
figures on the screen. In the case of the NT20S-ST128 (RS-232C), character
strings and graphics can be also displayed in accordance with commands from the
host, independently of the currently displayed screen. The details of each screen
type are given below.
Normal Screen
A normal screen is the basic screen of the NT20S. It is not necessary to select a
screen type (overlapping or consecutive) when to create the screen data on a normal screen.
When a normal screen is selected, existing screens will be erased and a normal
screen will be displayed.
Overlapping Screen
Several normal screens can be overlapped and displayed as one screen. A group
of overlapped screens is called an “overlapping screen”.
Several normal screens are displayed in the order of screen numbers which have
been designated to each screen and form an overlapping screen. Up to eight
screens can be overlapped to form one overlapping screen. The base screen used
for making an overlapping screen is called a “parent screen”, and a bunch of
screens which are laid over the parent screen are called “child screens”.
All display elements can be used on a parent screen.
The screen attributes such as a buzzer attribute set in the parent screen become
effective in an overlapping screen.
122
Screen Display
Section 4-3
[Example overlapping screen]
Screen #10
(1)
Screen #8
This is an
overlapping
screen.
This is an
Screen #7
(2)
overlapping
Screen #25
(3)
screen.
S Parent screen: #8
S Child screens: #10, #7, and #25
When screen #8 is designated, screen #8 becomes the parent screen and the
child screens #10, #7, and #25 are displayed over the parent screen in that order.
Only one numeral setting screen which allows numeric values to be set on the
NT20S screen can be registered as a child screen. For the numeral setting, refer to
Section 4-8 Numeral Setting (page 140).
Make sure that the touch switches and numbers set in the normal screens do not
overlap in an overlapping screen. If the set positions of the touch switches and/or
numbers in the normal screens overlap with each other, such settings may sometimes not be effective as intended. Use the support tool and make sure that the set
positions do not overlap with each other.
Continuous Screens
A group of normal screens which are related in series and can be switched consecutively is called the “continuous screens”. Up to eight screens can be registered to
one screen as a group of continuous screens.
The base screen used for registering the continuous screens is called a “parent
screen”, and the registered continuous screens are called “child screens”.
The current screen number and the total number of continuous screens can be
displayed in the top right corner of the screen. This is called the “page number display”.
The page number is set when creating the screen data by using the support tool.
Refer to the “NT-series Support Tool Operation Manual” (V028-E1-j).
All display elements except “numeral setting” can be used in the continuous
screens.
The screen attributes set in the parent screen become effective in the continuous
screens.
123
Screen Display
Section 4-3
[Example continuous screens]
1/3
Continuous
screen (1)
Screen #20
touch switch
touch switch
2/3
Screen #15
Continuous
screen (2)
touch switch
touch switch
3/3
Continuous
Screen #5
screen (3)
S Parent screen: #10
S Child screens: #20, #15, and #5
When screen #10 (continuous screen) is designated, screen #20 which is page 1
of the continuous screens will be displayed. Screen #15 or #5 can be displayed
by using the touch switches. Since screen #10 has been set for the continuous
screens, that screen cannot be displayed as an individual screen.
Switching the Continuous Screens by Using the Touch Switches
Continuous screens can be switched by using the
have the system key functions.
and
touch switches which
When creating the screen, create touch switches
and
to which the system
key functions are allocated. (Refer to “System key functions” (page 139).)
1/3
Production Status
Line A:
Line B:
124
Normal
Normal
Screen Display
4-3-2
Section 4-3
Screen Attributes
Each screen can be set with a specific function by designating a screen attribute,
so that the specific function can be executed by displaying the screen. For example, by displaying a screen to which a “buzzer attribute” has been set, the buzzer of
the NT20S starts sounding.
Set the screen attributes for each screen on the “screen selection” screen of the
support tool.
Note that the support tool displays some items that are not used with the NT20S,
such as “history attribute”, “alarm”, and “backlight color”.
The following several attributes can be set with one screen.
Buzzer Attribute
This attribute will become effective to sound the buzzer in the NT20S when the
screen to which this attribute has been set is displayed. The buzzer sound can be
set as follows:
No:
Buzzer does not sound when the screen is displayed.
Continuous sound:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
Intermittent sound:
Buzzer sounds intermittently at constant intervals.
The buzzer sound is set with the NT20S memory switch. The buzzer can also be
set by using the Host. Refer to “Using the buzzer” (page 92) for the buzzer setting
using the memory switch.
To stop the buzzer by using the screen operation, create a
system key as a
touch switch.
Numeral Setting Attribute
Select whether the numeric keys are automatically displayed or the numeric keys
are created at arbitrary positions on the numeral setting screen. The following two
numeral setting attributes are used.
System: The numeric keys registered to the system are automatically displayed.
User:
The numeric keys can be created at any arbitrary positions.
Reference: If the numeral setting attribute on the NT20S has been set for “system”, the touch
switches [ENT],
and
which are allocated to the system besides the numeric
keys need to be created. (System key functions (page 139))
Bit input attributes (applies to NT20S-ST128/RS232C only)
Select whether the touch switch number or bit information is notified to the host
when the touch switch is pressed. There are two types of bit input attribute in the
screen attributes, as indicated below:
S Off :
Bit control when a touch switch is pressed is invalid. The status of
the touch switch is notified using its number.
S Touch SW : Bit control when a touch switch is pressed is valid. The status of the
touch switch is notified using bit information.
Backlight attributes
Select whether the backlight is lit or flashes when the screen is displayed. There
are two types of backlight attribute in the screen attributes, as indicated below:
S Lit : Backlight is lit when the screen is displayed.
S Flashing : Backlight flashes when the screen is displayed.
125
Memory Tables
4-4
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
The NT20S has the “character-string memory table” for the character data and the
“numeral memory table” for numeric data which can be written and updated by the
PC/Host.
The contents of the memory tables can be set by using the support tool when displaying the memory tables on the screen or by editing the table.
4-4-1
Character-String Memory Table
The character-string memory table is an NT20S internal memory used to store the
character data. Up to 128 character-string memory tables can be used, and up to
16 full size characters (32 bytes) can be stored in one memory table. The character-string memory tables at up to 32 positions can be registered in one screen.
Displaying a Character String
The character-string memory tables are registered with table numbers 0 to 127.
When creating the screen data by using the support tool, set the position on the
screen to display a character string and also set a character string number to be
displayed.
When the NT20S is operated, the screen displays the contents of the characterstring memory table.
When using Ver.5 direct connection, it is possible to display the contents of character-string memory tables by specifying their numbers with numeral memory tables
(indirect specification), rather than directly changing the character-string memory
table contents.
For details on how to change currently displayed character strings, refer to
“Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings (Changing the Contents of
Allocated Words)” on page 169, and “Write Character-string Memory Table” on
page 205.
When using the NT20S-ST128 (RS-232C), character strings can be also displayed in accordance with commands from the host, independently of the currently displayed screen (terminal function). Refer to “Specify Displayed Characters”
on page 220.
Characters and Figures Which can be Displayed
The power of expression of the screen can be increased by giving various attributes such as the enlarged or reverse display to the characters of the characterstring memory table.
The character attributes can be set in the edit screen when creating the screen
data by using the support tool.
126
Memory Tables
Section 4-4
The following types of characters can be displayed on the NT20S:
Character
Type
Dots
(vertical x
horizontal)
Half size
characters
8x8
Alphanumerics and
symbols
32 characters x 16 lines
(512 characters)
Normal size
characters
8 x 16
Alphanumerics and
symbols
32 characters x 8 lines
(256 characters)
Marks
16 x 16
Create by using the
support tool
Character Set
Maximum Number of
Characters Displayed in One
Screen (without overwriting)
S Enlarged display of the characters and marks
The characters and marks can be enlarged to the following scales.
Double width scale, Double height scale, x4 scale, x9 scale, x16 scale
S Smoothing
The characters and marks enlarged to the x4 scale or larger are displayed with
the outline automatically smoothed. This function is called “smoothing”.
S Reverse and flashing display
4-4-2
Reverse display:
The display brightness of the character and the
background is reversed comparing with the
normal display.
Flashing display:
Characters are displayed as they flash. The
normal display alternates with no-display.
Reverse and flashing display:
The reverse display alternates with the normal
display.
Numeral Memory Table
The numeral memory table is an NT20S internal memory used to store the numeral data. Up to 128 numeral memory tables can be used, and up to eight digits (four
bytes) of numeral data (including signs) can be stored in one numeral memory
table. The numeral memory tables at up to 50 positions can be registered in one
screen.
Displaying a Numeral
The numeral memory tables are registered with table numbers 0 to 127.
When creating the screen data by using the support tool, set the position on the
screen to display a numeral and also set a numeral number to be displayed.
When the NT20S is operated, the screen displays the contents of the numeral
memory table.
' For details on how to change the currently displayed numeric data, refer to
“Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings (Changing the Contents
of Allocated Words)” on page 169, and “4-digit Write Numeral Memory Table”
on page 206.
127
Memory Tables
Section 4-4
Numerals Which can be Displayed
The power of expression of the screen can be increased by giving various attributes such as the enlarged or reverse display to the numerals of the numeral
memory table.
The numeral attributes can be set in the edit screen when creating the screen data
by using the support tool.
S Digits of the whole numbers: 1 to 8 digits
S Digits of the decimal fraction: 0 to 7 digits
S Character sizes:
Half, normal
S Enlarged display:
Double width, double height, x4, x9, x16
The characters enlarged to the x4 scale or larger are displayed with the outline automatically
smoothed. This function is called “smoothing”.
S Display attribute:
Normal, reverse, flashing, reverse and flashing
S Sign display setting
S Decimal/hexadecimal display setting
S Zero suppress setting
To display one numeral memory table on several different screens simultaneously,
the display attributes on such screens must be the same. If there is discrepancies
among the display attributes, the numeral table may not be displayed correctly.
Reference: Zero suppress setting
The numeral data are displayed in designated display areas as right-aligned. If the
number of digits of a numeral data is smaller than that of the display area, number
“0”s will be displayed at the vacant digits. These “0”s will not be displayed if the
zero suppress setting is made for “Yes”.
128
Bar Graphs
4-5
Section 4-5
Bar Graphs
The contents of the numeral memory tables of the NT20S can be displayed as bar
graphs as well as numeral data.
This section describes the bar graphs which can be displayed.
In order to change the data displayed in a bar graph, the contents of its numeral
memory table have to be changed.
For details on how to update the data of a currently displayed bar graph, refer to
“Upgrading Bar Graphs (Changing the Contents of Allocated Words)” on page
177, and “4-digit Write Numeral Memory Table” on page 206.
4-5-1
Bar Graph Functions
The bar graph function displays a value in a bar graph form as a percentage to the
specified value according to the contents of a numeral memory table. Up to 50 bar
graphs can be registered in one screen.
S Reference table
The numeral memory table used as the reference for the bar graph display can
be set.
The support tool has the “direct” and “indirect” options for the reference method
of the numeral memory table. However, the NT20S recognizes the “direct” method only.
The bar graph display cannot use hexadecimal numbers. If hexadecimal numbers are set in the reference numeral memory table, the bar graph cannot be
displayed. Use caution not to write hexadecimal numbers except the minus sign
“F” to the reference numeral memory table.
Bar Graph Attributes
The following attributes can be set with the NT20S for the bar graph display:
S Position and size
The display position and size (length) of a bar graph can be set.
The width of the bar graph can be set in the range of 2 to 255 dots.
129
Bar Graphs
Section 4-5
S Orientation and incremental direction
The orientation and incremental direction of the bar graph can be selected from
those mentioned below.
↑ (up):
The bar graph increments upward in the vertical orientation.
↓ (down):The bar graph increments downward in the vertical orientation.
← (left): The bar graph increments to the left in the horizontal orientation.
→ (right):The bar graph increments to the right in the horizontal orientation.
Direction: ↑
Direction: →
S Graph frame
Select whether or not the graph frame (boundary line of a graph display area)
which indicates the effective display range is displayed.
← This frame is not displayed if
“Graph frame: No” has been set.
S Setting the 100 % value and % display
Set a value which corresponds to 100 % for the “100 % value”. The available
value range is “0 to 99999999” (max. eight digits). For the “% display”, whether
or not the proportion (percentage) of the reference numeral memory table value
to the “100 % value” is displayed in a numeral can be selected. The display value
is calculated as follows:
“% display” value = Numeral memory table value B “100 % value” x 100
For the font and attributes used for the numeral display, refer to “Numerals which
can be displayed” (page 127).
S Sign display and display method
Select whether or not the bar graph which indicates a value below 0 % is displayed.
130
Bar Graphs
Section 4-5
[To display a value below 0 %: Sign display “Yes”]
The bar graph is displayed in the range of –100 % to 100 %. The middle of the bar
graph indicates 0 %.
% display
–60 %
–100 %
0%
100 %
[Not to display a value below 0 %: Sign display “No”]
The bar graph is displayed in the range of 0 % to 100 %. The end of the bar graph
indicates 0 %. Values below 0 % are indicated as 0 %.
% display
60 %
0%
100 %
S Differences in the bar graph display method according to the % values
The bar graph display method varies according to the % value range.
(1) When the % value is in the minus range
The display varies as follows according to the sign display setting:
Sign display “No”: Displayed as 0 %.
Sign display “Yes”: Displayed in the minus range.
(2) When the absolute value of the % value is in the range of 100 % to 999 %
The % value is displayed as it is.
Sign display “No”: The display will be as mentioned below according to
the graph frame setting.
When the frame is displayed:
% display
999 %
↔
0%
Graph width: 8 dots
100 %
131
Bar Graphs
Section 4-5
When the frame is not displayed:
% display
1-dot-wide space
999 %
↔
0%
Graph width: 8 dots
100 %
Sign display “Yes”: A value below –100 % will be displayed in the minus
direction as shown above.
(3) When the absolute value of the % value is above 1000 %
The bar graph will be displayed the same as (2) above.
The % value is displayed as follows according to the sign display setting:
Sign display “No”:
%
Sign display “Yes”: %
132
Lamps
4-6
Section 4-6
Lamps
The NT20S has the “lamp” function used to simply display the PC bit status.
This section describes the lamps which can be displayed.
The lamp display status (lit (flashing) or unlit) can be changed by instructions from
the PC/host.
For details on how to change the status of a currently displayed lamp, refer to
“Turning ON (lit) and OFF (unlit) the Lamps (Changing the Contents of Allocated
Bits)” on page 179, “Lamp and Touch Switch Display (Bit Specification)” on page
210, and “Lamp and Touch Switch Display (Number Specification)” on page 210.
4-6-1
Lamp Functions
The lamps are the graphic areas whose method of display can be changed by using the PC. Available display methods are “lit”, “unlit”, and “flash“. Up to 128 lamps
can be registered in one screen.
The display status (lit, unlit, and flashing) which are registered when creating the
screen data can be switched according to the ON/OFF of the PC bit status.
PC
Unlit
Lamp Attributes
Lit
The following attributes can be set with the lamp. Use the support tool to set the
lamp attributes.
S Shape
Select from the square and circle shapes. The display size can be freely selected.
Square
Circle
S Frame
Select whether or not the boundary line (frame) of the lamp display area is displayed. If the frame is not set, only the guide display message for the lamp is
displayed when the lamp is not lit (or flashing). If the guide display message is
not set, nothing is displayed.
133
Lamps
Section 4-6
S Lit and flashing
Select whether the lamp is lit (reverse display) or flashing (reverse flashing)
when the lamp is turned ON by the PC.
S Guide display message
Lamps can be displayed with the guide display messages.
The guide display message attributes are the same as that for the “character
display”. Refer to “Characters and Figures which can be Displayed” (page 126).
S Frame and lit/flashing
The display method of “lit/flashing” varies according to the frame setting.
Frame is set:
Only the area in the frame will be lit/flashing.
Frame is not set:
The area including the frame will be lit/flashing.
[Frame is set]
Unlit
[Frame is not set]
Unlit
Flash
Lit
Flash
Lit
Area inside the frame
flashes.
Area including the frame
flashes.
S Controlling the lamps in batch
More than one lamp can be lit or flashing in batch by registering those lamps to
the same bit.
[Example of batch lighting]
Set the lamps L1 to L5 to the same bit number.
L1
L2
L3
134
L1
L4
L5
L2
L4
L5
L3
Lamps
Section 4-6
When a lamp is overlapped with a memory table display
The guide display message for a lamp is a fixed character-string. If you want to
change the lamp guide display in accordance with some condition, overlap the display area of a numeral memory table or character-string memory table with the
lamp. However, note that different results will be achieved depending on the timing of the lighting of the lamp and the updating of the memory table. Bear this in
mind when creating the control program.
135
Touch Switches
4-7
Section 4-7
Touch Switches
The NT20S has a function whereby input operations can be performed by using
touch panels displayed on the screen. NT20S screens can be switched, or bit information sent to the Host, by pressing (lightly touching) the “touch switches” in a
panel.
The touch switches can also be made to light up (or flash) and go off like lamps.
Touch switches are set when creating the screen data with the support tool.
This section describes the touch switches that can be displayed, and explains the
screen switching function and the system key function.
For details on how the status of the currently displayed touch switch is notified to
the Host, refer to “Lit (Flashing) and Unlit Touch Switch Statuses (Changing the
Status of Allocated Bits)” on page 183, “Lamp and Touch Switch Display (Bit Specification)” on page 210, and “Lamp and Touch Switch display (Number Specification)” on page 210.
For details on how the statuses of touch switches are ascertained by the Host, refer to “Notifying the Host that a Switch has been Pressed (Determining Touch
Switch Status)” on page 183, and “Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Enquiry” on page 211.
Caution:
S Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where
danger to human life or serious property damage is possible or for emergency
switch applications.
S Press touch switches with a force of no greater than 30 N.
S Do not press touch switches carelessly while the backlight is off or while nothing
is displayed on the screen. Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
Only press touch switches after confirming system safety.
S If touch switches are pressed in rapid succession, their inputs may not be successfully received.
Confirm that the input of a touch switch has been successfully received before
moving on to the next operation.
Reference: Caution on pressing touch switches at 3 points
When multiple touch switches are created at the relative positions indicated in the
example below, malfunctions may occur due to the characteristics of this switch
configuration.
Example 1: When switches are created at positions A and B and at the points
where the vertical and horizontal lines extending from these two points intersect,
i.e. points C and D:
A
S When switches A, B, and C are switched on at
C
the same time, switch D is also assumed to have
been switched on due to the configuration of the
touch switches.
B
S When switches A, B, and D are switched on at the
D
Smallest touch switch frame
136
same time, switch C is also assumed to have
been switched on due to the configuration of the
touch switches.
Touch Switches
4-7-1
Section 4-7
Functions of Touch Switches
Touch switches are created using rectangular elements measuring 19 dots horizontally by 19 dots vertically. A touch switch can comprise more than one touch
switch element. Up to 72 touch switches (12 horizontally x 6 vertically) can be registered on one screen.
19 dots
19 dots
A touch switch can comprise more
than one touch switch element.
PC
Host
When the touch switch is
pressed, bit information
is sent to the PC.
(Host link/NT link)
When the touch switch is pressed,
the touch switch number or bit
information is sent to the Host.
(RS-232C)
S Functions of touch switches
Touch switches can have the following functions:
- PC notification function
NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1
:Host link/NT link/C200H direct communication (page 183)
NT20S-ST128 :RS-232C (page 212)
- Screen switch (standalone) function (page 138)
- System key function (page 139)
- Numeral setting function
NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1
:Host link/NT link/C200H direct communication (page 188)
NT20S-ST128 :RS-232C (page 212)
Touch Switch Attributes
The following attributes can be set for touch switches.
S Display frame
The area that will respond as a touch switch is displayed in the form of a frame,
as shown in the table below. One of three types of frame - standard, 3-D, and
none - can be selected.
Type of Display
Frame
Switch OFF
Switch ON
Standard
3-D
None
137
Touch Switches
Section 4-7
If “none” is selected, only the touch switch’s guide display message (or nothing, if
there is none) are displayed until a “light” or “flash” designation is sent from the
PC/Host or the touch switch is pressed.
S Inverse display on input
It is possible to set a touch switch so that its display will be inverted when it is
pressed.
S Lighting and flashing
It is possible to specify whether the touch switch will be lit continuously or flash
when the bit allocated to it is turned ON by the PC/Host.
S Presence/absence of a guide display
A guide display message can be displayed at a touch switch location.
4-7-2
Screen Switching Function
The NT20S has a function that allows screens to be switched by pressing touch
switches on its screen, rather than by designation from the PC/Host. This function
is called the “standalone function”.
The screen number of the screen that will be displayed when a touch switch is
pressed is set for that touch switch when the screen data is created using the support tool.
If the touch switch is pressed during operation, the screen whose number was
designated will be displayed. Simultaneously, the PC/Host will be notified of the
screen number of the screen selected for display.
To next screen
Touch switch
pressed once
Screen #5
“Screen #5” set for touch switch 1
To set a screen number for a touch switch, use “Touch SW”, “Bit specification” and
“Screen switch” of the support tool.
Note:
138
Only one screen number can be set for one touch switch within one screen (or
within one overlapping screen).
Numeral Setting
4-7-3
Section 4-8
System Key Functions
The NT20S allows the allocation of “system key” functions to touch switches. The
system key functions can then be used during operation by pressing the touch
switches to which they have been allocated.
For example, if, when a screen for which buzzer sounding has been set is displayed, a
touch switch is also displayed, the buzzer can be stopped by pressing this touch switch.
To set a system key function for a touch switch, use “Touch SW”, “Bit specification”
and “Numeric key” of the support tool.
Allocation of System Key Functions
The system key functions are allocated to touch switch numbers 227 to 230 and
255, as shown below. When a touch switch with one of these numbers is displayed
on the screen, it has the same function as the corresponding system key.
System Key
Key Symbol
Touch Switch No.
System menu display
MENU
227
228
229
[Buzzer stop]
230
[ENT]
255
' When a touch switch to which a system key function has been allocated is
pressed, the touch switch bit information is not notified to the PC.
The
,
, and
keys are not displayed among the system numeric keys. Accordingly, when using the system numeric keys, create the
,
, and
keys.
Alternatively, create user numeric keys.
139
Numeral Setting
4-8
Section 4-8
Numeral Setting
The NT20S has a “numeral setting” function to enable numerical values to be input
from the screen. This function inputs numerical values to numeral memory tables
in response to touch switch operations, displays these numerical values on the
screen, and sends them to the host.
This section outlines the numeral setting function and the method for creating the
ten keys required to set numerical values on the screen, and explains how to use
ten keys during operation.
Numeral setting screens cannot be registered as child screens of continuous
screens. In the case of overlapping screens, only one of the screens can be set as
a numeral setting screen.
For details of the actual methods used to ascertain input numerical values at the
PC side, refer to “Notification of Numbers to the PC” on page 188, and “Number
Input Notify” on page 212.
Numeral settings are set during screen creation with the support tool.
Caution:
4-8-1
Confirm system safety carefully before changing monitor data.
The Numeral Setting Function
The numeral setting function is described below.
Basic Procedure
The procedure for numeral setting is as follows.
(1) Input the numerical value at the touch panel.
(2) The input numerical value is displayed in the numeral setting area on the
screen.
(3) Confirm the input numerical value; it will be written to the numeral memory
table, and simultaneously notified to the PC.
Numeral
setting area
NT20S
Notification
Write
1 2 3 4
Input
Touch switch
140
1 2 3 4
Numeral
memory
table
PC
Numeral Setting
Section 4-8
Restrictions on Numerical Value Input and Attribute Setting
Numerical values of up to 8 digits (7 if there is a minus sign) can be input in either
decimal or hexadecimal format.
S Decimal input
When the display attribute is set for decimal display, values are input in the decimal format.
- Numerical value range
The range for numerical values that can be input differs according to whether
or not there is a sign display.
When there is no sign display
When there is a sign display
: 0 to 99999999 (8 digits)
: –9999999 to +99999999
(7 digits for negative numbers,
8 digits for positive numbers)
If a sign is displayed when using the thumbwheel type of numeral setting, the
maximum number of digits for both positive and negative numbers is 7.
- Decimal point
A maximum of 7 digits can be input after the decimal point (or 6 for negative
numbers).
S Hexadecimal input
When the display attribute is set for hexadecimal display, values are input in the
hexadecimal format.
- Numerical value range
Numerical values can be input in the range 0 to FFFFFFFF (8 digits).
S Attributes that can be set
The attributes of the numerical values displayed in the input field are the same as
for numeral displays. See “Numerals Which can be Displayed” (page 127).
Upper/lower limit check (Ver.5 direct connection only)
When Ver.5 direct connection is used with an NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1, upper and lower limits can be set for input numerical values to prevent erroneous values that are outside the valid range being stored in the numeral memory table or
notified to the PC.
The upper/lower limit check is executed when the input numerical value has been
confirmed: if the value is outside the valid range, the screen returns to its status
before input.
Correct Use:
In order to use the numerical value input setting safely, always use the upper/lower
limit check function. Since this function is not featured with NT20S-ST128 and
Ver.4 and previous versions of the direct connection function, take appropriate
measures using the user application software.
141
Numeral Setting
4-8-2
Section 4-8
Types of Numeral Setting
There are two types of numeral setting: the numeric key type, and the thumbwheel
type.
The basic function of these two types is the same, but the screen displays and input methods are different.
A maximum of 50 input fields, including both numeric key and thumbwheel types,
can be registered on one screen.
The thumbwheel type of numeral setting can only be used when using Ver.5 direct
connection with an NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1.
Numeric Key Type
When a numerical value is input using touch switches to which numeric key functions have been allocated, the input numerical value is displayed on the screen.
On pressing the return key after completing input, the input numerical value is written to the numeral memory table and notified to the host.
If there is more than one numeral setting input field, the field in which the input is to
be made can also be selected with the numeric keys.
In order to perform numeric key input, it is necessary not only to create a numeral
setting input field on the screen, but also to create the numeric keys to be used for
input (see page 143).
Displayed in the
numeral setting
input field
NT20S
Notification
Write
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
Input
Input the numerical value using
the numeric keys on the
screen.
Host
Numeral
memory
table
On pressing the
key, the input value is written
to the numeral memory table and simultaneously
notified to the PC.
Thumbwheel Type (Ver.5 Direct Connection Only)
When using an NT-20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1 with Ver.5 direct connection, numerical values are input directly at the numeral setting input field using touch
switches that increment or decrement each of the digits in the display when
pressed. Each time the displayed numerical value is changed, the new displayed
value is written to the numeral memory table and simultaneously notified to the
host.
This means that, when using the Thumbwheel type of numeral setting, all that is
required to input numerical values is to create the numeral setting input field on the
screen.
Pressing the [–] key
decrements the digit by
one.
NT20S
Notification
Write
1 2 3 4
Pressing the [+] key
increments the digit by
one.
142
1 2 3 4
Host
Numeral
memory
table
Each time a [+] or [–] key is pressed,
the input value is written to the
numeral memory table and
simultaneously notified to the host.
Numeral Setting
4-8-3
Section 4-8
Creating Numeric Keys
In order to input numerical values using the numeral setting function, apart from
the display area for the numeral setting, the numeric keys must also be created.
Setting Screen Attributes
The type of numeric keys can be selected using the numeral setting attributes of
the screen attributes. There are two numeral setting attributes: “system” and
“user”.
S Screen when “system” is specified
When a numeral setting area is created, numeric keys are automatically displayed. The display position and arrangement of the numeric keys are fixed. On
this screen, only the types of numeric key shown in the figure below (system
keys) are used.
Tank A Tank B Tank C
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
0
5
CLR
6
"
When using the NT20S with the numeral setting attribute set to “system”, apart
from the numeric keys provided by the system, the touch switches allocated to
system keys (
,
,
) also have to be created (system key function). To enable
input of hexadecimal values, it is also necessary to create numeric keys A through
F.
With the NT20S, if the numeral setting attribute is set to “system”, apart from the
numeric keys prepared by the system, the touch switches allocated to system
keys ( , ,
) have to be created. (“System key functions”, page 139)
S When the numeral setting attribute is “user”
The display position and arrangement of the numeric keys can be set as required
by allocating them to touch switches (see page 125).
Tank A Tank B Tank C
When the numeral setting attribute is set to “user”, numeric keys are created by
using the control keys of the “input key” function. In addition, by using the character keys of the “input key” function, the one-byte characters 0 to 9 and A to F
can be used as numeric keys.
143
Numeral Setting
Section 4-8
Reference: Even when the numeral setting attribute is set to “user”, the same numeric keys as
displayed with the “system” attribute can be displayed.
If “User” is selected for “Keypad” during data creation on the numeral setting
screen, the numeric keys shown below are displayed.
Tank A Tank B Tank C
1
7
Numeric Key Allocations
2
8
3
9
4
0
5
CLR
6
"
The numeric keys are allocated to touch switches.
The numeric keys allocated to touch switches are specified when the touch
switches are created. The following numeric keys (system keys) can be used for
numeral setting.
For details on how to create touch switches, refer to 4-7 “Touch Switches” (page
136).
Touch
Switch
Number
Numeric
Key
Touch
Switch
Number
Numeric
Key
Touch
Switch
Number
Numeric
Key
227 ()
Menu
display
237
6
247
CLR
228
238
7
248
"
229
239
8
249
.
230
240
9
250
HOME
231
0
241
A
251
↑
232
1
242
B
252
↓
233
2
243
C
253
←
234
3
244
D
254
→
235
4
245
E
255
236
5
246
F
() Numeric key number 227 is the system menu display key.
When the touch switches allocated as numeric keys and system keys on a numeral setting screen are pressed, no notification is made to the PC. This means that
when using the NT20S-ST128 (RS-232C), the touch switches numbered 227 to
255 cannot be used as normal touch switches on a numeral setting screen.
144
Numeral Setting
4-8-4
Section 4-8
Using Numeric Keys
To input numerical data by using numeric keys, first select the numeral setting area
into which the value is to be input, then input the numerical value by pressing the
appropriate numeric keys.
Selecting the Numeral Setting Area for Data Input
Select the numeral setting area into which the numerical value is to be input by
using either the numeric keys or the system keys.
S Selection with the numeric keys
Use the [HOME], [→], [←], [↑] and [↓] keys. By using these keys, the cursor can
be shifted between numeral setting areas in the way shown in the figure below.
6563
→
HOME
4568
5107
3200
↑
0000
←
↑
4624
Pressing the [HOME] key will shift the cursor to the area whose top left corner
has the smallest XY coordinate sum (the top left numeral setting input field in the
example above).
S Selection with the system keys
When the
and
system keys on the touch panel are pressed, the cursor
moves between the numeral setting areas by following the order in which they
were created using the support tool.
For example, if three numeral setting areas have been created, the cursor can
be moved between them following the order of creation as follows.
key:1st area → 2nd area → 3rd area → 1st area
key:1st area → 3rd area → 2nd area → 1st area
If the “numeral setting” screen attribute is set to “system”, the order of cursor
motion when the
and
system keys are used can be changed. For details,
refer to the NT series support tool operation manual (V028-E1-j).
145
Numeral Setting
Inputting Numerical Values
Section 4-8
Input numerical values using the following numeric keys (touch switches): numerals (0 to 9, A to F), decimal point (.), sign (+,–), clear (CLR), and return (
).
When inputting a numerical value that includes a decimal point, input the integer and decimal fraction separately. First input the integer, then press the decimal point key (.) and input the decimal fraction.
If the integer or decimal fraction exceed their respective allowable numbers of
display digits, they are shifted to the left. In the system keys, however, the decimal point key (.) is not included. Therefore, it is necessary to create the decimal point key (.) apart from the ten keys of the system keys to input a numerical
value including decimal fraction.
S Changing the sign
When there is a sign display, pressing the sign (") key changes minus to plus or
plus to minus.
S Confirming input numerical values
Always press the return key as the final step when inputting a numerical value.
When the return key is pressed, the displayed numerical value is written to the
numeral memory table and at the same time notified to the host.
S Initial operation of input keys
The sign key ("), decimal point key (.), and alphabet key (A to F), operate as
follows on initial use (first use after displaying the screen).
- Sign key (")
The display is cleared to zero (assuming decimal input with sign display).
- Decimal point key (.)
The display is cleared to zero, after which input starts from the decimal fraction
digits (assuming decimal input with sign display).
- Alphabet (A to F) key
The display is cleared to zero (assuming decimal input).
S Upper/lower limit check
When using an NT-20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1 with Ver.5 direct connection,
when the return key is pressed after inputting a numerical value, an upper/lower
limit check is executed. If the input numerical value is outside the valid range,
the data in the numeral memory table before input is redisplayed and not notified
to the host.
146
Numeral Setting
4-8-5
Section 4-8
Using The Thumbwheel Type of Numeral Setting (Ver.5 Direct
Connection Only)
When using the thumbwheel type of numeral setting, numerical values are input by
directly touching the incrementing/decrementing (+/–) keys.
This type of input can only be used with Ver.5 of the direct connection function.
Numerical Value Input
Input numerical values by using the incrementing/decrementing (+, –) keys provided for each digit.
S Numerical value specification
When an incrementing/decrementing (+, –) key is touched, the numeral at the
corresponding digit is incremented or decremented by one. Whenever a plus or
minus key is touched, the changed value is notified to the host. There is no need
to press the return key as is the case when using the numeric key type of numeral setting.
Thumbwheel numeral setting
Numeral
memory table
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4
2
2
3
4
2 2 3 4
Press
Host
Numerical value
incremented by one
Numerical values cannot be set in thumbwheel type numeral setting fields by
using numeric keys.
S Changing the sign
In settings with a sign display, touching the incrementing/decrementing (+, –)
keys at the digit where the sign is displayed will change plus to minus and minus
to plus.
S Upper/lower limit check
When using Ver.2 and later versions of the direct connection function, an upper/
lower limit check is executed when the incrementing/decrementing (+, –) keys
are pressed. If the input numerical value is outside the valid range, the data in
the numeral memory table before the key was pressed is redisplayed and not
notified to the host.
However, with thumbwheel type numeral setting, if the situation is such that with
an upper limit of 1n..n, and a lower limit of 0m..m (where n and m are the values
of each digit), n..n < m..m, it is not possible to carry digits upward or downward.
Example:
When the upper limit value is 1200 and the lower limit value is 201, if the initial
value has three digits the value can be changed within the range 201 to 999, and
if the initial value has four digits it can only be changed within the range 1000 to
1200.
147
Numeral Setting
Section 4-8
This is because if an attempt is made to change the leftmost digit from 0 to 1, or
from 1 to 0, an upper/lower limit value check is always performed.
In order to avoid this, either set the values so that n..n x m..m, or create another
touch switch and write values to the host when digits are carried up or down.
4-8-6
Settings for Numeral Settings
The following settings are made for numeral settings during their creation with the
support tool. Note that restrictions apply to several of the settings made for thumbwheel type numeral settings.
Settings
S Referenced numeral memory table
Set the number of the numeral memory table used to record the numerical value
input using the numeral setting function.
S Number of digits in the input numerical value
Set the number of digits in the numerical values that can be input. A maximum of
8 digits (total of integer and decimal fraction parts) can be set. However, if there
is a sign display, the maximum number of digits for negative values will be seven.
S Upper/lower limits (Ver.5 direct connection only)
Set the upper limit and lower limit separately. The maximum number of digits in
the set values is eight (or seven if there is a sign display).
When the upper limit value and lower limit value are set as negative values, set
“F” as the eighth digit.
Example: Upper limit value or lower limit value is “–123” → F0000123.
S Display attribute
Set attributes in the same way as for numeral display. For details, see Numerals
Which can be Displayed (page 127).
Restrictions and Additional Settings for Thumbwheel Type Numeral Settings
There are the following restrictions and additional items to set when creating
thumbwheel type numeral settings.
S Number of input digits for positive values when there is a sign display
When a sign display is set for a thumbwheel type numeral setting, a maximum of
7 digits can be input for positive values.
S Display size
One of two sizes can be selected: “small” in which each digit comprises two
touch switch units, and “medium”, in which each digit comprises three touch
switch units. Note that if “small” is selected the area in which the numerical value
is displayed is also the touch switch input area.
148
Numeral Setting
Section 4-8
S Shape (end plates)
Set which of the two shapes shown below will be used. One has “end plates” at
right and left sides and the other does not.
With
0
0
0
0
Without
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
S Restrictions on display attributes
The following restrictions apply to display attributes.
Character type
: Wide size only
Character enlargement : Standard only,
regardless of the display size specification
Zero suppress
: No zero suppression only
See “Numerals Which can be Displayed” (page 127).
149
150
SECTION 5
How to Use the Host Link/NT Link
This Section describes in concrete terms how to use the Host link/NT link/C200H direct communication with the
NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1.
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
Overview of Direct Connection Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 Equipment and Settings Used in This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2 Allocatable Bits and Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-3 NT20S Status Control and Notification to PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-4 Switching the Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-5 Notifying the Display Screen to the PC
(To Display the Number of Currently Displayed Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1 Displaying the Contents of Allocated Words of Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2 Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Words ... Direct Specification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3 Changing Displayed Numerical Values or Character Strings
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Words ... Indirect Specification) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-4 Copying the Memory Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-5 Upgrading Bar Graphs
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Words) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1 Allocation Bits and Display of Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-2 Turning ON (lit) and OFF (unlit) the Lamps
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Bits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-3 Allocated Bits, and Display, of Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-4 Lit (Flashing) and Unlit Touch Switch Statuses
(Changing the Status of Allocated Bits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-5 Notifying the Host that a Switch has been Pressed
(Determining Touch Switch Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-6 Notification of Numbers to the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NT20S Status Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-1 Controllable NT20S Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-2 How to Control NT20S Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notification of the Operating Status to the PC (Determining the NT20S Operating Status) . .
5-5-1 Ascertainable NT20S Statuses (Notified Operating Statuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-2 Reading the NT20S Operating Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
152
152
153
157
160
163
167
169
171
174
177
178
178
179
181
183
183
188
191
191
194
196
196
197
151
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
5-1
Section 5-1
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
This section explains allocated bits and words, control of the NT20S and PC notification methods, and the actual procedures used for switching screens, thereby
providing the basic information required to use the NT20S-ST121-EV3 host link/
NT link and NT20S-ST122-V1 (C200H direct communication).
5-1-1
Equipment and Settings Used in This Section
The following equipment and settings are used in the examples in this section:
[Equipment] PT
: NT20S-ST121-EV3
PC
: CQM1
Support tool : NT-series Support Tool Ver. 2.j
[Support tool settings]
PT type
: NT20S
Memory capacity : 96 KB
Direct setting
: Ver.5
Direct Macn Type : OMRON
5-1-2
Allocatable Bits and Words
When the host link/NT link is used, the following bits and words are allocated to the
PC and used for the NT20S operation. The range of respective area varies with the
type of PC. Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map (page 278).
The allocations must be made without exceeding respective area range.
[OMRON PCs]
C Series PCs
Symbol
Area Name
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated Word
Allocated
Bit
Numeral
Character
String
f
f
f
f
Numeral
Character
String
Data Memory
f
f
f
Internal/Special
Relay
f
f
f
f
f
DM
Data Memory
CH
Internal/Special
Relay
TIM
Timer
CNT
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
f
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
f
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
f
f
–
f
f
Allocated Word
Allocated
Bit
Area Name
Timer
Counter
f: OK
: 1 word only
: NG
When allocating a memory table to words, the allocation must not exceed the word
area.
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CV series PCs are allocated to the system,
they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use. However, reading
from them is possible.
152
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
Section 5-1
Reference: One allocation word of the memory table can use continuous areas of up to 2
words in the case of numeral memory table or 16 words in the case of character
string memory table.
5-1-3
NT20S Status Control and Notification to PC
The following describes the fundamentals of the display elements, NT20S status
control, and notification which are the basics of the NT20S functions when using
the host link/NT link.
For the detail method of use of the PT status control area and the PT status notify
area, refer to Sections 5-4 NT20S Status Control (page 191) and 5-5 Notification
of the Operating Status to the PC (Determining the NT20S Operating Status)
(page 196).
Controlling the Display Elements by Using Allocated Bits and Words
The NT20S will operate as follows in the display element control operation.
[NT20S operation]
(1) The NT20S checks the allocation bits and words of the display elements and
makes an inquiry to the PC.
(2) The PC answers the NT20S about the bit and word data.
(3) The NT20S changes the display status according to the bits and words obtained from the PC.
[NT20S operation example]
Lamp #0
Bit 010012
NT20S
PC
Bit 010012?
TIM003?
DM0100 to DM0102?
(“a”, “b”)
(“c”, “d”)
(“e”, “f”)
Character-string memory table2
Numeral memory table0
First word
: DM0100 First word
: TIM003
Number of saved words : 3
Number of saved words : 1
153
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
Section 5-1
Controlling the NT20S Status by Using Allocated Bits and Words ..... PT Status Control Area (PC to PT)
The PT status control area (PC to PT) is provided to control the NT20S status from
the PC. When data is written to this area in the PC, the NT20S will read the data
and operates according to the data. The PT status control area is configured as
four consecutive words as shown below.
Word 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
n+1
0
n+2
Copy type
Copy source memory table # (3-digit BCD)
Copy destination memory table # (3-digit BCD)
0
PT status control bit
0 Bit
Screen switch
setting
Screen # (4-digit BCD)
n
n+3
8
0
Copy memory
table setting
PT status control
The first word (word n) of the PT status control area must be set with the support
tool.
S Screen switch settings (refer to page 157)
Specify the screen # to switch the screen displayed on the NT20S.
S Copy memory table settings (refer to page 174)
Specify the memory table # to copy the contents of a memory table internally in
the NT20S.
Set the copy type to match the type of memory table to be copied:
0: Character-string memory table
1: Numeral memory table
S PT status control bits (refer to page 191)
These bits are switched ON and OFF to control the NT20S buzzer and backlight.
15 14 13 12 11 10
n+3 CH
0
0
9
8
Bit
0
Item Controlled
1(ON)
0(OFF)
Screen display (Note 1)
ON
OFF
Processing priority
registration (Note 2)
ON
OFF
Continuous buzzer
ON
OFF
Intermittent buzzer
ON
OFF
Backlight mode
ON
Flash
Note 1:When “ON” is set for screen display, the
backlight is on; when “OFF” is set for
screen display, the backlight is off.
Note 2:Priority registration is only valid when NT
link (1:N) is set.
154
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
Section 5-1
The PT status control area (PC to PT) can be allocated to the following PC
areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocated
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated
DM
Data Memory
f
Data Memory
f
CH
Internal/Special Relay
f
Internal/Special Relay
f
TIM
Timer
Timer
CNT
Counter
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
–
f: OK
: NG
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CV series PCs are allocated to the system,
they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
Correct Use:
Make sure there is no duplication in the PT status control area allocations and PT
status notify area allocations.
Reference: When NT link (1:N) is set, the PT status control area must be set for each connected PT.
Notifying the Display Elements by Using Allocated Bits and Words
The NT20S will operate as follows in the display element notification operation.
[NT20S operation]
The NT20S will write any changes in the contents of the numeral or characterstring memory table being displayed or pressing of a touch switch to the bits and
words area in the PC.
[NT20S operation example]
Touch switch #12
Bit009012
NT20S
PC
Bit 009012:ON
DM0110:0432
Numeral memory table 100
0
4
3
2
Copy
Numeral memory table0
Number of saved words : 1
First word
: DM0110
155
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
Section 5-1
Notifying the NT20S Status by Using Allocated Bits and Words ..... PT Status Notify Area (PT to PC)
The PT status notify area (PT to PC) is provided to notify the NT20S status
changes to the PC. When any NT20S status has changed, such change is written
to this area in the PC, and the PC will read the data from this area to check the
NT20S status.
The PT status notify area is configured as three consecutive words as shown below.
Word 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Screen being displayed
Screen # (4-digit BCD)
m
0
m+1
Numeral memory table # (3-digit BCD)
PT status
m+2
0
0 Bit
0
Content upgrade
memory table
PT status
The first word (word m) of the PT status notify area must be set with the support
tool.
S Currently displayed screen (refer to page 160)
The screen number displayed on the NT20S is written to this word.
Simultaneously, the PT status screen switch strobe flag is set to ON (1). After
this is notified to the PC, this flag reverts to OFF (0). Checking the status of this
flag will provide a simple method of checking if the NT20S display has switched.
S Content upgrade memory table (refer to page 188)
The number of the numeral memory table is written to the word when the numeral memory table contents change due to the touch switch operation on the
NT20S.
As the number of the numeral table is written, the PT status numeral setting
strobe flag is simultaneously set ON (1). After this is notified to the PC, this flag
reverts to OFF (0). Checking the status of this flag will provide a simple method
of checking if a number has been input from the NT20S.
Note that this function is not available with the character-string memory table.
S PT status (refer to page 196)
The NT20S operation status and other information are written with the ON or
OFF of the bits as shown below.
PT status notify bits
15 14 13 12 11 10
Word m+2
0
0
0
9
8
0
0
Bit
PT operation status (1 (ON): RUN / 0 (OFF): STOP)
Screen switching strobe
Numeral setting strobe flag
156
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
Section 5-1
The PT status control area (PC to PT) can be allocated to the following PC areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocated
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated
DM
Data Memory
f
Data Memory
f
CH
Internal/Special Relay
f
Internal/Special Relay
f
TIM
Timer
Timer
CNT
Counter
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
–
f: OK
: NG
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are allocated to the
system, they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
Correct Use:
Make sure there is no duplication in the PT status control area allocations and PT
status notify area allocations.
Reference: When NT link (1:N) is set, the PT status control area must be set for each connected PT.
5-1-4
Switching the Screen Display
The following describes the procedure used to switch the NT20S screen display by
controlling from the PC.
Reference: The display screen can be switched also by pressing a touch switch during the operation after registering a screen number to the touch switch. For this function,
refer to the “Standalone Function“ (page 138).
To switch the NT20S screen display by controlling from the PC, write a screen
number at the “screen switch setting” in the PT status control area.
NT20S
PC
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
Screen number
Copy memory
table setting
Designated screen
PT status control setting
[Screen switch setting in the PT status control area]
PT status notify bits
15 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Word n
Screen number (4-digit BCD)
Screen switch setting
Screen number :0000 (screen clear, no-display)
:0001 to 0500
157
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
Section 5-1
S Available allocation words
The PT status control area (PC to PT) can be allocated to the following PC
areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocated
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated
DM
Data Memory
f
Data Memory
f
CH
Internal/Special Relay
f
Internal/Special Relay
f
TIM
Timer
Timer
CNT
Counter
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
–
f: OK
: NG
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are allocated to the
system, they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use. The range
of respective area varies with the type of PC. Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map
(page 278).
Procedure
1. Use the support tool to allocate the PT status control area (PC to PT) to the PC
memory.
2. Create a PC program to write the number of the displayed screen to the
“screen switch setting word” in the PT status control area.
Use a 4-digit BCD (binary-coded decimal) value to set a screen number.
If a screen has been switched by operating the PT status control area (PC to PT),
the contents of the “currently displayed screen word” in the PT status notify area
(PT to PC) also change.
S Screen switching timing
The NT20S screen switches when the contents of the “screen switch setting”
have changed. To re-specify the number of the currently specified screen, first
write the value 0000 to clear the screen before writing the appropriate screen
number.
S Use of the screen switching strobe
Create a program to read the number of the currently displayed screen and to
write the number to the “screen switch setting word” at the leading edge of the
“screen switching strobe” of the PT status notify area. This program enables
screen switching by using the touch switches on the NT20S and eliminates repeated setting of the same screen number. If the screen switching is not executed on the NT20S, the screen switching strobe does not need to be checked.
For the screen switching strobe, refer to the “notifying the displayed screen to
the PC” mentioned below.
158
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
Section 5-1
S Continuous screens and overlapping screens
Continuous or overlapping screens can be displayed by designating the parent
screen. If a child screen is designated, only the child screen is displayed.
For the continuous and overlapping screens, refer to the “Classification of
Screens” (page 122).
Example of Display Screen Switching
This example operates the PC switch (bit) to switch the NT20S display screen.
S Support tool settings
Make the following settings with the support tool:
PT status control area:
Word 0100
PT status notify area:
Word 0110
Screen number to be created: Screen #2 and #3
S PC ladder program
Create a PC ladder program as follows:
00002
@MOV(21)
#0002
100
(1)
Screen number
Screen switch setting word
@MOV(21)
#0003
100
(2)
Screen number
Screen switch setting word
@MOV(21)
110
100
(3)
Screen number
Screen switch setting word
00003
11212
Screen switch strobe flag
S Program operation
(1) Screen #2 is displayed on the NT20S when bit 00002 turns ON.
(2) Screen #3 is displayed on the NT20S when bit 00003 turns ON.
(3) When the screen switch strobe flag turns ON, the number of the currently displayed screen is read and written to the currently displayed screen word in the
PT status notify area. In this case, the NT20S will not write the same screen
twice.
159
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
5-1-5
Section 5-1
Notifying the Display Screen to the PC
(To Display the Number of Currently Displayed Screen)
The following describes the processing to display the number of currently displayed screen of the NT20S.
This processing reads the data from the PC status notify area.
To indicate that the screen has switched, use the screen switch strobe flag.
To display the number of the currently displayed screen, use the currently displayed screen word.
When the screen has switched, the NT20S notifies the following to PT status notify
area (PT to PC) allocated to the PC.
Screen switch notification:
Screen switch strobe flag of the PT status word
New screen number:
Currently displayed screen word
By reading the currently displayed screen word when the screen switch strobe flag
has turned ON, the number of the currently displayed screen on the NT20S is displayed.
NT20S
PC
PT status notify area
Currently displayed screen
Screen number
Content upgrade memory table
Currently
displayed
screen
PT status
Screen switch
strobe flag
[Currently displayed screen] and [PT status] words in the PT status notify
area
15 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Word
m
Screen number (4-digit BCD)
PT status
m+2
0
Screen switch setting
PT status
0
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
–
0
0
0
0
–
0
Bit
Screen switch strobe
Screen number: 0001 to 0500
Use a 4-digit BCD (binary-coded decimal) value to set a screen number.
The screen switch strobe bit reverts to OFF (0) after this is notified to the PC.
160
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
Section 5-1
S Available allocation words
The PT status notify area (PT to PC) can be allocated to the following PC areas.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocated
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated
DM
Data Memory
f
Data Memory
f
CH
Internal/Special Relay
f
Internal/Special Relay
f
TIM
Timer
Timer
CNT
Counter
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
–
f: OK
: NG
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CV series PCs are allocated to the system,
they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
The range of respective area varies with the type of PC. Refer to Appendix L PC
Memory Map (page 278).
Procedure
1. Use the support tool to allocate the PT status notify area (PT to PC) to the PC
memory.
2. Create a PC program to read the “currently displayed screen word” in the in the
PT status notify area when the “screen switch strobe flag” in the PT status
notify area has turned ON.
Reference: The contents of the “currently displayed screen word” are updated also by switching the screen by pressing a touch switch on the NT20S.
For this function (standalone function or screen switch function), refer to the “Standalone Function” (page 138).
S Continuous screens and overlapping screens
When a continuous or overlapping screen is displayed, the number of the parent
screen is written to the “currently displayed screen word”.
For the continuous and overlapping screens, refer to the “Classification of
Screens” (page 122).
161
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
Section 5-1
Example of Reading the Number of Currently Display Screen
This example gives a PC program that reads the screen number each time the
screen is switched. In this example, the number of the previous screen is also
stored.
S Support tool settings
Make the following settings with the support tool:
PT status notify area: Word 0110
S PC ladder program
11212
@MOV(21)
DM0100
DM0101
Screen switch
strobe flag
@MOV(21)
110
DM0100
(1)
Word for storing the number of the
previous screen
(2)
Word for notifying the number of the
currently displayed screen
Word for storing a new screen number
S Program operation
(1) When the NT20S screen display switches and the screen switch strobe flag
(bit 11212) turns ON, the contents of DM0100 are transferred to DM0101.
The number of the previously displayed screen is stored in word 0101.
(2) The new screen number notified by the NT20S is read and transferred to
DM0100. The number of the currently displayed screen is stored in DM0100.
162
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
5-2
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Displaying and Referencing Character String Memory Table Contents
Since the character-string memory tables can be allocated to the words in the PC,
the PC can write data to the character-string memory tables or the initial values
can be set when creating the screen data.
Automatic updating is performed to ensure that the currently displayed NT20S
character string memory table contents and PC word contents always match each
other.
There are two methods for referencing character string memory tables used for
character string display, as follows:
- Direct specification
- Indirect specification (with Ver.5 direct connection only)
S Direct specification
Direct specification is a method of specification in which the contents of displayed memory tables are directly correlated with the contents of the allocated
words.
NT20S
PC
Direct
specification
abcd
Character string
memory table 51
abcd
Allocated channel
(character string memory table 51)
DM0100
6 1 6 2
6 3 6 4
S Indirect specification (with Ver.5 direct connection only)
In indirect specification, even if the displayed data is a character string, the display is correlated with a numeral memory table. The contents (numerical value)
of this numeral memory table are regarded as a character string memory table
number and the contents of the table with this number are displayed.
Up to 50 numeral displays and 50 character string displays can be specified on
one screen by using indirect specification.
NT20S
PC
Indirect
specification
a b c d
Allocated word (numeral memory table 20)
Numeral
memory table 20
DM0000
0 0 5 1
0 0 5 1
Allocated word (character string table 51)
Character
string memory table 51
DM0100
a b c d
6 1 6 2
6 3 6 4
163
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Section 5-2
This specification method is a little complex, but it allows the display to be changed
more easily according to the circumstances. In the example above, if 1 were added to the contents of memory table 20 to give 52, the contents of memory table 52
would be displayed instead.
The memory tables used for display can also be allocated to areas in the PC, so
that the display can also be changed in response to changes in the data to be displayed (i.e., the contents of character string memory table 51 in the example
above).
However, in comparison with direct specification, indirect specification requires
more time for processing.
Setting the Words of the Character-String Memory Table
When creating the screen data by using the support tool, make the following settings for each numbered character string:
S Initialization setting
Set whether or not the PC words are initialized with the character-string memory
table initial value registered to the screen data memory when the main power
supply is turned ON or reset.
S Number of registration words
Set the number of words within 16 words required for registering the characterstring data. One word can store two normal-size characters.
S Setting the words for the character-string memory tables
The character-string memory tables can be allocated to the following PC words.
Set the word type and the first word.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocated
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated
DM
Data Memory
f
Data Memory
f
CH
Internal/Special Relay
f
Internal/Special Relay
f
TIM
Timer
Timer
CNT
Counter
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
–
f: OK
: NG
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are allocated to the
system, they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
If the “number of registration words x 2” (“word setting window”) set with the support tool is larger than the “number of character digits” (“character-string display
setting” window), the character string may be broken halfway.
The range of respective area varies with the type of PC. Refer to Appendix L PC
Memory Map (page 278).
164
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Section 5-2
Displaying and Referencing Numeral Memory Table Contents
Since the numeral memory tables can be allocated to the words in the PC, the PC
can write data to the numeral memory tables or the initial values can be set when
creating the screen data.
Also, by relating the numeral memory tables with the bar graphs, the bar graphs
corresponding to the data of the numeral memory tables can be displayed.
During the operation, the display contents are automatically updated so that the
contents of the numeral memory table being displayed are the same as that of the
PC word.
There are two methods for referencing numeral memory tables used for numeral
displays, as follows:
- Direct specification
- Indirect specification (with Ver.5 direct connection only)
Reference: The only method available for numeral memory tables used for graphs and numeral settings is direct specification.
S Direct specification
Direct specification is a method of specification in which the contents of displayed
memory tables are directly correlated with the contents of the allocated words.
NT20S
PC
Direct
specification
0 0 6 2
Character string
memory table 18
0 0 6 2
Allocated channel
(character string memory table 18)
DM0100
0 0 6 2
S Indirect specification (with Ver.5 direct connection only)
NT20S
PC
Indirect
specification
7 7 7 7
Numeral
memory table 18
0 0 6 2
Allocated word
(numeral memory table 18)
DM0100
0 0 6 2
Allocated word (character string table 62)
Character
string memory table 62
DM0200
7 7 7 7
7 7 7 7
In indirect specification, the contents (numerical value) of the specified numeral
memory table are regarded as a memory table number and the contents of the
table with this number are displayed.
Up to 50 numeral displays and 50 character string displays can be specified on one
screen by using indirect specification.
165
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Section 5-2
This specification method is a little complex, but it allows the display to be changed
more easily according to the circumstances. In the example above, if one were
added to the contents of memory table 18 to give 63, the contents of memory table
63 would be displayed instead.
The memory tables used for display can also be allocated to areas in the PC, so
that the display can also be changed in response to changes in the data to be displayed (i.e., the contents of character string memory table 62 in the example
above).
However, in comparison with direct specification, indirect specification requires
more time for processing.
Setting the Words of the Numeral Memory Table
When creating the screen data by using the support tool, make the following settings for each numbered numeral:
S Initialization setting
Set whether or not the PC words are initialized with the numeral memory table
initial value registered to the screen data memory when the main power supply is
turned ON or reset.
S Number of registration words
Set the number of words within 2 words required for registering the numeral
data. One word can store up to 4 digits. Two words can store up to 8 digits.
S Setting the words for the numeral memory tables
The numeral memory tables can be allocated to the following PC words. Set the
word type and the first word.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocated
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated
DM
Data Memory
f
Data Memory
f
CH
Internal/Special Relay
f
Internal/Special Relay
f
TIM
Timer
Timer
CNT
Counter
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
–
f: OK
: 1 word only
: NG
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are allocated to the
system, they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
The range of respective area varies with the type of PC. Refer to Appendix L PC
Memory Map (page 278).
166
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
5-2-1
Section 5-2
Displaying the Contents of Allocated Words of Memory Tables
The relationship between the contents of the allocated words of numeral and character string memory tables and the display is described below.
S Contents of the numeral memory tables
Numerals are stored in the allocated words as shown below.
[Stored as a single word]
15
to 12 11
Digit 4
to
8 7
Digit 3
to
4 3
Digit 2
to
0 Bit
Digit 1
Example: 1234
15
to 12 11
to
1
2
8 7
to
4 3
3
to
0 Bit
4
[Stored as a double words]
Word
15 to 12 11
to
8 7
to
4 3
to
Start
Digit 4
Digit 3
Digit 2
Digit 1
Start+ 1
Digit 8
Digit 7
Digit 6
Digit 5
0 Bit
Example: 12345678
Word
15 to 12 11
to
8 7
to
4 3
to
Start
5
6
7
8
Start+ 1
1
2
3
4
0 Bit
S Displaying the numeral memory table
Numerals can be displayed in three different ways according to the contents of
the numeral memory table, as mentioned below.
The most significant digit (digit 4 of a single word or digit 8 of a double word) is
processed in different ways.
Hexadecimal display:
All digits are handled as stored in the allocated
words.
Decimal display without signs: If the most significant digit is “F”, it is handled
as “0”, and the most significant digit other than
“F” and other digits are handled as stored in
the allocated words.
Decimal display with signs:
If the most significant digit is “F”, it is handled
as “–” (minus sign), and the most significant
digit other than “F” and other digits are handled
as stored in the allocated words.
167
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Section 5-2
[Numeral memory table display examples]
S When the data are numeral data (0 to 9)
Start
Start + 1
3
4
5
6
F
0
1
2
Decimal without sign
Decimal with sign
Hexadecimal
123456
–123456
F0123456
S When the data contain characters (A to F)
Start
Start + 1
3
B
5
6
F
0
1
2
Decimal without sign
Decimal with sign
Hexadecimal
123B56
–123B56
F0123B56
If the hexadecimal data (A to F) are stored when the decimal display has been set,
the alphabets are displayed.
If the number of display digits has been set to be smaller than the maximum number of digits of the registration words (4 digits for 1 word; 8 digits for 2 words), the
contents of the allocated words are not displayed and “” symbols will be displayed
at all digits.
If the most significant digit is “F” when “decimal with signs” has been set, the numeral is handled as a negative number. The maximum number of digits of the negative number becomes smaller than that of the positive number by 1 digit.
The actual display will vary according to the “zero suppress” setting and decimal
fraction setting as well as the contents mentioned above. Refer to the “NT-series
Support Tool Operation Manual” (V028-E1-j).
S Contents of the character-string memory table
A character string is stored in the allocated words beginning with the first word in
normal-size characters.
Two normal-size characters are stored in one word. One memory table can
store up to 16 words (32 characters).
Start
Code 1
Code 2
Start + 1
Code 3
Start + 15
Code 4
Code31
Code32
[Character-string memory table display example]
To display the characters in order, allocate the characters as follows.
168
“A”=41H, “B”=42H
Start
4
1
4
2
“C”=43H, “D”=44H
Start + 1
4
3
4
4
“E”=45H, “F”=46H
Start + 2
4
5
4
6
“G”=47H, “G”=48H
Start + 3
4
7
4
8
“ABCDEFGH”
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
5-2-2
Section 5-2
Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Words ... Direct Specification)
The following explains the actual procedure for changing the contents of allocated
words referenced by direct specification in order to change numerical values and
character strings displayed by the NT20S.
For the situation when using indirect specification, see “Changing Displayed Numerals Values or Character Strings (Changing the Contents of Allocated Words ...
Indirect Specification)” (page 171).
Numerals and character strings can be changed also by making a copy of the
memory tables. Refer to “Copying the memory table” explained later.
To change the numerals or character strings displayed on the NT20S, make
changes with the numeral or character-string memory table. To make changes
with the numeral or character-string memory table of the NT20S, change the contents of words by the PC.
NT20S
PC
Allocated word
(numeral table)
Numeral table 1
12345678
abcdef
Start
Start+1
12345678
Character-string
memory table 4
abcdef
Start
Start+1
Start+2
Allocated word (character-string memory table)
61 62 63 64
65 66
(“a b c d e f”)
Reference: This method is convenient when changing data has to be displayed: for example
when monitoring the contents of PC words.
Procedure
1. Use the support tool to allocate the numeral and character-string memory
tables to the PC memory.
2. Register the memory tables for the numerals and character strings to be displayed when creating the screen data by using the support tool. Specify “direct” as the reference method.
To display a character string, use “character display” and specify the character-string memory table by using the support tool.
To display numerals, use “numeral display” and specify the numeral memory
table by using the support tool.
3. Create a PC program to write the contents of numerals and character strings
to be displayed on the NT20S to the PC words.
S Important points when writing a character string
If a character string to be written is smaller than “allocated word x 2”, fill up the
vacant space with normal-size spaces (20H). If unnecessary characters are left
in the area, the character string will not be displayed correctly.
169
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Section 5-2
Application Example of the Numeral Memory Tables Allocated to the PC Words
This example gives the procedure to directly display the contents of the words allocated as the numeral memory tables in the PC memory. The NT20S screen display will change as the contents of the PC word change.
S Support tool settings
Allocate the memory as shown below by using the support tool.
Numeral memory table entry #1: DM0000 (allocated words: 2 words)
Numeral memory table entry #2: DM0002 (allocated words: 1 word)
Screen numbers to be created: #1 and #2
Numeral memory
table entry #1
(8-digit input)
Line 1
Qty.
15289
units
23
units
Defects
Numeral memory
table entry #2
(4-digit input)
S PC ladder program
Create a PC ladder program as follows:
25502 (1 second clock)
DIFU(13)
00100
00100
INC(38)
DM0000
(1)
Word for least significant 4 digits of #1
INC(38)
DM0001
(2)
Word for most significant 4 digits of #1
25506 (=)
00001
@INC(38)
DM0002
(3)
Word for #2
S Program operation
(1) The contents of word DM0000 are incremented by 1 each second. The value
displayed on the NT20S in numeral memory table entry #1 increases by 1
each second.
(2) When the counter in (1) above causes an increase in the most significant digits, the contents of word DM0001 are incremented by 1 each second. The value displayed on the NT20S in numeral memory table entry #1 most significant
digits increases by 1.
170
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Section 5-2
(3) When bit 00001 turns ON, the contents of DM0002 are incremented by 1. The
value displayed on the NT20S in numeral memory table entry #2 increases by
1.
5-2-3
Changing Displayed Numerical Values or Character Strings
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Words ... Indirect Specification)
The following explains how to change numerical values or character strings displayed by the NT20S by changing the contents of the referenced allocated words
using indirect specification. This method can only be used with Ver.5 of the direct
connection function.
If using direct specification, see “Changing Displayed Numerical Values or Character Strings (Changing the Contents of Allocated Words ... Direct Specification)”
(page 169).
Numerical values and character strings can also be changed by making a copy of
the memory tables. Refer to “Copying the memory table” (page 174).
In indirect specification, a numeral memory table is specified to display a numerical value or character string. The numerical value stored in this numeral memory
table (“39” in the figure below) is taken as the number of the memory table whose
contents are to be displayed.
Either of the following two methods can be used to change the display when indirect specification is used:
1)
Changing the memory table number for the memory table whose contents are
to be displayed
(In the example in the figure below, this would mean changing the contents of
numeral memory table 41.)
2)
Changing the contents of the memory table used for display
(In the example in the figure below, this would mean changing the contents of
character string memory table 39.)
Here, the method for changing the display using method 1) is explained. For details on method 2), see the explanations on direct specification (page 169) and
copying memory tables (page 174).
NT20S
PC
Indirect
numeral memory table 41
AaBb
0039
Allocated word
(numeral memory table 41)
0
0
3 9
0039
Character
string memory table 39
AaBb
Character
string memory table 40
Moji
Reference: This method is convenient when switching the display at the same location, for
example when monitoring a series of words, or when using unique codes to specify individual character strings, etc.
171
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Procedure
Section 5-2
1. Set the PC area for allocation of the numeral memory table to be referenced in
indirect specification using the support tool.
2. When using the support tool to create screen data, register on the screen the
numeral memory table referenced in indirect specification. Specify the “indirect” option for the reference method.
In the case of a character string, use the “character display” function of the
support tool to specify the numeral memory table.
In the case of a numerical value, use the “numeral display” function of the support tool to specify the numeral memory table.
3. Use the “table edit” function of the support tool to write the actually displayed
data to the memory table for display. If displaying a numerical value, use a numeral memory table and if displaying a character string use a character string
memory table.
4. Create a PC program to change the contents of the word allocated to the numeral memory table referenced in the indirect specification.
S Notes on writing memory table numbers
When writing the number of the memory table for display to the numeral memory
table referenced in indirect specification, always specify it in BCD. Also, be sure
to specify a number within the range of memory table numbers that actually exist
(0 to 127).
If the contents of the numeral memory table for indirect specification are specified in hexadecimal format, or the number specified is outside the valid range for
memory table numbers, the display is not updated.
S Notes on writing character strings
The points to note when displaying character strings are the same as those described for direct specification. See “Important points when writing a character
string” (page 149).
172
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Section 5-2
Example Use of Indirect Specification
This example shows a case where the displayed character string is changed by
incrementing the contents of the allocated word of the numeral memory table referenced in indirect specification.
S Settings with the support tool
Make the following settings with the support tool.
Numeral memory table number 51: DM 0000 (number of registered words: 1)
Character string memory table number 100: “NT610G” (6 digits)
Character string memory table number 101: “NT610C” (6 digits)
Character string memory table number 102: “NT20S ” (6 digits)
Character string memory table number 103: “NT600S” (6 digits)
Data registered for the screen: numeral memory table number 51.
Line 1
NT20S
Product
Numeral memory table number 51 specified in indirect specification of character string display
S PC program
Create the PC ladder program as follows:
00100
@INC(38)
DM0000
(1)
Numeral memory table number used in indirect specification
@DEC(39)
DM0000
(2)
Numeral memory table number used in indirect specification
00101
S Program operation
(1) Each time contact 00100 comes ON, the display on the NT20S screen
changes in accordance with one of the steps in the following sequence:
“NT610G” ³ “NT610C” ³ “NT20S” ³ “NT600S”.
(2) Each time contact 00101 comes ON, the display on the NT20S screen
makes changes in accordance with one of the steps in the following sequence: “NT600S” ³ “NT20S” ³ “NT610C” ³ “NT600S”.
In this example, the contents of numeral memory table number 51 referenced in
indirect specification are not checked. Make sure that the contents of numeral
memory table number 51 stay within the range of 0100 to 0103 when the program
is actually used.
173
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
5-2-4
Section 5-2
Copying the Memory Table
The following describes the procedure to change displayed numerals or character
strings by copying the contents of the memory table.
Numerals and character strings can be changed also by changing the contents of
the allocated words. Refer to “Changing Displayed Numerals or Character
Strings” (page 169) explained before.
To change the numerals or character strings displayed on the NT20S, copy the
data between the numeral or character-string memory tables by using the “copy
memory table setting” of the PT status control area.
NT20S
PC
PT status control area
Memory table
copy source
Screen switch setting
A
Copy memory
table setting
A
Copy destination
(for display)
A
PT status control setting
Copy source number
Copy destination
number
Write a memory table number etc. to the copy memory table setting area in the PT
status control area in the PC memory. Data will be copied between the memory
tables in the NT20S and the displayed value will change accordingly.
Reference: This procedure is convenient to switch predetermined values or character strings
according to the situation. By preparing several units of contents, various contents
can be displayed by switching them to suit the situation.
[“Copy memory table setting” of the PT status control area]
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Word
n+1
n+2
0
Copy type
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 Bit
Copy source memory table # (3-digit BCD)
Copy destination memory table # (3-digit BCD)



Copy memory
table setting
Copy type:
0: Copy between the character-string memory tables
1: Copy between the numeral memory tables
Copy source and destination memory table numbers: 000 to 127
S Available allocation words
The PT status control area can be allocated to the following PC areas:
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocated
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated
DM
Data Memory
f
Data Memory
f
CH
Internal/Special Relay
f
Internal/Special Relay
f
TIM
Timer
Timer
CNT
Counter
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
–
f: OK
174
: NG
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Section 5-2
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are allocated to the
system, they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
The range of respective area varies with the type of PC. Refer to Appendix L PC
Memory Map (page 278).
Procedure
1. Use the support tool to allocate the PT status control area (PC to PT) to the PC
memory.
2. Register the memory tables for the numerals and character strings to be displayed when creating the screen data by using the support tool.
To display a character string, use “character display” and specify the character-string memory table by using the support tool.
To display numerals, use “numeral display” and specify the numeral memory
table by using the support tool.
3. Set the copy source data to the memory table when creating the screen data
by using the support tool.
Use “table edit”.
4. Create a PC program to write the copy type, copy destination memory table
number, and copy source memory table number to the “copy memory table”
setting word in the PT status control area.
S Order for writing to the PT status control area (PC to PT)
First write the “copy destination memory table number”, and then, write the
“copy source memory table number” to the PT status control area (PC to PT).
The NT20S reads the area sometimes when the PC is writing the settings. If the
“copy source memory table number” has been written first and is changed, unexpected memory table may possibly be changed.
S Allocated words that the NT20S reads
The NT20S reads the allocated words in the PC for the memory tables which
need to be displayed. Even when a copy source memory table is allocated to a
PC word, if its contents are never displayed it will be used only at initialization.
S Use of the “copy type”
Copy will not be executed when the “copy type” is other than “0” or “1”. The
memory table copy is executed only when the contents of the area are changed.
To repeat copying of the same copy source and same copy destination, write a
value other than “0” or “1” for the copy type, and then, write a correct value again.
S Copying a numeral memory table
If the display method or the number of registered words include discrepancies, a
numeral memory table may not be copied and displayed correctly.
175
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Section 5-2
Application Example of Copying of a Character-String Memory Table
This example gives a PC program to switch the character string display on the
screen by using the memory table copy operation as the allocated bit is turned ON
and OFF.
S Support tool settings
Allocate the memory as shown below by using the support tool.
PT status control area allocation: Word 0100
Contents registered to the screen: Character-string memory table #4
Line 1
Normal
Character-string memory table #4
Character-string memory table settings
#
Contents
Number of
Character Digits
4
Normal
6 digits
10
Error
6 digits
11
Normal
6 digits
S PC ladder program
Create a PC ladder program as follows:
09000
Error flag
09000
Error flag
@MOV(21)
#0004
102
(1)
Copy type, copy destination memory table #
Copy destination word
@MOV(21)
#0010
101
Copy source memory table #
Copy source word
@MOV(21)
#0004
102
(2)
Copy type, copy destination memory table #
Copy destination word
@MOV(21)
#0011
101
Copy source memory table #
Copy source word
S Program operation
(1) When an error occurs (bit 09000 turns ON), the NT20S displays the message
“Error”.
(2) When the error is cleared (bit 09000 turns OFF), the NT20S display message
reverts to “Normal”.
176
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
5-2-5
Section 5-2
Upgrading Bar Graphs
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Words)
The following describes the procedure to upgrade the bar graph display on the
NT20S by changing the contents of the allocated words.
To change the bar graph display on the NT20S, change the contents of the PC
words to which the numeral memory tables have been allocated.
The bar graph display cannot use hexadecimal numbers. If hexadecimal numbers
are set, the bar graph will not be displayed.
By writing a negative number (whose most significant digit is “F”) to the allocated
word of a graph set as “Sign display “No””, the graph display will become 0 % and
the % display will show “ %”.
For the procedure to write numeral values to the allocated words of the numeral
memory tables, refer to “Displaying the Contents of Allocated Words of Memory
Tables” (page 167).
For the procedure to change the contents of the numeral memory table (PC
words), refer to “Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings (Changing
the Contents of Allocated Words)” (page 169).
S Available allocation words
The numeral memory tables can be allocated to the following PC areas:
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocated
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated
DM
Data Memory
f
Data Memory
f
CH
Internal/Special Relay
f
Internal/Special Relay
f
TIM
Timer
Timer
CNT
Counter
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
–
f: OK
: 1 word only
: NG
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are allocated to the
system, they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
The range of respective area varies with the type of PC. Refer to Appendix L PC
Memory Map (page 278).
177
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
5-3
5-3-1
Section 5-3
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Allocation Bits and Display of Lamps
Lamps are controlled by allocating them to the PC bits. Set the area and bit number.
S Available allocation bits
The lamps can be allocated to the following PC areas:
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocated
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated
DM
Data Memory
f
Data Memory
f
CH
Internal/Special Relay
f
Internal/Special Relay
f
TIM
Timer
CNT
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
–
Timer
Counter
f: OK
: NG
Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1/CV series PCs are allocated to the
system, they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
The range of respective area varies with the type of PC. Refer to Appendix L PC
Memory Map (page 278).
To set the data memory (DM), specify the word number and then the bit number
(00 to 15).
178
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
5-3-2
Section 5-3
Turning ON (lit) and OFF (unlit) the Lamps
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Bits)
The following describes the procedure to change the lamp display status on the
NT20S by changing the contents of the allocated bits.
To change the lamp display status on the NT20S, turn ON and OFF the lamp control bit allocated in the PC.
NT20S
Lamp #1
Lamp #2
PC
Allocated bit (Lamp #1)
1
Lit
Unlit
1 (ON)
Allocated bit (Lamp #2)
2
0 (OFF)
The lamp bit indicates the lamp status as follows:
0 (OFF): Unlit
1 (ON): Lit (reverse display) or flashing
Procedure
1. Use the support tool to set the PC memory area where the lamp bit is to be
allocated to.
2. Register the lamps to the screen when creating the screen data by using the
support tool.
3. Create a PC program to turn ON/OFF the lamp bit.
Use the support tool to set the lamp display attributes whether the lamp is lit or
flashing when the lamp control bit is turned ON.
179
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Section 5-3
Application Example to Make the Lamp Light or Flash
This example gives a procedure to control the bits to move a robot arm and turning
the lamps ON and OFF.
S Support tool settings
Allocate the memory as shown below by using the support tool.
Lamp #0: Word 000200 (output bit to raise robot arm), guide display message
“UP”
Lamp #1: Word 000201 (output bit to lower robot arm), guide display message
“DOWN”
Lamp #2: Word 000202 (output bit to rotate robot arm counterclockwise),
guide display message “C/CLOCK”
Lamp #3: Word 000203 (output bit to rotate robot arm clockwise), guide display message “CLOCK”
Lamp #4: Word 000204 (output bit to clamp rotate robot arm), guide display
message “CLAMP”
Lamp #5: Word 000205 (output bit to unclamp rotate robot arm), guide display
message “UNCLAMP”
Contents registered to the screen: Lamp #0 to #5
Line 1
Process 3
Conveyor Loading Robot Arm
UP
C/
CLOCK
Raise:
Lower:
Counterclockwise:
Clockwise:
Clamp:
Unclamp:
Lamp#0
Lamp#1
Lamp#2
Lamp#3
Lamp#4
Lamp#5
CLAMP
CLOCK
DOWN
UNCLAMP
S PC ladder program
No PC ladder program is required to control the NT20S. Only a program to control the robot arm movements is required.
S NT20S operation
When the ladder program to control the robot arm is executed, the lamps on the
NT20S screen turn ON and OFF in synchronization with the robot arm movement.
For example, lamp #0 lights when the robot arm moves up and goes out when it
stops moving up.
180
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
5-3-3
Section 5-3
Allocated Bits, and Display, of Touch Switches
Method for PC Notification and NT20S Control
Two types of bit can be allocated to touch switches: notify bits - which serve to
notify statuses to the PC - and control bits, lamp bit, which control the lighting
(flashing) of the touch switches. (For other types of function, only lamp bits can be
allocated.) When a touch switch is pressed the notify bit status changes and, when
the lamp bit is ON, the touch switch lights (or flashes).
Press
NT20S
PC
Notification bit
1
START
abcde
Control
1
←1
Lights
In order to notify the status of a touch switch to the PC, the touch switch must be
allocated to a specified PC bit so that it can be managed. Designate the area and
bit number.
To use touch switches for notification to the PC, the following settings must be
made using the support tool: “touch switch” – “bit setting” – “notify bit”.
S Types of notification operation
When using Ver.5 of the direct connection function, the notification operation
when the touch switch is pressed can be selected from the following four types
(with Ver.4 direct connection, the type is fixed as “momentary”):
- Momentary
When the touch switch is pressed the bit comes ON; when it is released the bit
goes OFF.
- Alternate
Each time the touch switch is pressed, the bit status changes from ON to OFF
or OFF to ON.
- Set
When the touch switch is pressed, the bit comes ON and remains ON even if
the switch is pressed again.
- Reset
When the touch switch is pressed, the bit goes OFF and remains OFF even if
the switch is pressed again.
181
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Section 5-3
S Notes on the Notification Operation
The touch switch notification operations are as follows:
Type of Notification
Operation
When Using C200H Direct
Communication or NT Link with
other than DM Area
When Using Host Link or
NT Link with DM Area
Momentary
(1)Notification in word units
(other bits go OFF)
Alternate
Set
Reset
(2)Notification in word units
(however, the word contents
are read on display and noti- (4)Notification in bit units
fication is based on this
reading)
(3)Notification in bit units
When using touch switch input notification, note the following points:
- In the case of (1), the other bits in the same word as the notification bit are
turned OFF by the notification operation.
- In the case of (2), notification is executed on the basis of the contents of the
word before display, which means that the other bits are not rewritten. However, if the word contents are changed at the PC side, they will be rewritten based
on the contents before display.
- If the screen is switched while a momentary key is being pressed, the touch
switch itself disappears, so the status “OFF” is notified. In the case of (1) this
means that the other bits in the word will also be turned OFF.
- When using the host link, or NT link with the DM area, do not allocate momentary touch switches and other types of touch switch to the same word, since
the notification operations are different.
In the case of (3) and (4), the notification operation has no influence on the other
bits in the word.
S Possible bit allocations
Notify bits and lamp bits for touch switches can be allocated to the areas of the
PC memory listed in the following table.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocated
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated
DM
Data Memory
f
Data Memory
f
CH
Internal/Special Relay
f
Internal/Special Relay
f
TIM
Timer
CNT
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
–
Timer
Counter
f: OK
: NG
Since all the CVM1/CV-series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the system,
they cannot be used for applications not related to the system.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. See “Appendix L
PC Memory Map” (page 278 of the APPENDICES) for more details.
When making a data memory (DM) specification, specify the bit number (00 to 15)
following the word number.
182
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
5-3-4
Section 5-3
Lit (Flashing) and Unlit Touch Switch Statuses
(Changing the Status of Allocated Bits)
This section describes how to change the statuses of allocated bits and thereby
the statuses of the touch switches displayed by the NT20S.
The statuses of touch switches displayed by the NT20S are changed by switching
the control bits allocated in the PC memory ON and OFF.
NT20S
PC
Allocated bit (touch switch #1)
1
1 (ON)
Lit
Touch switch #1
The status of the lamp bit reflects the touch switch status, as follows:
Procedure
0 (OFF):
Unlit
1 (ON):
Lit (inverse display) or flashing
1. Use the support tool to allocate the touch switch lamp bits to the PC memory.
2. When creating the screen data using the support tool, register the touch
switch for a screen.
3. Create the PC program to switch the lamp bit of the touch switch ON and
OFF.
Set whether the lamp lights continuously or flashes when the bit comes ON
by setting the touch switch display attribute with the support tool.
5-3-5
Notifying the Host that a Switch has been Pressed
(Determining Touch Switch Status)
This section describes how the status of a touch switch (whether it has been
pressed or not) is ascertained.
With the NT20S, when a touch switch is pressed, the notify bit allocated to that
touch switch in the PC memory is automatically notified.
Touch switch #1
NT20S
PC
Allocated notify bit (touch switch #1)
1
183
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Section 5-3
Depending on the set operation type, the status of the allocated bit for touch switch
status notification will be controlled in one of the following ways (unless Ver.4 direct
connection is used, in which case the setting is fixed as “momentary”):
Momentary
: 0 (OFF) ... Not pressed
:1 (ON) ... Pressed
Alternate
: The allocated bit is switched to 1 (ON) if currently 0, and to 0
(OFF) if currently 1.
Set
: The allocated notify bit is forcibly switched to 1 (ON).
Reset
: The allocated notify bit is forcibly switched to 0 (OFF).
In order to determine the status of a touch switch, the status of the touch switch
notification bit allocated to it is determined.
The touch switch notify bits can be allocated to the following areas of the PC
memory.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocated
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated
DM
Data Memory
f
Data Memory
f
CH
Internal/Special Relay
f
Internal/Special Relay
f
TIM
Timer
Timer
CNT
Counter
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
–
f: OK
: NG
Since all the CVM1/CV-series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the system,
they cannot be used for applications not related to the system.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. See “Appendix L
PC Memory Map” (page 278 of the APPENDICES) for more details.
When making a data memory (DM) specification, specify the bit number (00 to 15)
following the word number.
Procedure
1. Use the support tool to allocate the touch switch notify bits to the PC memory.
2. When creating the screen data using the support tool, register the touch switch
for a screen.
3. Create a PC program to determine whether the touch switch notify bit is ON or
OFF.
184
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Section 5-3
The touch switch notification operations are as follows:
Type of Notification
Operation
When Using Host Link or
NT Link with DM Area
When Using C200H Direct
Communication or NT Link with
other than DM Area
Momentary
(1)Notification in word units
(other bits go OFF)
Alternate
Set
Reset
(2)Notification in word units
(however, the word contents
are read on display and noti- (4)Notification in bit units
fication is based on this
reading)
(3)Notification in bit units
When using touch switch input notification, note the following points:
- In the case of (1), the other bits in the same word as the notification bit are turned
OFF by the notification operation.
Press the
touch switch
Bit 15 14
1
0
Bit 15 14
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Touch switch
notify bit
0
Bits other than notify
bits are set to 0 (OFF).
- In the case of (2), notification is executed on the basis of the contents of the word
before display, which means that the other bits are not rewritten. However, if the
word contents are changed at the PC side, they will be rewritten based on the
contents before display.
- If the screen is switched while a momentary key is being pressed, the touch
switch itself disappears, so the status “OFF” is notified. In the case of (1) this
means that the other bits in the word will also be turned OFF.
- When using the host link, or NT link with the DM area, do not allocate momentary
touch switches and other types of touch switch to the same word, since the notification operations are different.
In the case of (3) and (4), the notification operation has no influence on the other
bits in the word.
185
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Section 5-3
Example of determination of touch switch status
This example uses the touch switches as normal switches (bits) in order to use the
NT20S as an operating panel.
S Support Tool Settings
Make the following settings using the support tool.
Touch switch #10:
Function “Notify Bit”
Display attribute “Light”
Control bit CH05000 (Run flag) ... Guide message: “RUN”
Notify bit CH 06000
Touch switch #11:
Function “Notify Bit”
Display attribute “Light”
Control bit CH 05000 (Stop flag) ... Guide message: “STOP”
Notify bit CH 06001
Data registered for the screen: touch switch #10, touch switch #11
Touch switch #10
Line 1
RUN
STOP
Touch switch #11
186
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Section 5-3
S PC program
Create the following ladder program.
1 scan ON
Touch switch #10 notify bit
↓
↓
11212
06000
Stop flag
05001
(touch switch #11 control bit)
06001
← Touch switch #11 notify bit
05001
Touch switch #10 notify bit
↓
06000
06001
05000
05000
Run flag
(touch switch #10 control bit)
↑
Touch switch #11 notify bit
S Program operation
The operation when the program is executed is presented below.
Execute program
Stop flag
: 1 (ON)
Stop touch switch : Lit
Press Run touch switch.
Run flag
Run touch switch
Stop flag
Stop touch switch
: 1 (ON)
: Lit
: 0 (OFF)
: Unlit
Press Stop touch switch.
Run flag
Run touch switch
Stop flag
Stop touch switch
:
:
:
:
0 (OFF)
Unlit
1 (ON)
Lit
187
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
5-3-6
Section 5-3
Notification of Numbers to the PC
The following describes how the numerical data input at the NT20S by using the
numeral setting function is ascertained by the PC.
In order to determine when numerical data has been input at the NT20S, the numeral setting strobe flag in the PT status notify area is used. In order to determine
the upgraded numeral memory table number, the “content upgrade memory table”
in the PT status notify area is used.
When numerical data is input at the NT20S, this is automatically notified to the PT
status notify area (PT → PC) allocated in the PC memory as follows.
Notification of upgrade:
PT status numeral setting strobe flag
turned ON (1)
Upgraded numeral table number: Stored in the “content upgrade memory
table”
When the PC reads the “content upgrade memory table” at the leading edge of the
numeral setting strobe flag, it determines the numeral memory table number in
which the numerical data that was changed at the NT20S is stored.
NT20S
PC
Numeral memory table 1
12345678 PT status notify area
12345678
Currently displayed screen
Content upgrade
memory table
PT status
Table No.
Numeral setting
strobe flag
Allocated word (numeral table 1)
Start
12345678
Start + 1
[“Content upgrade memory table” in the PT status notify area and PT status]
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Word
m+1
8
7
6
0
PT status
m+2
5
4
2
0
1
0 Bit
0
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
–
0
0
0
3
Numeral memory table # (BCD, 3 digits)
0
–
0
Content upgrade memory table
PT status
Bit
PT status
Numeral setting strobe flag
Numeral memory table #: 000 to 127
Data is written to the content upgrade memory table as three digits of BCD (binary
coded decimal) data.
When the numeral setting strobe flag bit has been notified to the PC it returns to the
OFF (0) status.
For details on the method for storing a number in the word allocated for the numeral memory table, see “Displaying the Contents of Allocated Words of Memory
Tables” (page 167).
188
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Section 5-3
S Restrictions on allocating words
The PT status notify area can be allocated to the PC memory areas listed in the
following table.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocated
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated
DM
Data Memory
f
Data Memory
f
CH
Internal/Special Relay
f
Internal/Special Relay
f
TIM
Timer
Timer
CNT
Counter
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
–
f: OK
: NG
Since all the CVM1/CV-series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the system,
they cannot be used for applications not related to the system.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. See “Appendix L
PC Memory Map” (page 278 of the APPENDICES) for more details.
Procedure
1. Use the support tool to allocate the PT status notify area (PT → PC) to the PC
memory.
2. Using the support tool, create a numeral setting screen and allocate the numeral memory table to the PC memory.
3. Create a PC program for reading the “content upgrade memory table” in the
PT status notify area when the numeral setting strobe flag in the PT status
notify area comes ON (1).
4. Read the allocated word for the numeral memory table number read in step 3.
189
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Section 5-3
Example of reading a numeral memory table into which a numerical value has been input
This example shows the reading of the numeral memory table number after a value has been changed by inputting numerical data at the NT20S.
S Setting at the support tool
Make the following settings using the support tool.
Allocated word for the PT status notify area : CH0110
Numeral memory table entry No.3: DM 0005 (saved word: One)
Numeral memory table entry No.4: DM 0006 (saved word: One)
Data registered for the screens:
Numeral setting 1 ... Reference table “numeral memory table #3”
Numeral setting 2 ... Reference table “numeral memory table #4”
Numeral memory table entry number 3 (4-digit input)
Line 1
Qty.
Defect limit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
800
unit
30
unit
9
0 CLR +/–
Numeral memory table entry number 4 (4-digit input)
S PC program
Create the following PC ladder program.
11211
@MOV(21)
111
DM0105
(1)
Notification word for content upgrade memory table
Word that stores the numeral memory table number
Numeral setting
strobe flag
S Program operation
(1) When the numeral setting strobe flag (bit 11211) comes ON (1), the contents
of CH-0111 (the word where the content upgrade memory table is located) are
transferred to DM 0105. The number of the numeral memory table that contains the upgraded data is stored in DM 0105 (in this case it is 0003 or 0004).
If the numeral memory table is allocated to a PC word, the value input to it can
be read easily by referring to the allocated word.
In this case, the contents of numeral memory table #3 are stored in DM 0005
and the contents of numeral table #4 are stored in DM 0006.
190
NT20S Status Control
5-4
Section 5-4
NT20S Status Control
The statuses of the NT20S can be controlled from the PC by writing control data to
the “PT status control bits” of the PT status control area allocated in the PC
memory.
NT20S
PC
Screen off
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
Buzzer sounds
Copy memory
table setting
PT status control bits
5-4-1
Control data
Controllable NT20S Functions
[“PT status control bits” of the PT status control area]
15 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Word
n+3
0
PT status control bits
15 14 13 12 11 10
0
PT status control designation
0
0
9
8
Bit
0
Item Controlled
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
Screen display
(Note 1)
ON
OFF
Processing priority
registration
(Note 2)
ON
OFF
Continuous buzzer
ON
OFF
Intermittent buzzer
ON
OFF
Backlight mode
ON
Flash
Note 1: The backlighting is on when the screen
display bit is set to ON and off when the
screen display bit is set to OFF.
Note 2: Priority registration is only valid when
NT link (1:N) is set.
The PC status control bits remain unchanged if the NT20S status is changed with
the screen attributes or memory switches, which means that the statuses of the
PT status control bits do not match the actual status of the NT20S. For example,
the buzzer may sound even though the setting for continuous buzzer bit 13 is
“OFF”.
In this kind of case, control the NT20S by using the PT status control bits.
191
NT20S Status Control
Section 5-4
S Screen display (bit 15)
The screen display bit is used to display and clear the screen to prevent “burn-in”
on the CRT. Set bit 15 to 0 (OFF) to clear the screen. The backlight will also go
OFF at the same time.
When the screen has been cleared, the last displayed screen can be redisplayed
either by turning Bit 15 ON, or by pressing a touch switch. The backlight will also
light at the same time.
Note that if the screen is OFF by the backlight OFF or EL screen OFF function
with Bit 15 ON (1), turn Bit 15 OFF (0) once and then turn it back ON (1) to redisplay the screen.
Reference: Instead of turning Bit 15 ON, a screen can be displayed by specifying its screen
number. For details on screen switching, see “Switching the Screen Display”
(page 157).
S Priority registration for processing (NT link 1:N connections only) (bit 14)
It is possible to register one of the multiple PTs connected by the 1:N NT link
method to have processing priority. The PT for which bit 14 is set ON (1) is given
priority over the other PTs and has a higher response speed for display, touch
switches, etc.
When bit 14 is turned OFF (0), this registration is canceled and the normal response speed is reinstated. If priority registration is set for more than one PT, the
one for which the registration was made last will have priority.
By monitoring C200HX/HG/HE words, the unit number of the PT for which priority registration has been set can be confirmed. For details on the monitoring operation at the PC side, refer to the manual for the PC used.
[Connection to RS-232C port of C200HX/HG/HE]
Channel
Bit
Function
CI0265CH (standard
(
port)
p )
CI0284CH (port
( t A) ()
CI0285CH (port B) ()
0
Unit No.0 Communication in progress flag, ON when connected
1
Unit No.1 Communication in progress flag, ON when connected
2
Unit No.2 Communication in progress flag, ON when connected
3
Unit No.3 Communication in progress flag, ON when connected
4
Unit No.4 Communication in progress flag, ON when connected
5
Unit No.5 Communication in progress flag, ON when connected
6
Unit No.6 Communication in progress flag, ON when connected
7
Unit No.7 Communication in progress flag, ON when connected
8
Unit No.0 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
9
Unit No.1 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
10
Unit No.2 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
11
Unit No.3 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
12
Unit No.4 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
13
Unit No.5 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
14
Unit No.6 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
15
Unit No.7 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
() This is the port of the communication port.
192
NT20S Status Control
Section 5-4
S Continuous buzzer (bit 13) and intermittent buzzer (bit 12)
In the case of both buzzers, when the respective bit is ON the buzzer sounds and
when it is OFF the buzzer does not sound.
The “continuous buzzer” sounds continuously without interruption.
The “intermittent buzzer” sounds for 0.5 seconds at 0.5 second intervals.
If both Bit 13 and Bit 12 are turned ON simultaneously, Bit 13 takes priority and
the continuous buzzer is selected.
Another way to stop a buzzer sounding is to use a touch switch to which the buzzer
stop attribute function is allocated.
Whether or not the buzzer actually sounds also depends on the setting of the
“buzzer” memory switch of the NT20S. For details on this setting, see “Using the
Buzzer” (page 92).
Besides using PT status control bit operations, the buzzer status can also be controlled by the screen attributes. The screen attributes are set by using the support
tool. The functions that can be set using the screen attributes are the following:
Buzzer attribute:
Set whether or not the buzzer will sound when the
screen is displayed and, if it sounds, the type of buzzer.
S Backlight mode (bit 8)
If bit 8 is turned ON when the screen is displayed (bit 15 = ON), the screen is
made to flash using the backlight. When bit 8 is turned OFF, normal display is
resumed.
When the screen is not displayed (bit 15 = OFF), the backlight mode is invalid.
It is possible to use NT20S switch settings to make the backlight go off automatically after a set time during which there have been no operations.
Besides using PT status control bit operations, the backlight status can also be
controlled by the screen attributes. The screen attributes are set by using the support tool. The functions that can be set using the screen attributes are the following:
Backlight:
Set whether the backlight will be continuously or intermittently lit when the screen is displayed.
193
NT20S Status Control
5-4-2
Section 5-4
How to Control NT20S Functions
This section describes how to control the functions of the NT20S.
S Restrictions on allocating words
The PT status control area (PC → PT) can be allocated to the PC memory areas
listed in the following table.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocated
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated
DM
Data Memory
f
Data Memory
f
CH
Internal/Special Relay
f
Internal/Special Relay
f
TIM
Timer
Timer
CNT
Counter
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
–
f: OK
: NG
Since all the CVM1/CV-series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the system,
they cannot be used for applications not related to the system.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. See “Appendix L
PC Memory Map” (page 278 of the APPENDIX L) for more details.
Procedure
1. Use the support tool to set the area at the PC used for allocation of the PT status control area (PC ³ PT).
2. Write a PC program for writing the control data into the “PT status control bit” of
the PT status control area.
S Timing for control of the PT status control bit
The PT status control bit is not read when the NT20S is started up. It is read, and
control executed, only when the contents of the PT status control bit are read for
the first time after the NT20S is started up.
Since NT20S status control is executed when the bit corresponding to the PT status control bit changes, in order to perform the same control again the corresponding bit must be specified again.
194
NT20S Status Control
Section 5-4
Example of Use of PT Status Control Bit
The example below explains how operation with the PT status control bit can be
used to use the NT20S like a warning lamp.
S Setting with the support tool
Make the following setting with the support tool.
Allocated word for PT status control area: CH 0100
S PC program
Create the PC ladder program as follows.
09002
09003
09003
09002
09003
(1)
@MOV(21)
#A000
103
Display screen, sound buzzer continuously
PT status control word
@MOV(21)
#9000
103
Display screen, sound buzzer continuously
PT status control word
@ANDW(34)
103
#CFFF
103
(2)
(3)
PT status control word
“0” set for continuous and intermittent buzzer
sounds only
PT status control word
S Program operation
(1) The PT status control bits are set as shown below when bit 09002 turns OFF.
This command block is not executed when bit 09003 is ON.
Screen display (bit 15)
1 (ON)
Continuous buzzer (bit 13)
1 (ON)
The NT20S continuous buzzer sounds.
(2) The PT status control bits are set as shown below when bit 09003 turns OFF.
Screen display (bit 15)
1 (ON)
Intermittent buzzer (bit 12)
1 (ON)
The NT20S intermittent buzzer sounds.
(3) The PT status control bits are set as shown below when both bits 09002 and
09003 turn ON.
Continuous buzzer (bit 13)
0 (OFF)
Intermittent buzzer (bit 12)
0 (OFF)
The NT20S buzzer stops.
195
Notification of the Operating Status to the PC
5-5
Section 5-5
Notification of the Operating Status to the PC
(Determining the NT20S Operating Status)
The status (operating statuses, etc.) of the NT20S can be determined from the PC
by reading the “PT status” word in the PT status notify area allocated in the PC
memory.
NT20S
PC
PT status notify area
Currently displayed screen
Content upgrade memory table
Screen
number
PT stopped
5-5-1
PT status
Ascertainable NT20S Statuses (Notified Operating Statuses)
[“PT status notification bits” of the PT status notify area]
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Word
m+2
8
7
PT status notification bits
15
14
13
0
0
12
6
5
4
3
2
0
11
1
0 Bit
PT status
0
10
9
8
0
0
0
Bit
PT operating status
(1(ON) = operating / 0 (OFF) = stopped)
Screen switch strobe flag
Numeral setting strobe flag
Caution:
Make the settings so that the PT control area and PT status notify area do not overlap.
S PT operating status (bit 15)
When the NT20S is in the RUN mode this bit is set to ON (1). In other modes and
while the system menu is displayed it is OFF (0). When this bit is OFF allocated
bits and words cannot be read or written to.
During the run mode, ON (1) is periodically written into this bit. In order to check
whether the NT20S is operating normally or not, write OFF (0) to this bit: if it is
ON (1) 30 seconds later the NT20S is running, and if it is OFF (0), the NT20S is
stopped.
Caution:
196
To ensure system safety, be sure to periodically read the PT operating status bit
from the host in order to ensure that the PT is always operating normally.
Notification of the Operating Status to the PC
Section 5-5
S Screen switch strobe flag (bit 12)
When the screen displayed on the NT20S is switched by a designation from the
PC or by the standalone function, the screen switch strobe flag comes ON (1).
On notification to the PC, it returns to the OFF (0) status.
For details on how the screen switch strobe flag is used, see “Notifying the Display Screen to the PC” (page 160).
S Numeral setting strobe flag (bit 11)
When numerical data is input to a numeral memory table using the NT20S numeral setting function, the numeral setting strobe flag comes ON (1). On notification to the PC, it returns to the OFF (0) status.
For details on how the numeral setting strobe flag is used, see “Notification of
Numbers to the PC” (page 188).
5-5-2
Reading the NT20S Operating Statuses
This section explains how to determine the status of the NT20S, and ascertain its
operating status.
To ascertain the operating status of the NT20S, “PT status” is used.
The NT20S automatically notifies information such as the operating status to the
PT status word of the PT status notify area (PT → PC) allocated to the PC memory
as shown below.
Notification of operation mode:
PT operating status
Notification of screen switching:
Screen switch strobe flag
Notification of numerical data upgrade:
Numeral setting strobe flag
S Restrictions on allocating words
The PT status notify area (PT → PC) can be allocated to the PC memory areas
listed in the following table.
Symbol
C Series PCs
Allocated
CVM1/CV Series PCs
Allocated
DM
Data Memory
f
Data Memory
f
CH
Internal/Special Relay
f
Internal/Special Relay
f
TIM
Timer
Timer
CNT
Counter
Counter
HR
Holding Relay
f
–
AR
Auxiliary Relay
f
Auxiliary Relay
LR
Link Relay
f
–
f: OK
: NG
Since all the CVM1/CV-series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the system,
they cannot be used for applications not related to the system.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type. See “Appendix L
PC Memory Map” (page 278 of the APPENDIX L) for more details.
Procedure
1. Use the support tool to allocate the PT status notify area (PT → PC) to the PC
memory.
2. Write a PC program to read the “PT status” word of the PT status notify area
and check each bit status.
197
Notification of the Operating Status to the PC
Section 5-5
S Timing of PT status notify bit notification
The contents of the PT status notify area (PT ³ PC) are written to the PC whenever the status of the NT20S changes during operation.
Example of PT Status Notify Bit Application
In the example below, the status of the NT20S is checked by PT status notify bit
notification.
S Settings with the support tool
Make the following setting with the support tool.
Allocated word for PT status notify area: CH0110
S PC program
Create the following PC ladder program.
11215
(1)
@MOV(21)
#0001
DM0001
PT stopped
Word that stores the PT status
@MOV(21)
#0002
DM0001
PT running
Word that stores the PT status
11215
(2)
S Program operation
(1) When the PT operating status (contact 11215) is OFF (0), “1” (PT stopped) is
stored in DM0001.
(2) When the PT operating status (contact 11215) is ON (1), “2” (PT running) is
stored in DM0001.
198
SECTION 6
Using the RS-232C
This section explains how to carry out communication via the RS-232C interface used with an NT20S-ST128, focusing on
the commands.
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
Table of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232C Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1 Communication Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-2 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-1 Notification and Control of Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-2 Notification of numeral setting input and touch switch status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling the NT20S Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key to Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7-1 Use of Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXAMPLE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
200
201
201
203
204
205
208
208
212
214
216
222
222
223
199
Table of Commands
Section 6-1
Table of Commands
Operating Commands
Type
Screen control
Command
Name
Page
[ESC] 0
Display Specified Screen
204
[ESC] X
Request Screen Number
204
[ESC] B
Write Character-string Memory Table
205
[ESC] C
4-digit Write Numeral Memory Table
206
[ESC] D
8-digit Write Numeral Memory Table
206
[ESC] /
Copy Memory Table
207
[ESC] K
Lamp and Touch Switch Display (Bit Specification)
210
[ESC] Q
Lamp and Touch Switch Display (Number Specification)
210
[ESC] R
Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Enquiry
211
Touch Switch and
F
Function
i K
Key IInput
[ESC] U
Touch Switch Disable
214
[ESC] V
Touch Switch Enable
214
System
y
Control
[ESC] P
Screen Display Control
215
[ESC] T
Buzzer Control
215
[ESC] W
System Menu Display Permission
215
[ESC] Y
Screen Number Response
205
[ESC] E
4-digit Number Input Notify
212
[ESC] F
8-digit Number Input Notify
212
[ESC] S
Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Response
211
[ESC] J
Touch Switch Bit Output (from NT20S to Host)
213
[ESC] H
Touch Switch Number Output (from NT20S to Host)
213
Memory
y table opp
eration
i
Lamp
p and Touch
S i h Di
Switch
Display
l
Notification
Terminal Commands
Type
Character Size
Command
Name
Page
[ESC] &
Clear Screen
216
[ESC] )
Character Specify Size
217
[ESC] *
Specify Character Enlargement
217
[ESC] !
Normal Display
218
[ESC] ”
Set Inverse Display
218
[ESC] #
End Inverse Display
218
[ESC] $
Set Flashing Display
219
[ESC] %
End Flashing Display
219
Character String
g
Di l
Display
[ESC] +
Set Cursor Position
220
[ESC] 4
Specify Displayed Characters
220
Graphic
p
Display
p y
[ESC] 7
Draw Polyline
221
[ESC] 8
Draw Circle
221
Character Display
p y
Att ib t
Attributes
200
RS-232C Interface Unit Communications
6-1
Section 6-1
RS-232C Communications
This section describes the communication procedure when using an
NT20S-ST128 (RS-232C), and program flow using examples in BASIC.
6-1-1
Communication Procedure
The Host and NT20S communicate according to the following procedure.
1, 2, 3...
1. The RS-232C circuit must be opened (i.e., communication enabled) before
communication can start.
2. Commands are used to control the PT and to receive notification from the
NT20S.
3. Close the RS-232C circuit again after communication is complete.
Host program
RS-232C circuit
NT20S operation
Open circuit
OPEN command
Send instruction
Receive instruction
PRINT # command
Open
status
Send instruction
Send instruction
LINE INPUT # command
CLOSE command
Close circuit
After a circuit has been opened, it can be used until it is closed again.
OPEN
Opens the RS-232C circuit. The Host communication conditions are also set.
Refer to (3-5-4) Setting RS-232C Communication Conditions.
PRINT #
Sends an instruction via the RS-232C circuit to the NT20S.
LINE INPUT #
Receives a command from the NT20S. [LINE INPUT] is used when receiving input
delimited by commas (,) or double quotation marks (”).
CLOSE
Closes the RS-232C circuit.
Refer to the Host’s BASIC Manual for more details about the commands.
201
RS-232C Interface Unit Communications
Section 6-1
Operation by Operating Commands
The operating commands display monitored data from the production line and
messages to the factory workers. They are also used for NT20S control and management.
The communication flow between the Host and NT20S differs according to the following three cases:
Message from Host to NT20S
Host program
Message to PT
NT20S operation
Message operating command
Process message
Enquiry from Host to NT20S
Host program
NT20S operation
Enquiry operating command
Enquiry
Receive command
Send response command
Receive command
Response operating command
Notification of Operation at NT20S to the Host
Host program
Receive notification
NT20S operation
Notification operating command
Send notification command
Operation by Terminal Commands
The terminal commands allow the NT20S to be used as a terminal of the Host to
display text and graphics independently of the screens stored in the NT20S.
The Host sends a command and the NT20S processes the message. The NT20S
does not send back a response to the Host.
Host program
Message to PT
202
NT20S operation
Terminal command
Process message
RS-232C Interface Unit Communications
6-1-2
Section 6-1
Precautions
Some important points to consider when using commands are listed below.
Command Length
If a mistake during command specification results in a command being too long,
the correct length of the command is executed and the remainder is ignored.
A timeout error results if a mistake during command specification results in a command being too short.
Interval Between Transmitted Commands
As a small number of bytes is transmitted by the Host, the interval between transmissions should not exceed 5 seconds if a command is divided up for transmission. A timeout error occurs if the interval between transmissions exceeds 5 seconds.
When commands are sent too frequently, a buffer overflow error may occur if the
NT20S cannot keep up with the command processing.
In order to prevent buffer overflow, use flow control.
Controlling PT Status with Operating Commands
Control of the NT20S status by the operating commands is restricted by the
NT20S memory switch settings as listed below.
Operating command
Buzzer control command [ESC] T
Restriction from memory switch
setting
Effective when “buzzer turned on”
Coordinate Specification with the Terminal Commands
The entire command is ignored if any point specified at coordinates X, Y with the
Terminal commands lies outside the screen.
Error display
If the “automatic reset after communication” memory switch of the NT20S is set to
ON, no message is displayed when a communication error occurs.
However, time-out errors are displayed.
203
Screen Display
6-2
Section 6-2
Screen Display
This section describes the commands for switching the screen display of the
NT20S and the commands for ascertaining the screen number of the screen currently displayed by the NT20S.
The displayed screen can be also switched by pressing a touch switch for which
the screen number of the screen to be displayed has been registered. For details
on this method, refer to “Screen Switching Function” on page 138.
To change the NT20S screen, use the Display Specified Screen Command.
To ascertain the screen number of the currently displayed screen, use the Request
Screen Number Command. When this command is executed, the NT20S returns
the Screen Number Response Command.
When the currently displayed NT20S screen is changed by pressing a touch
switch to which a screen number has been allocated, the Screen Number Response Command is automatically sent from the NT20S.
Display Specified Screen
Format
[ESC]
0
m1
m2
m3
m4
1B
30
* *
* *
* *
* *
m1m2m3m4: Number of displayed screen (4-digit hexadecimal)
0000: No display
0001 to 01FAH: Screen #1 to #500
Description
The specified screen is displayed on the NT20S when a screen number is sent
from the Host with this command.
Request Screen Number
Format
Description
204
[ESC]
x
1B
58
Enquires what number screen is displayed on the NT20S. The NT20S returns the
number of the displayed screen using the Screen Number Response Command
(refer to 6-2 Screen Number Response).
Memory Tables
Section 6-3
Screen Number Response
Format
[ESC]
Y
m1
m2
m3
[CR]
1B
59
* *
* *
* *
OD
m1m2 m3: Number of displayed screen (4-digit hexadecimal)
000 to 1FAH (0 to 500)
Description
S The NT20S returns this command to report the currently displayed screen number to the Host in response to the Request Screen Number Command (refer to
6-2 Request Screen Number) sent from the Host.
S The new screen number is report to the Host with this command after the displayed screen is switch with the Stand-alone functions (screen switch function).
6-3
Memory Tables
This section explains the commands used for memory table operations.
To change the contents of a character string memory table, use the Write Character-string Memory Table Command.
To change the contents of a numeral memory table, use a Write Numeral Memory
Table Command.
Note that different commands are used to write 4-digit and 8-digit numerical values.
Values can be copied from one memory table to another of the same type by using
the Copy Memory Table Command.
Reference: S When the contents of an NT20S numeral memory table are changed by numeral
setting input, a Number Input Notify Command is automatically sent from the
NT20S (refer to page 212)
S By creating a bar graph screen and arranging for it to refer to a particular numeral
memory table, the display contents of the bar graph can be updated by changing
the contents of the numeral table.
Write Character-string Memory Table
Format
[ESC]
B
n1
n2
d1
d2
c1
c2
c3
cn
1B
42
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
n1n2: Character string length as a number of normal characters (2-digit hexadecimal) 01 to 20H (1 to 32)
d1d2: Character-string memory table address of write destination (2-digit hexadecimal) 00 to 7FH (0 to 127)
c1c2c3 to cn: Character-string data
205
Memory Tables
Section 6-3
Description
Writes the character-string data to the character-string memory table.
The character-string data can contain a mixture of normal alphanumeric characters and marks. When determining the character string length, count each mark as
two normal characters.
Caution:
If the actual character string is longer than the specified character string length, the
specified number of characters is written and the remainder are discarded.
A timeout error message is displayed if the actual character string is shorter than
the specified character string length.
4-digit Write Numeral Memory Table
Format
[ESC]
C
d1
d2
d3
n1
n2
n3
n4
1B
43
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
d1d2d3: Numeral memory table address of write destination (3-digit hexadecimal)
000 to 07FH (0 to 127)
n1n2n3n4: Number data (4-digit BCD or 4-digit hexadecimal)
Description
S Writes 4-digit number data (decimal or hexadecimal) to the specified numeral
memory table.
S If a 4-digit number data is written while an 8-digit numeral is displayed, the lower
4 digits are updated.
Caution:
This command cannot be used to write negative numbers. Use the 8-digit Write
Command (refer to 6-3 8-digit Write Numeral Memory Table).
8-digit Write Numeral Memory Table
Format
[ESC]
D
d1
d2
d3
n1
n2
n3
n4
n5
1B
44
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
d1d2d3:
n6
n7
n8
* *
* *
* *
Numeral memory table address of write destination (3-digit hexadecimal) 000 to 07FH (0 to 127)
n1n2n3n4n5n6n7n8: Number data (8-digit BCD or 8-digit hexadecimal)
Description
S Writes the 8-digit number data (decimal or hexadecimal) to the specified numeral memory table
S To write a negative numeral (decimal), specify “F(46H)” for “n1” (in this case, a
7-digit numeral is written.)
206
Memory Tables
Section 6-3
Copy Memory Table
Format
Description
[ESC]
/
m1
s1
s2
s3
d1
d2
d3
1B
2F
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
m1:
Type of memory table
0 (30H): Character-string memory table
1 (31H): Numeral memory table
s1s2s3:
Copy source memory table address
000 to 127 (3-digit BCD)
d1d2d3:
Copy destination memory table address
000 to 127 (3-digit BCD)
Copies the contents of the copy source memory table to the copy destination
memory table. The memory table contents are copied to a memory table of the
same type: character-string memory table to character-string memory table or numeral memory table to numeral memory table.
207
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
6-4
Section 6-4
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
This section describes the commands for operating the lamps, touch switches.
In order to change the display status (lit (flashing) or unlit) of a lamp or touch
switch, use the Lamp and Touch Switch Display Commands. There are two such
commands, one for bit specification and the other for number specification.
The Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Enquiry Command is used to ascertain the status of a lamp or touch switch. When this command is executed the
NT20S returns the Lamp/Touch Switch Display Status Response Command.
Reference: When the status of an NT20S touch switch is changed - for example by pressing it the Touch Switch Number Output Command is sent to the host. When a numerical
value is input by pressing a touch switch to which a numeral setting function has
been allocated, a Number Input Notify Command is sent to the host.
6-4-1
Notification and Control of Touch Switches
If a touch switch is pressed, the corresponding touch switch number or bit information is sent to the Host. Conversely, to turn ON a touch switch or cause it to flash,
the touch switch # or bit information is sent from the Host.
The type of data relating to the touch switch notification is specified with the “bit
input attribute” in the screen attributes when creating the screen data with the support tool. It is not permissible to use both notification and control by a touch switch
number and notification and control by bit information on the same screen.
Press
NT20S
HOST
START
abcde
Touch switch # or
bit information
Lighting command
Lit
S Bit touch switch method (bit input permitted setting)
If a touch switch is pressed, bit information is sent in accordance with the position of the touch switch. It can be used as a normal bit input switch at the PC side.
When this method is used, if more than one touch switch is pressed at the same
time, the information of all the pressed touch switches (0 to 63) is reported to the
Host.
S Touch switch # method (bit input not-permitted setting)
If the touch switch status is changed, the touch switch number set when the
touch switch is created is sent as a 8-digit hexadecimal number.
208
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Section 6-4
Cautions when bit input is permitted
If the touch switches are set in the following positions using the support tool while
the setting is “bit input permitted”, the following operations will occur due to the
configuration of the touch switches.
Take this into consideration when setting touch switch areas.
Example 1:
Touch switches are set at positions A, B, C, and D using the minimum switch setting unit.
A
S If switches A, B, and C are turned ON at the
same time, switch D is also set ON.
C
S Similarly, if switches A, B, and D are turned ON
at the same time, switch C is also set ON.
B
D
Example 2:
Touch switch areas E, F, and G are set.
E
F
S If switches E and F are turned ON at the same
time, switch G is also set ON.
G
Touch switch notification/control and attributes
Inverse and normal display states can be set as attributes of touch switches by
using the support tool. There are slight differences in the operation when a touch
switch is pressed depending on whether bit input is permitted or not permitted.
Bit input not permitted: Touch switch notification by number
The touch switch is lit for 0.2 seconds when pressed and then returns to the
unlit status.
Bit input permitted: Touch switch notification by bit information
The touch switch is lit while pressed and returns to the unlit status when released.
When a touch switch which is currently lit or flashing is pressed, it is continuously lit
while pressed and returns to its original state when released.
Simultaneous pressing of multiple touch switches
Two or more touch switches can be simultaneously pressed if their statuses are
notified by bit information or if they use different host notification methods. However, two or more switches cannot be simultaneously pressed if their statuses are
notified to the host by their numbers.
209
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Section 6-4
Lamp and Touch Switch Display (Bit Specification)
Format
[ESC]
K
m01
m02
m11
m12
m21
m22
m31
m32
[CR]
1B
4B
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
0D
m0 to m3: Specification of lamps and touch switches (2-digit hexadecimal)
The relationship between the lamp and touch switch number and an
expression of m0 to m3 in bits is given in the following table.
Bit
mx1
mx2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
m0
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
m1
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
m2
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
m3
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Parameter
mx1: Higher 4 bits of mx (x: 0 to 3)
mx2: Lower 4 bits of mx
Bit ON: The lamp or touch switch is turned on (or caused to flash).
Bit OFF: The lamp or touch switch is turned off.
Example
To turn on lamps and touch switches with the numbers 1, 5, 6, 7, and 26
m01m02m11m12m21m22m31m32=E200004
Description
S Changes the display status of the lamps or touch switches.
S Whether the lamp or touch switch which corresponds to the specified bit is
turned on or flashes is determined by the setting made using the support tool.
S This command can be used only when the setting for the “LMP Bit Control”
memory switch is “Enable”.
Lamp and Touch Switch Display (Number Specification)
Format
m1:
[ESC]
Q
m1
n1
n2
1B
51
* *
* *
* *
Display status
0 (30H): Not lit (normal display)
1 (31H): Lit
2 (32H): Flashing inverse
3 (33H): All not lit
n1n2: Lamp or touch switch # (2-digit hexadecimal)
000 to FFH (0 to 255)
210
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Description
Section 6-4
Changes the lamp or touch switch lighting status.
Specify the display status as 3 (all not lit) to turn off all the lamps and touch
switches. In this case, specify the lamp or touch switch number to any number in
the permitted range.
Caution:
The display attributes set with the Support Tool determine if lamps #0 to #31 light
continuously or flash. The display status set with this command is ignored.
Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Enquiry
Format
[ESC]
R
n1
n2
1B
52
* *
* *
n1n2: Lamp or touch switch # (2-digit hexadecimal)
000 to FFH (0 to 255)
Description
Enquires the status of a lamp or touch switch specified by its address.
The NT20S returns the Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Response Command (refer to 6-4-1 Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Response) to report
the display status.
Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Response
Format
m1:
[ESC]
S
m1
n1
n2
1B
53
* *
* *
* *
Display status
0 (30H): Not lit (normal display)
1 (31H): Lit
2 (32H): Flashing inverse
n1n2: Lamp or touch switch # (2-digit hexadecimal)
00 to FFH (0 to 255)
Description
The NT20S returns this command to report the lamp or touch switch number display status to the Host in response to the Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status
Enquiry Command (refer to 6-4-1 Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Enquiry)
sent from the Host.
Note:
Lamps 0 to 31 are reported as being lit when in the “flashing inverse” status.
211
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
6-4-2
Section 6-4
Notification of numeral setting input and touch switch status
The following describes the commands for notifying the host when numeral setting
is performed (i.e., when the contents of a numeral memory table are changed by
pressing a touch switch) or when a touch switch is pressed, when operating the
NT20S.
When a numerical value is input by numeral setting, the NT20S sends a Number
Input Notify Command to the host. The command sent differs depending on
whether a 4-digit or 8-digit number is input.
When a touch switch is pressed, the NT20S sends a Touch Switch Number Output
Command or Touch Switch Bit Output Command to the host. The command sent
depends on the set screen attributes.
4-digit Number Input Notify
Format
[ESC]
E
d1
d2
d3
n1
n2
n3
n4
[CR]
1B
45
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
0D
d1d2d3:
Numeral memory table address to which number was input (3-digit
hexadecimal) 000 to 07FH (0 to 127)
n1n2n3n4: Input number data (4-digit BCD)
Description
A number with 4 transferred digits set with the NT20S number setting function is
reported to the Host with this command.
Caution:
This command cannot be used for negative numbers. Always set “8” as the number of transferred digits when negative numbers may be input.
8-digit Number Input Notify
Format
[ESC]
F
d1
d2
d3
n1
n2
n3
n4
n5
1B
46
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
d1d2d3:
n6
n7
n8
[CR]
* *
* *
* *
0D
Numeral memory table address to which number was input (3-digit
hexadecimal) 000 to 07FH (0 to 127)
n1n2n3n4n5n6n7n8: Input number data (8-digit BCD)
Description
A number with 8 transferred digits set with the PT number setting function is reported to the Host with this command.
When a negative number is written, n1 becomes “F” (46H) and the number comprises 7 digits.
212
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Section 6-4
Touch Switch Number Output (from NT20S to Host)
Format
[ESC]
H
m1
m2
[CR]
1B
48
* *
* *
0D
m1m2: Address of the pressed touch # (2-digit hexadecimal)
00 to E2H (0 to 226)
Description
If a touch switch is pressed while the screen for which the “Bit In = Off” attribute is
set is displayed, the address of the pressed touch switch is reported to the Host.
Reference: If more than one touch switch is pressed at the same time, only the address of the
touch switch which was pressed first is reported to the Host.
Notification of numeral setting is not executed in the case of touch switches which
have been allocated as ten keys.
Touch Switch Bit Output (from NT20S to Host)
Format
[ESC]
J
s01
s02
s11
s12
s21
s22
s31
s32
[CR]
1B
4A
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
0D
s0,…s3:
Status of the touch switch (2-digit hexadecimal value for each switch)
The relationship between the touch switch number and an expression
of s0 to s3 in bits is given in the following table.
Bit
sx1
sx2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
s0
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
s1
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
s2
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
s3
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Parameter
sx1: Higher 4 bits of sx (x: 0 to 3)
sx2: Lower 4 bits of sx
Bit ON: The touch switch is on.
Bit OFF: The touch switch is off.
Example
Touch switches at addresses 0, 3, 21, and 27 are ON
s01s02s11s12s21s22s31s32=09002008
Description
S If the touch switch status is changed while the screen for which the “Bit Input,
Touch Switch” attribute is set is displayed, the status of the corresponding bit is
reported to the Host.
S This report is made each time a touch switch is turned ON or OFF.
213
Controlling the NT20S Status
6-5
Section 6-5
Controlling the NT20S Status
This section describes the actual methods used for controlling the NT20S status.
The Screen Display Control Command is used to operate the back light of the
NT20S (i.e., switch it on and off).
The Buzzer Control Command is used to control the buzzer status of the NT20S.
To inhibit the display of the system menu or cancel this inhibition, use the Mode
Switch Enable Command.
Touch switch data input or host notification can be inhibited, or this inhibition canceled, by using the Touch Switch and Function Key Disable Command or Touch
Switch and Function Key Enable Command respectively.
Touch Switch Disable
Format
Description
[ESC]
U
2
1B
55
32
Disables touch switch and function key input and notification to the Host.
Reference: Use the Touch Switch Enable Command (refer to 6-5 Touch Switch Enable) to use
a disabled touch switch again. Disabled touch switches are also enabled when the
NT20S power is turned off.
Touch Switch Enable
Format
Description
[ESC]
V
2
1B
56
32
Enables input and notification to the Host of a disabled touch switch or function
key.
Reference: Disabled touch switches are also enabled when the NT20S power is turned off.
214
Controlling the NT20S Status
Section 6-5
Screen Display Control
Format
[ESC]
P
m1
1B
50
* *
m1: Display on or off
0 (30H): on
1 (31H): off
Description
Turns off the backlighting.
Reference: S The screen is redisplayed if a touch switch is pressed.
S When a Display Specified Screen Command (page 204) is sent, the specified
screen is displayed.
Buzzer Control
Format
[ESC]
T
m1
1B
54
* *
m1: Buzzer status
0 (30H): Buzzer off
1 (31H): Continuous buzzer
2 (32H): Short intermittent buzzer
Description
Controls the NT20S buzzer.
Reference: The buzzer turned on with this command can be stopped with a Buzzer control
command, press the “buzzer stop” touch switch on the screen, or by displaying a
screen with no buzzer attributes.
System Menu Display Permission
Format
[ESC]
W
m1
1B
57
* *
m1: System menu display permission/inhibition
0 (30H): Display permitted
1 (31H): Display inhibited
215
Terminal Commands
Description
6-6
Section 6-6
System menu is displayed when “display permitted” is set, and from the system
menu, selection of transmit mode or maintenance mode is possible. If “display
inhibited” is set, the system menu is not displayed.
Turning off the power or resetting operation validates the settings made with the
DIP switch (SW2-3) on the NT20S.
Terminal Commands
This section describes the terminal commands used to display character strings or
graphics in accordance with instructions from the host, independently of the
screens registered in the NT20S.
Terminal commands designate screen attributes such as inversion, flashing, cursor position and size of characters before the characters are displayed.
Once screen attributes are set, they remain effective for screen displays until they
are cancelled or other attributes are set.
In addition, continuous lines and circles can be drawn.
Clear Screen
Format
Description
[ESC]
&
1B
26
Clears all text and graphics on the NT20S screen.
Reference: Even if this command is used to clear a screen, the NT20S still displays the preceding screens.
After the display of number, text, lamps or touch switches is upgraded, only the
upgraded parts are re-displayed.
216
Terminal Commands
Section 6-6
Character Specify Size
Format
[ESC]
)
m1
1B
29
* *
m1: Character size
0 (30H): Normal size, 16 x 8 dots (H x W)
1 (31H): 1/2 size, 8 x 8 dots (H x W)
Description
Specifies if 1-byte alphanumeric characters sent subsequently are displayed as
normal characters or 1/2-size characters.
Reference: The character string is specified with the Specify Displayed Characters Command
(refer to 6-6 Specify Displayed Characters). Both normal characters and 1/2-size
characters are enlarged as specified by the Specify Character Enlargement Command (refer to 6-6 Specify Character Enlargement below).
The character size specified with this command remains valid until the screen display is switched or another character size is specified with the command. The default character size is normal characters.
Specify Character Enlargement
Format
[ESC]
*
m1
1B
2A
* *
m1: Character enlargement
0 (30H): No enlargement
1 (31H): Enlarge height x 2
2 (32H): Enlarge width x 2
3 (33H): 2 x 2 enlargement
4 (34H): 3 x 3 times enlargement
5 (35H): 4 x 4 times enlargement
Description
All text and marks sent after this command are displayed in the specified size.
Reference: The character string is specified with the Specify Displayed Characters Command(refer to 6-6 Specify Displayed Characters).
The enlargement specified with this command remains valid until the screen display is switched or another enlargement is specified with the command. The default enlargement is no enlargement.
217
Terminal Commands
Section 6-6
Normal Display
Format
Description
[ESC]
!
1B
21
Cancels all display attribute settings(inverse, flashing, flashing inverse) for characters and marks so that all characters are displayed as “normal” characters (not
inverse or flashing).
Set Inverse Display
Format
Description
[ESC]
”
1B
22
Sets the display attribute to inverse so that all characters and marks sent subsequently are highlighted. Other attributes remain unchanged.
Reference: The Set Inverse Display Command is cancelled by the End Inverse Display Command or the Normal Display Command.
The setting with this command remains valid until the screen display is switched or
another display attribute setting is made. The default display attributes are set to a
normal display when a screen is initially displayed.
Use this command with the Set Flashing Display Command (refer 6-6 Set Flashing
Display) to produce a flashing inverse display.
End Inverse Display
Format
Description
[ESC]
#
1B
23
Clears the inverse display attribute so that all characters and marks sent subsequently are not highlighted. Other attributes remain unchanged.
Reference: The inverse display attribute is set with the Set Inverse Display Command.
The setting with this command remains valid until the screen display is switched or
another display attribute setting is made. The default display attributes are set to a
normal display when a screen is initially displayed.
218
Terminal Commands
Section 6-6
Set Flashing Display
Format
Description
[ESC]
$
1B
24
Sets the display attribute to flashing so that all characters and marks sent subsequently are displayed flashing. Other attributes remain unchanged.
Reference: The Set Flashing Display Command is cancelled by the End Flashing Display
Command or the Normal Display Command (refer to 6-6 Normal Display and 6-6
End Flashing Display).
The setting with this command remains valid until the screen display is switched or
another display attribute setting is made. The default display attributes are set to a
normal display when a screen is initially displayed.
Use this command with the Set Inverse Display Command (refer to 6-6 Set Inverse Display) to produce a flashing inverse display.
End Flashing Display
Format
Description
[ESC]
%
1B
25
Clears the flashing display attribute so that all characters and marks sent subsequently are not flashing. Other attributes remain unchanged.
Reference: The flashing display attribute is set with the Set Flashing Display Command.
The setting with this command remains valid until the screen display is switched or
another display attribute setting is made. The default display attributes are set to a
normal display when a screen is initially displayed.
219
Terminal Commands
Section 6-6
Set Cursor Position
Format
Description
[ESC]
+
x1
x2
x3
y1
y2
y3
1B
2B
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
x1x2x3:
X coordinate (3-digit BCD)
000 to 255
y1y2y3:
Y coordinate (3-digit BCD)
000 to 127
Before displaying a character string with the Terminal commands, use this command to set the bottom-left point of the first character to be displayed.
Reference: The cursor position set with this command is also the bottom-left point of the first
character displayed if the displayed characters are enlarged.
Specify Displayed Characters
Format
[ESC]
4
n1
n2
c1
c2
c3
cn
1B
34
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
n1n2: Character string length as a number of normal characters (2-digit hexadecimal)
01 to 20H (1 to 32)
c1c2c3 to cn: Character-string to display
Description
S The character string is displayed from the cursor position.
S The character-string data can contain a mixture of normal (alphanumeric) characters and marks. Refer to Appendix M Special Characters for details.
S The character string is displayed according to the enlargement and display attributes set with commands.
Reference: The character string continues on the next line if it cannot fit into a single line.
Set the position where the character string is displayed with the Set Cursor Position Command (refer to 6-6 Set Cursor Position).
220
Terminal Commands
Section 6-6
Draw Polyline
Format
[ESC]
7
m1
m2
x01
x02
x03
y01
y02
y03
1B
37
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
xn1
xn2
xn3
yn1
yn2
yn3
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
m1, m2:
Number of lines to draw (2-digit hexadecimal)
01 to 28H (1 to 40)
x01x02x03 to xn1xn2xn3: X coordinates of line end points (3-digit BCD)
000 to 255
y01y02y03 to yn1yn2yn3: Y coordinates of line end points (3-digit BCD)
000 to 127
Description
Draws the specified number of lines between the specified points.
Draw Circle
Format
Description
[ESC]
8
x1
x2
x3
y1
y2
y3
r1
r2
r3
1B
38
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
x1x2x3:
X coordinate of circle center (3-digit BCD)
000 to 255
y1y2y3:
Y coordinate of circle center (3-digit BCD)
000 to 127
r1r2r3:
circle radius in dots (3-digit BCD)
001 to 063
Draws a circle of the specified radius around the circle center point.
221
Key to Programs
6-7
Section 6-7
Key to Programs
The following programs include all the commands that can be used with the
NT20S.
6-7-1
Use of Programs
The sample program appears as follows on the screen.
Menu bar
Sub-menu
Parameter input column
Run confirm column
Send command column
Receive command
display column
Use the program as shown below.
Execute program
[ESC]
Interrupt display when
command received
[ESC]
[ESC]
Select type of send
command
Select send command
Main Menu
Sub-menu
Input parameter
Input parameter column
Confirm send command
Send command column,
confirm execution
Execute transfer
command
Up, Down, Left, Right keys: select item
[ENT]: confirm
[Esc]: stop
End program
1. This sample program is written in N88BASIC (86) (NEC) for a PC-9801
computer. Modify this program for use with any other computer language or computer such as an IBM PC/AT or compatible.
2. The interval between parameter input and command transmission is a
hold interval for interrupt processing of the received command. If an interrupt is permitted between the interval of parameter input and a command is received, all subsequent receive interrupts are displaced. If this
occurs, send an enquiry command to read all the accumulated receive
data.
3. When a parameter is input, no check is made that the parameter is in the
permitted range. Make sure that parameters are input within the permitted range.
222
EXAMPLE PROGRAM
Section 6-7
EXAMPLE PROGRAM
1000
1010
1020
1030
1040
1050
1060
1070
1080
1090
1100
1110
1120
1130
1140
1150
1160
1170
1180
1190
1200
1210
1220
1230
1240
1250
1260
1270
1280
1290
1300
1310
1320
1330
1340
1350
1360
1370
1380
1390
1400
1410
1420
1430
’ ********************************************************
’ * OPERATION COMMAND EXAMPLE PROGRAM (NT20S–ST128) *
’ ********************************************************
’ . ........................................... Draw screen frame
SECT=9
DIM CMND$(SECT,10,1),CMND(SECT),TS.B(31)
SCREEN 3:CLS 3:CONSOLE 15,10,0,0
LINE (0,176)–(639,176),7,,&HF0F0
LINE (159,0)–(159,176),7,,&HF0F0
LINE (300,0)–(300,176),7,,&HF0F0
LINE (0, 16)–(159, 16),7,,&HF0F0
LINE (0, 96)–(159, 96),7,,&HF0F0
LINE (0,112)–(159,112),7,,&HF0F0
LINE (520,176)–(520,224),7,,&HF0F0
LINE (0,223)–(639,224),7,B
COLOR 0:LOCATE 2,0:PRINT ”OPERATING COMMANDS”
COLOR 0:LOCATE 2,6:PRINT ”TERMINAL COMMANDS”
CMND(0)=SECT ’ . ........................... Set display character strings
FOR I=1 TO SECT
READ CMND$(0,I,0)
NEXT I
FOR I=1 TO SECT
READ CMND(I)
FOR J=1 TO CMND(I)
READ CMND$(I,J,0),CMND$(I,J,1)
IF CMND$(I,J,1) = ”@@@@@@” THEN CMND$(I,J,1) = ”[ESC]”+CHR$(&H22)
NEXT J
NEXT I
’
RY=15
ON COM(1) GOSUB *RECV ’ . ................. Set receive interrupt routine
OPEN ”COM1:E81NN” AS #1 ’ . .............. Open communication port
’ NT20S_SETTING OF ST128
’ DATA BIT LENGTH
8 BITS
’ STOP BIT LENGTH
1 BIT
’ PARITY
ODD
’ FLOW CONTROL
RS/CS
’ BAUD RATE
(VALUE SET BY SWITCH COMMAND)
COM(1) ON
’
*LV0 ’ . ..................................... Main Menu
LV=0:SECT.NO=0:SEL.NO=1
GOSUB *SELECT
IF SEL.NO=0 THEN GOTO *PRO.END
223
EXAMPLE PROGRAM
1440
1450
1460
1470
1480
1490
1500
1510
1520
1530
1540
1550
1560
1570
1580
1590
1600
1610
1620
1630
1640
1650
1660
1670
1680
1690
1700
1710
1720
1730
1740
1750
1760
1770
1780
1790
1800
1810
1820
1830
1840
1850
1860
1870
1880
1890
224
Section 6-7
SECT.NO = SEL.NO
’
*LV1 ’ . ..................................... Sub-menu
LV=1:SEL.NO=1
GOSUB *SELECT
IF SEL.NO=0 THEN GOTO *LV0
*LV2 ’ . ........................... Branch according to command (parameter input)
COM(1) STOP
LV=2:SEND$=CMND$(SECT.NO,SEL.NO,1)
*SECT1
IF SECT.NO<>1 THEN GOTO *SECT2
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.0,*ESC.X
*SECT2
IF SECT.NO<>2 THEN GOTO *SECT3
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.B,*ESC.C,*ESC.D,*ESC.2F
*SECT3
IF SECT.NO<>3 THEN GOTO *SECT4
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.K,*ESC.Q,*ESC.R
*SECT4
IF SECT.NO<>4 THEN GOTO *SECT5
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.U,*ESC.V
*SECT5
IF SECT.NO<>5 THEN GOTO *SECT6
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.P,*ESC.T,*ESC.W
*SECT6
IF SECT.NO<>6 THEN GOTO *SECT7
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.26,*ESC.29,*ESC.2A
*SECT7
IF SECT.NO<>7 THEN GOTO *SECT8
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.21,*ESC.22,*ESC.23,*ESC.24,*ESC.25
*SECT8
IF SECT.NO<>8 THEN GOTO *SECT9
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.2B,*ESC.4
*SECT9
IF SECT.NO<>9 THEN GOTO *LV2.END
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.7,*ESC.8
*LV2.END ’ . ................................ Confirm transmission
LOCATE 0,12:PRINT LEFT$(SEND$,56);
IF LEN(SEND$)>56 THEN PRINT ”...”
LOCATE 66,12:PRINT ”OK?”;
YN=1
*YN.KY.IN
LOCATE 74,12:COLOR 2+2*YN:PRINT ”Y”;:COLOR 2–2*YN:PRINT ”N”;
A$=INKEY$:IF A$=”” THEN GOTO *YN.KY.IN
IF A$=CHR$(&H1C) OR A$=CHR$(&H1D) THEN YN=YN*(–1):GOTO *YN.KY.IN
IF A$<>CHR$(&HD) THEN GOTO *YN.KY.IN
EXAMPLE PROGRAM
1900
1910
1920
1930
1940
1950
1960
1970
1980
1990
2000
2010
2020
2030
2040
2050
2060
2070
2080
2090
2100
2110
2120
2130
2140
2150
2160
2170
2180
2190
2200
2210
2220
2230
2240
2250
2260
2270
2280
2290
2300
2310
2320
2330
2340
2350
Section 6-7
LOCATE 66,12:COLOR 0:PRINT SPACE$(14);
IF YN=–1 THEN GOTO *LV3.END
GOSUB *SEND ’ . ............................. Send command
COM(1) ON
LOCATE 43,9:COLOR 4:PRINT ”Press ESC Key”;:COLOR 0
*SND.KY.IN
A$=INKEY$:IF A$<>CHR$(&H1B) THEN *SND.KY.IN
*LV3.END
LOCATE 0,12:PRINT SPACE$(79);
FOR I=0 TO 10
LOCATE 39,I:PRINT SPACE$(40);
NEXT I
GOTO *LV1 ’ . ............................... Return to Sub-menu
’
*PRO.END ’ . ................................ End routine
COM(1) OFF:CLOSE ’ . ....................... Close communication port
CONSOLE 0,25,0,1:CLS 3
END
’
*SEND ’ . .................................... Send command routine
SND$=CHR$(&H1B)+MID$(SEND$,6)
PRINT #1,SND$
RETURN
’
*RECV ’ . .................................... Receive interrupt routine
IF LOC(1)=0 THEN GOTO *NORCV
SX=POS(0):SY=CSRLIN
LINE INPUT #1,RCV$
LOCATE 0,RY:COLOR 0
PRINT ”[ESC]”;MID$(RCV$,2)
R.CODE$=MID$(RCV$,2,1)
*ESC.Y ’ . ................................... Notify screen number
IF R.CODE$<>”Y” THEN GOTO *ESC.E
PRINT ”Screen Number : ”;VAL(”&H”+MID$(RCV$,3,4))
PRINT:GOTO *RCV.END
*ESC.E ’ . ................................... Notify 4-digit number
IF R.CODE$<>”E” THEN GOTO *ESC.F
PRINT ”Numeral table # : ”;VAL(”&H”+MID$(RCV$,3,3))
PRINT ”Input decimal value”;VAL(MID$(RCV$,6,4))
PRINT:GOTO *RCV.END
*ESC.F ’ . ................................... Notify 8-digit number
IF R.CODE$<>”F” THEN GOTO *ESC.H
PRINT ”Numeral table # : ”;VAL(”&H”+MID$(RCV$,3,3))
IF MID$(RCV$,6,1)=”F” THEN NN=0–VAL(MID$(RCV$,7,7)) ELSE NN=VAL(MID$(RCV$,6,8))
PRINT ”Input decimal value : ”;NN
PRINT:GOTO *RCV.END
225
EXAMPLE PROGRAM
2360
2370
2380
2390
2400
2410
2420
2430
2440
2450
2460
2470
2480
2490
2500
2510
2520
2530
2540
2550
2560
2570
2580
2590
2600
2610
2620
2630
2640
2650
2660
2670
2680
2690
2700
2710
2720
2730
2740
2750
2760
2770
2780
2790
2800
2810
226
Section 6-7
*ESC.H ’ . ................................... Notify touch switch (number)
IF R.CODE$<>”H” THEN GOTO *ESC.J
PRINT ”Pressed touch switch number : ”;VAL(”&H”+MID$(RCV$,3,3))
PRINT:GOTO *RCV.END
*ESC.J ’ . ................................... Notify touch switch (bit)
IF R.CODE$<>”J” THEN GOTO *ESC.S
PRINT ”Pressed touch switch number : ”;
TS=0
FOR I=0 TO 13
S=VAL(”&H”+MID$(RCV$,3+I*2,2))
FOR J=0 TO 7
IF (S MOD 2)=1 THEN PRINT TS;” ”;
S=S¥2:TS=TS+1
NEXT J,I
PRINT:PRINT:GOTO *RCV.END
*ESC.S ’ . ................................... Notify lamp and touch switch status
IF R.CODE$<>”S” THEN GOTO *RCV.ERR
PRINT ”Lamp/touch switch number : ”;VAL(”&H”+MID$(RCV$,4,2))
M=VAL(MID$(RCV$,3,1))
IF M=0 THEN M$=”OFF” ELSE IF M=1 THEN M$=”ON” ELSE M$=”INVERSE”
PRINT ”Display status
: ”;M$
PRINT:GOTO *RCV.END
’
*RCV.ERR
PRINT ”Receive data error”
PRINT
’
*RCV.END
RY=CSRLIN
LOCATE SX,SY
*NORCV
RETURN
’
*ESC.0 ’ . ................................... Display specified screen
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”Screen number : ”,M
M$=RIGHT$(”000”+HEX$(M),4)
SEND$=SEND$+M$
RETURN
*ESC.X ’ . ................................... Screen # enquiry
RETURN
*ESC.B ’ . ................................... Write character screen
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”Character-screen memory table number : ”,M
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT ”Write character string (MAX 32 CHARACTERS) ––>”
LOCATE 43,2:INPUT C$
M$=RIGHT$(”0”+HEX$(M),2)
C$=LEFT$(C$,32):L$=RIGHT$(”0”+HEX$(LEN(C$)),2)
EXAMPLE PROGRAM
2820
2830
2840
2850
2860
2870
2880
2890
2900
2910
2920
2930
2940
2950
2960
2970
2980
2990
3000
3010
3020
3030
3040
3050
3060
3070
3080
3090
3100
3110
3120
3130
3140
3150
3160
3170
3180
3190
3200
3210
3220
3230
3240
3250
3260
3270
Section 6-7
SEND$=SEND$+L$+M$+C$
RETURN
*ESC.C ’ . ................................... Write 4-digit number
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”Numeral table #
: ”,M
*NAGAIN
LOCATE 43,1:INPUT ”Write 1 to 4-digit number : ”,N%
IF N%<–999 OR N%>9999 THEN GOTO *NAGAIN
IF N%<0 THEN S$=”F” ELSE S$=””
M$=RIGHT$(”00”+HEX$(M),3)
N%=ABS(N%)
N$=STR$(N%):N$=RIGHT$(N$,LEN(N$)–1)
IF S$<>”F” THEN N$=RIGHT$(”000”+N$=RIGHT$(”00”+N$,3)
SEND$=SEND$+M$+S$+N$
RETURN
*ESC.D ’ . ................................... Write 8-digit number
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”Numeral table #
: ”,M
*N8AGAIN
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT SPACE$(36)
LOCATE 43,1:INPUT ”Write 1 to 8-digit number : ”,N#
N#=INT(N#)
IF N#<–9999999# OR N#>99999999# THEN GOTO *N8AGAIN
IF N#<0 THEN S$=”F” ELSE S$=””
M$=RIGHT$(”00”+HEX$(M),3)
N#=ABS(N#)
N$=STR$(N#):N$=RIGHT$(N$,LEN(N$)–1)
IF S$<>”F” THEN N$=RIGHT$(”0000000”+N$,8) ELSE N$=RIGHT$(”000000”+N$,7)
SEND$=SEND$+M$+S$+N$
RETURN
*ESC.2F ’ . ................................. Copy memory table
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”0: character string/1 : number ”,M$
IF M$<>”0”AND M$<>”1” THEN *ESC.2F
LOCATE 43,1:INPUT ”Copy source memory table number : ”,S%
LOCATE 43,2:INPUT ”Copy destination memory table number : ”,D%
S$=STR$(S%):S$=RIGHT$(S$,LEN(S$)–1):S$=RIGHT$(”00”+S$,3)
D$=STR$(D%):D$=RIGHT$(D$,LEN(D$)–1):D$=RIGHT$(”00”+D$,3)
SEND$=SEND$+M$+S$+D$
RETURN
*ESC.K ’ . ................................ Display lamps and touch switches (bits)
FOR I=0 TO 31:TS.B(I)=–1:NEXT I
FOR I=0 TO 31
LOCATE 65–(I MOD 8)*3,I¥8:PRINT RIGHT$(STR$(I),2)
NEXT I
LOCATE 43,5:PRINT ”Input # : Inverse Input : Run input 99 : Execute”
*ESC.K.2
COLOR 0:LOCATE 43,6:PRINT SPACE$(36)
LOCATE 43,6:INPUT ”Lamp/touch switch number : ”;N
227
EXAMPLE PROGRAM
3280
3290
3300
3310
3320
3330
3340
3350
3360
3370
3380
3390
3400
3410
3420
3430
3440
3450
3460
3470
3480
3490
3500
3510
3520
3530
3540
3550
3560
3570
3580
3590
3600
3610
3620
3630
3640
3650
3660
3670
3680
3690
3700
3710
3720
3730
228
Section 6-7
IF N=99 THEN GOTO *ESC.K.3
IF N<0 OR N>31 THEN GOTO *ESC.K.2
TS.B(N)=TS.B(N)*(–1)
COLOR 2+TS.B(N)*2
LOCATE 65–(N MOD 8)*3,N¥8:PRINT RIGHT$(STR$(N),2)
GOTO *ESC.K.2
*ESC.K.3
FOR I=0 TO 3
M=0
FOR J=0 TO 7
IF TS.B(I*8+J)=1 THEN M=M+2^J
NEXT J
SEND$=SEND$+RIGHT$(”0”+HEX$(M),2)
NEXT I
COLOR 0
RETURN
*ESC.Q ’ . .............................. Display lamps and touch switches (number)
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT ”Display specification”
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT ” 0 : OFF”
LOCATE 43,2:PRINT ” 1 : ON”
LOCATE 43,3:PRINT ” 2 : Inverse flashing (lamps only)”
LOCATE 43,4:PRINT ” 3 : All ON”
*QAGAIN
LOCATE 43,5:INPUT ” : ”,M$
IF M$<>”0” AND M$<>”1” AND M$<>”2” AND M$<>”3” THEN GOTO *QAGAIN
LOCATE 43,6:INPUT ”Lamp/touch switch number : ”,N
N$=RIGHT$(”00”+HEX$(N),2)
SEND$=SEND$+M$+N$
RETURN
*ESC.R ’ . ................................... Enquire lamp and touch switch status
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”Lamp/touch switch number : ”,N
N$=RIGHT$(”00”+HEX$(N),2)
SEND$=SEND$+N$
RETURN
*ESC.U ’ . ................................... Disable inputs
SEND$=SEND$+”0”
RETURN
*ESC.V ’ . ................................... Enables inputs
SEND$=SEND$+”0”
RETURN
*ESC.P ’ . ................................... Display screen
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT ”Controlled item”
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT ” 0 : Display”
LOCATE 43,2:PRINT ” 1 : No display
*PAGAIN
LOCATE 43,3:INPUT ” : ”,M$
EXAMPLE PROGRAM
3740
3750
3760
3770
3780
3790
3800
3810
3820
3830
3840
3850
3860
3870
3880
3890
3900
3910
3920
3930
3940
3950
3960
3970
3980
3990
4000
4010
4020
4030
4040
4050
4060
4070
4080
4090
4100
4110
4120
4130
4140
4150
4160
4170
4180
4190
Section 6-7
IF M$<>”0” AND M$<>”1” THEN GOTO *PAGAIN
SEND$=SEND$+M$
RETURN
*ESC.T ’ . ................................... Buzzer control
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT ”Controlled item”
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT ” 0 : Stop buzzer”
LOCATE 43,2:PRINT ” 1 : Continuous buzzer”
LOCATE 43,3:PRINT ” 2 : Intermittent buzzer”
*TAGAIN
LOCATE 43,4:INPUT ” : ”,M$
IF M$<>”0” AND M$<>”1” AND M$<>”2” THEN GOTO *TAGAIN
SEND$=SEND$+M$
RETURN
*ESC.W ’ . ................................... System menu display
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT ”Controlled item”
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT ” 0:MENU TRANSFER ENABLE”
LOCATE 43,2:PRINT ” 1:MENU TRANSFER DISABLE”
*WAGAIN
LOCATE 43,3:INPUT ” : ”,M$
IF M$<>”0” AND M$<>”1” THEN GOTO *WAGAIN
SEND$=SEND$+M$
RETURN
’
*ESC.26 ’ . ................................. Clear screen
RETURN
*ESC.29 ’ . ................................. Specify 1-byte character
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT ”Character specify size”
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT ” 0 : NORMAL SIZE (16x8)”
LOCATE 43,2:PRINT ” 1 : HALF SIZE (8x8)”
*E26AGAIN
LOCATE 43,3:INPUT ” : ”,M$
IF M$<>”0” AND M$<>”1” THEN GOTO *E26AGAIN
SEND$=SEND$+M$
RETURN
*ESC.2A ’ . ................................. Specify character enlargement
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT ”Specify character enlargement”
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT ” 0:NO ENLARGEMENT”
LOCATE 43,2:PRINT ” 1:ENLARGE HEIGHT”
LOCATE 43,3:PRINT ” 2:ENLARGE WIDTH”
LOCATE 43,4:PRINT ” 3:2X2 ENLARGEMENT”
LOCATE 43,5:PRINT ” 4:3X3 TIMES ENLARGEMENT”
LOCATE 43,6:PRINT ” 5:4X4 TIMES ENLARGEMENT”
*E2AAGAIN
LOCATE 43,7:INPUT ” : ”,M$
IF M$=”0” OR M$=”1” OR M$=”2” THEN GOTO *E2ASEND
IF M$=”3” OR M$=”4” OR M$=”5” THEN GOTO *E2ASEND
229
EXAMPLE PROGRAM
4200
4210
4220
4230
4240
4250
4260
4270
4280
4290
4300
4310
4320
4330
4340
4350
4360
4370
4380
4390
4400
4410
4420
4430
4440
4450
4460
4470
4480
4490
4500
4510
4520
4530
4540
4550
4560
4570
4580
4590
4600
4610
4620
4630
4640
4650
230
Section 6-7
GOTO *E2AAGAIN
*E2ASEND
SEND$=SEND$+M$
RETURN
*ESC.21 ’ . ................................. Normal display
RETURN
*ESC.22 ’ . ................................. Set inverse display
RETURN
*ESC.23 ’ . ................................. End inverse display
RETURN
*ESC.24 ’ . ................................. Set flashing display
RETURN
*ESC.25 ’ . ................................. End flashing display
RETURN
*ESC.2B ’ . ................................. Set cursor position
*E2B.X
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT SPACE$(36)
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”X COORDINATE(000-255)”,BX
IF BX>639 OR BX<0 THEN *E2B.X
*E2B.Y
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT SPACE$(36)
LOCATE 43,1:INPUT ”Y COORDINATE(000–127)”,BY
IF BY>255 OR BY<0 THEN *E2B.Y
BX$=STR$(BX):BX$=RIGHT$(BX$,LEN(BX$)–1):BX$=RIGHT$(”00”+BX$,3)
BY$=STR$(BY):BY$=RIGHT$(BY$,LEN(BY$)–1):BY$=RIGHT$(”00”+BY$,3)
SEND$=SEND$+BX$+BY$
RETURN
*ESC.4 ’ . ................................... Specify Displayed Characters
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT ”Write character string (MAX. 32 CHARACTERS) ––>|”
LOCATE 43,1:INPUT C$
C$=LEFT$(C$,32):L$=RIGHT$(”0”+HEX$(LEN(C$)),2)
SEND$=SEND$+L$+C$
RETURN
*ESC.7 ’ . ................................... Draw Polyline
LN=0:SL$=””
*E7.X
LOCATE 41,8:PRINT SPACE$(38)
LOCATE 41,9:PRINT SPACE$(38)
LOCATE 41,8:INPUT ”X COORDINATE(END AT 999) : ”,LX
IF LX=999 THEN *E7.E
IF LX<0 OR LX>255 THEN GOTO *E7.X
*E7.Y
LOCATE 41,9:PRINT SPACE$(38)
LOCATE 41,9:INPUT ”Y COORDINATE : ”,LY
IF LY<0 OR LY>127 THEN GOTO *E7.Y
LX$=STR$(LX):LX$=RIGHT$(LX$,LEN(LX$)–1):LX$=RIGHT$(”00”+LX$,3)
EXAMPLE PROGRAM
4660
4670
4680
4690
4700
4710
4720
4730
4740
4750
4760
4770
4780
4790
4800
4810
4820
4830
4840
4850
4860
4870
4880
4890
4900
4910
4920
4930
4940
4950
4960
5970
5980
5990
5000
5010
5020
5030
5040
5050
5060
5070
5080
5090
5100
5110
Section 6-7
LY$=STR$(LY):LY$=RIGHT$(LY$,LEN(LY$)–1):LY$=RIGHT$(”00”+LY$,3)
LOCATE 39+(LN MOD 5)*8,LN¥5:PRINT LX$;”,”;LY$;
SL$=SL$+LX$+LY$
LN=LN+1
IF LN<40 THEN GOTO *E7.X
*E7.E
LN$=HEX$(LN–1):LN$=RIGHT$(”0”+LN$,2)
SEND$=SEND$+LN$+SL$
RETURN
*ESC.8 ’ . ................................... Draw circle
*E8.X
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT SPACE$(36)
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”X COORDINATE OF CENTER OF CIRCLE : ”,CX
IF CX>255 OR CX<0 THEN *E8.X
*E8.Y
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT SPACE$(36)
LOCATE 43,1:INPUT ”Y COORDINATE OF CENTER OF CIRCLE : ”,CY
IF CY>127 OR CY<0 THEN *E8.Y
*E8.R
LOCATE 43,2:PRINT SPACE$(36)
LOCATE 43,2:INPUT ”?????#####”,CR
IF CR>63 OR CR<0 THEN *E8.R
CX$=STR$(CX):CX$=RIGHT$(CX$,LEN(CX$)–1):CX$=RIGHT$(”00”+CX$,3)
CY$=STR$(CY):CY$=RIGHT$(CY$,LEN(CY$)–1):CY$=RIGHT$(”00”+CY$,3)
CR$=STR$(CR):CR$=RIGHT$(CR$,LEN(CR$)–1):CR$=RIGHT$(”00”+CR$,3)
SEND$=SEND$+CX$+CY$+CR$
RETURN
’
*SELECT ’ . ................................. Item selection routine
IF LV=0 THEN LX=3 ELSE LX=LV*20+1
IF LV=0 THEN LY=1 ELSE LY=0
COLOR 4:LOCATE LX,LY:PRINT CMND$(SECT.NO,1,0)
COLOR 0
FOR I=2 TO CMND(SECT.NO)
IF LV=0 AND I<=5
THEN LY=I
IF LV=0 AND I>5
THEN LY=I+1
IF LV=1
THEN LY=I–1
LOCATE LX,LY:PRINT CMND$(SECT.NO,I,0)
NEXT I
*KY.IN
A$=INKEY$:IF A$=””
THEN GOTO *KY.IN
IF A$<>CHR$(&H1B)
THEN GOTO *KY1
COLOR 0
FOR I=1 TO CMND(SECT.NO)
IF LV=0 AND I<=5 THEN LY=I
IF LV=0 AND I>5
THEN LY=I+1
231
EXAMPLE PROGRAM
5120
5130
5140
5150
5160
5170
5180
5190
5200
5210
5220
5230
5240
5250
5260
5270
5280
5290
5300
5310
5320
5330
5340
5350
5360
5370
5380
5390
5400
5410
5420
5430
5440
5450
5460
5470
5480
5490
5500
5510
5520
5530
5540
5550
5560
5570
232
Section 6-7
IF LV=1
THEN LY=I–1
LOCATE LX,LY:PRINT SPACE$(20)
NEXT I
SEL.NO=0
GOTO *SEL.RET
*KY1
IF A$<>CHR$(&H1E) AND A$<>CHR$(&H1F) THEN GOTO *KY2
IF LV=0 AND SEL.NO<=5
THEN LY=SEL.NO
IF LV=0 AND SEL.NO>5
THEN LY=SEL.NO+1
IF LV=1
THEN LY=SEL.NO–1
COLOR 0:LOCATE LX,LY:PRINT CMND$(SECT.NO,SEL.NO,0)
IF A$=CHR$(&H1E)
THEN SEL.NO=SEL.NO–1 ELSE SEL.NO=SEL.NO+1
IF SEL.NO=0
THEN SEL.NO=CMND(SECT.NO)
IF SEL.NO>CMND(SECT.NO) THEN SEL.NO=1
IF LV=0 AND SEL.NO<=5
THEN LY=SEL.NO
IF LV=0 AND SEL.NO>5
THEN LY=SEL.NO+1
IF LV=1
THEN LY=SEL.NO–1
COLOR 4:LOCATE LX,LY:PRINT CMND$(SECT.NO,SEL.NO,0)
GOTO *KY.IN
*KY2
IF A$<>CHR$(&HD) THEN GOTO *KY.IN
*SEL.RET
COLOR 0
RETURN
DATA ”SCREEN CONTROL”,”MEMORY TABLE OPERATION”,”LAMP, TOUCH SWITCH OPERATION”
DATA ”TOUCH SWITCH INPUT”,”SYSTEM CONTROL”,”CHARACTER SIZE”
DATA ”CHARACTER DISPLAY ATTRIBUTE”,”CHARACTER-STRING DISPLAY”,”FIGURE DISPLAY”
DATA 2
DATA ”Display specified screen”,”[ESC]0”
DATA ”Request screen number”,”[ESC]X”
DATA 4
DATA ”Write character-string memory table”,”[ESC]B”
DATA ”4-digit write numeral table”,”[ESC]C”
DATA ”8-digit write numeral table”,”[ESC]D”
DATA ”Copy memory table”,”[ESC]/”
DATA 3
DATA ”Lamp and touch switch display (bit specification)”,”[ESC]K”
DATA ”Lamp and touch switch display (address specification)”,”[ESC]Q”
DATA ”Lamp and touch switch display status enguiry”,”[ESC]R”
DATA 2
DATA ”Touch switch disable”,”[ESC]U”
DATA ”Touch switch enable”,”[ESC]V”
DATA 3
DATA ”Screen display control”,”[ESC]P”
DATA ”Buzzer control”,”[ESC]T”
DATA ”Mode Transition Enable”,”[ESC]W”
EXAMPLE PROGRAM
5580
5590
5600
5610
5620
5630
5640
5650
5660
5670
5680
5690
5700
5710
5720
5730
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
Section 6-7
3
”Clear screen”,”[ESC]&”
”Character specify size”,”[ESC])”
”Specify character enlargement”,”[ESC]*”
5
”Normal display”,”[ESC]!”
”Set inverse display”,”@@@@@@”
”End inverse display”,”[ESC]#”
”Set flashing display”,”[ESC]$”
”End flashing display”,”[ESC]%”
2
”Set cursor position”,”[ESC]+”
”Specify displayed characters”,”[ESC]4”
2
”Draw polyline”,”[ESC]7”
”Draw circle”,”[ESC]8”
233
234
SECTION 7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
This section describes the action to take when NT20S errors occur, and how to carry out maintenance and inspections to
prevent the occurrence of errors.
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
Hardware Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responding to Displayed Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1 Errors Occurring when the Power is Turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-2 Errors Occurring During Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-4 Communication Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance of the NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
236
237
237
237
237
237
239
241
235
Hardware Faults
7-1
Section 7-1
Hardware Faults
When a fault relating to the operation of the NT20S occurs, find the symptoms in
the table below and respond by following the corresponding “Remedy” indicated in
the table.
NT20S Symptoms
POWER LED fails to
come ON
Cause
Remedy
Power is not being supplied.
Check the connections and make sure that power is
supplied correctly.
(Refer to “2-2-3 Power Supply Connection”, page 29.)
Power supply fuse has blown
Contact your OMRON service center.
Nothing is displayed on
the screen (it is
completely white).
Screen #0 has been read at the host
side.
This is not an error. Change the screen number.
(Refer to “4-3 Screen Display”, page 122.)
Communication with the
support tool not possible.
The Transmit Mode has not been
established.
Display the system menu and select the Transmit
Mode.
(Refer to “3-6 Registering the Screen Data”, page 86.)
Not connected to the support tool.
Check the installation of the connector cable.
(Refer to “2-3 Connecting to the Support Tool”, page
31.)
The PT type/direct connection
settings made at the support tool do
not agree with the NT20S.
Make the PT type setting and direct connection setting
in the “tool settings” of the support tool agree with the
NT20S.
Memory switch settings do not
match.
Check the communication setting in the “Memory
Switch” menu of the Maintenance Mode, and match
the PC and NT20S settings.
(Refer to “3-5 Setting the Conditions of
Communications with the PC/Host by Using the
Memory Switches”, page 75.)
NT20S and PC are not correctly
connected.
Check that the type, length and installation of the
connector cable match the specifications.
(Refer to “2-4 Connection to a PC by the Host Link”,
page 32, “2-5 Connection to a PC by the NT Link”,
page 45, and “2-8 Host Connections by RS-232C”,
page 63.)
When NT link (1:N), there is unit
number duplication.
Set again with no duplication.
Power not supplied to the NT20S,
PC, or host
Check the power supply.
Buzzer sounds, RUN LED
is OFF.
Malfunction due to external noise.
Distance the communication cable from the source of
the noise and insert a noise filter in the power supply
line.
Touch panel does not
respond
Malfunction due to external noise
Distance the communication cable from the source of
the noise and insert a noise filter in the power supply
line.
Touch panel is broken.
Check the touch panel by performing the touch panel
test in the I/O check in the maintenance mode.
The NT20S changes the mode
during host link communication.
This is normal with the NT20S specification. When
using a PC that can also be connected using the NT
link, connect it with the NT link (the mode is not
changed when using the NT link).
Cannot communicate with
the PC/Host.
PC mode changes to
monitor mode.
236
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
7-2
Section 7-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
When the NT20S displays an error message, find the corresponding symptoms in
the appropriate table below and respond by following the “Remedy” indicated in
the table.
7-2-1
Errors Occurring when the Power is Turned ON
The table below shows the errors that can occur when the power supply to the
NT20S is turned ON, and their remedies.
Message
Cause
Remedy
Screen Data Corrupted
There is an error in the registered
screen data.
After initializing the screen data memory in the
Maintenance Mode, transmit the screen data once
more with the support tool.
Mark Data Corrupted
There is an error in the registered
mark data.
After initializing the screen data memory in the
Maintenance Mode, transmit the screen data once
more using the support tool.
No direct information is
set!
((NT20S-ST121-EV3/
ST122 V1)
ST122-V1)
The allocated words for the PT
status control area and PT status
notify area have not been set .
Use the support tool to set the head words of the PT
status control area and PT status notify area, and
transmit the screen data again.
There is no screen data.
Transmit screen data from the support tool.
7-2-2
Errors Occurring During Operation
The table below shows the errors that can occur during operation of the NT20S,
and their remedies.
Message
Cause
Remedy
Setting Error
Bits or words allocated to the PC
memory cannot be found in the
screen data.
Check the memory area in the PC used and correct
the bit and word allocations in the screen data.
QQ command is not
available
The PC cannot be connected to the
NT20S.
Select a type of PC that can be connected to the
NT20S.
7-2-3
Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization
The table below shows the errors that can occur when data is written to the NT20S
screen data memory, and their remedies.
Message
Initialization Error
7-2-4
Cause
Hardware fault or screen data
memory life reached
Remedy
If the same message is displayed even after executing
screen data memory initialization or screen data
transmission several times, contact your OMRON
service center.
Communication Errors
This section describes the errors relating to communication with the PC/Host that
can occur during operation, and their remedies.
S Operation when a communication error occurs
When a communication error occurs, the error message is displayed at the
NT20S, and the buzzer sounds. Error messages are displayed when the “Automatic Reset” memory switch is not set.
237
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
Section 7-2
Some error messages are displayed even if the “Automatic Reset” memory switch
is set.
S Procedure when a communication error occurs
When an error message is displayed, press the [EXIT] touch switch displayed on
the screen. The screen display will return to the RUN mode.
S Display of communication errors
As shown below, communication errors are displayed in the center of the screen,
together with a classification indicating whether they are receive or send errors.
[Screen when an error has occurred during reception]
RECEIVING ERROR
EXIT
<Error Description>
Parity Error
Overrun Error
Overflow Error
Framing Error
Buffer Overflow
Time Out
NAK Received
Unit No. Error
FCS Error
[Screen when an error has occurred during sending]
SENDING ERROR
EXIT
238
<Type of error>
Time Out
Maintenance of the NT20S
Message
Section 7-3
Cause
Remedy
(ACIA)
Parity Error
Framing Error
Overflow Error
Overrun
Communication parameters/
conditions of communications set
incorrectly.
Check whether the parity bit, frame length, baud rate,
stop bit length, and flow control settings of the PC
match the settings of the NT20S.
Noise caused data corruption during
communication.
Use a noise-resistant cable if communication occurs
in an environment with high levels of noise.
The connectors of the connecting
cable are not connected correctly.
Reconnect the cable.
Buffer Overflow
The NT20S receive buffer is full.
Lengthen the command transmission intervals. If this
error occurs frequently, set flow control for
communications.
Time Out
The connectors of the connecting
cable have become disconnected.
Reconnect the cable.
The PC is stopped.
Make sure the PC is able to communicate with the
NT20S.
During transmission of one
command a time lapse exceeding 5
command,
seconds is detected.
Confirm the proper command length.
NAK Received
(end code simultaneously
displayed)
Noise caused data corruption during
communication.
Use a noise-resistant cable if communication occurs
in an environment with high levels of noise.
Check the end code by referring to the PC user’s
manual.
Unit No. Error
The unit # does not match that set on Set the PC unit # to “0”.
the PC.
FCS Error
7-3
Reconnect the cable.
The PC is transmitting incorrect data.
Check PC operation.
Noise caused data corruption during
communication.
Use a noise-resistant cable if communication occurs
in an environment with high levels of noise.
The PC is transmitting incorrect data.
Check PC operation.
Noise caused data corruption during
communication.
Use a noise-resistant cable if communication occurs
in an environment with high levels of noise.
Maintenance of the NT20S
Carry out maintenance work in order to ensure that the NT20S is always used in its
optimum condition.
WARNING: Do not attempt to take the PC apart and do not touch any internal parts while the
power is being supplied. Doing either of these may result in electrical shock.
Spare PT
It is advisable to have a spare NT20S available to minimize system downtime in
the event of an NT20S failure or if the screen display becomes difficult to read due
to deterioration of the display unit.
Backlight
When the backlight in the display is getting dim and the screen cannot be read easily, replace the backlight. The backlight can be replaced at the rear of the NT20S
while it is mounted in an operation panel.
S Replaceable Backlight Model
NT20S-CFL01
239
Maintenance of the NT20S
Section 7-3
S Guide to Backlight Replacement
Under normal conditions it can be assumed that the backlight will need to replaced after about 20,000 hours. However, the life of the backlight does vary in
accordance with the environment in which it is used and it should be replaced
when it is getting dim and the screen is getting hard to read.
Replacing the Backlight
WARNING: Turn off the power before replacing the backlight. Otherwise you could sustain an
electric shock.
Operation 1. Switch the power to the NT20S off, remove the screw from the backlight replacement cover using a Philips screwdriver, and open the cover. Then disconnect the backlight connector from the NT20S.
2. Pull out the T-shaped backlight loading tool and replace the backlight.
3. Re-install the backlight and connect its connector to the NT20S.
Close the cover and tighten the screw with a flat-head screwdriver.
240
Inspection and Cleaning
7-4
Section 7-4
Inspection and Cleaning
Clean and inspect the NT20S regularly to ensure that it is always used in its optimum condition.
Cleaning Method
If the display is dirty the screen is difficult to see. Clean the screen from time to
time as follows.
S In daily cleaning, wipe the display with a soft dry cloth.
S If the soiling cannot be removed with a dry cloth, wet the cloth with water, wring it
out well and wipe the display with it.
S If rubber or vinyl products, tape, etc. are left stuck to the display for long periods
they will cause staining. If such items are stuck to the display, remove them during cleaning.
Note:
Inspection Method
Never use volatile solvents such as benzene or thinners, or dusters.
In normal environments, inspect the NT20S at intervals of between 6 months and
a year. In environments that are extremely hot and humid, or very dusty environments, shorten the inspection interval.
S Items required for the inspection
Prepare the following items before starting the inspection.
- The tools supplied with the NT20S
- Screwdrivers (Philips, flat-head)
- Tester (or digital voltmeter)
- Industrial alcohol
- 100% cotton cloth
- Hygrometer (required in some cases)
- Thermometer (required in some cases)
- Synchroscope (required in some cases)
- Pen-writing oscilloscope (required in some cases)
241
Inspection and Cleaning
Section 7-4
S Points inspected
Inspect the following points to determine if there is any divergence from the
stated criteria. If there is, either improve the surrounding environment so that
the values fall within the stated range, or adjust the NT20S.
Point Inspected
Inspection Details
Criterion
Inspection Instrument
Power supply voltage
Fluctuation in power supply
terminal voltage
Permissible voltage fluctuation
range
(24 VDC –15% +10%)
Tester
Ambient environmental
conditions
Ambient temperature
(temperature in the operation
panel)
0 to 50_C
Thermometer
Ambient humidity
(humidity in the operation
panel)
35% to 85%RH
Hygrometer
Presence/absence of dust
Dust must not be settled
Visual inspection
Looseness of mounting
brackets etc.
To be no looseness
Accessory tools
Connector connections of
connecting cable
To be fully inserted and locked,
with no looseness
Looseness of screws in
external wiring
To be no looseness
Philips screwdriver
Conditions of external
connecting cables
Faults such as incipient
disconnections.
Visual inspection
Brightness of the backlight
Must be sufficiently bright.
Backlight life:
Brightness is halved after
about 20,000 hours in use.
Visual inspection
Mounting conditions
Components with limited
lives
Note:
S Do not attempt to disassemble the NT20S for repair or modification.
S The disposal of the NT20S (and used backlights) may be regulated by national
or local authorities. Dispose of them in accordance with the laws and regulations
of the relevant country and local authority.
Reference: When replacing the NT20S after discovering a fault during inspections, note the
following points:
S Be sure to switch the power OFF before replacement.
S After replacement, check that the new NT20S is not subject to the same error.
S If a faulty unit is returned for repairs, write as detailed a description of the fault as
possible and send this description together with the unit to the OMRON address
indicated on the back cover of this book.
242
Specifications
Appendix A
APPENDIX A
Specifications
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Power supply voltage
24 VDC
Allowable power supply voltage range
20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC –15% +10%)
Power consumption
10 W max.
Inrush current
3 A max.
Ambient operating temperature
0 to +50_C (with no freezing)
Storage temperature
–20 to +70_C
Ambient operating humidity
35 to 85% RH (with no condensation)
Operating environment
No corrosive gases.
Resistance to electrostatic discharge
Level 3 (IEC801-2)
In air "8 kV, contact "6 kV, indirect "7 kV
Electromagnetic field strength
10 V/m (IEC801-3)
Fast transient/burst noise
Power supply line: 2 kV (IEC801-4)
I/O line: 0.25 kV
Damped oscillatory wave
Power supply line: 1 kV (IEC255-4)
Vibration resistance
10 to 22 Hz with 1.5 mm double amplitude for a total of 30 min. in X, Y, and Z
directions.
22 to 500 Hz with 1.5 G {14.7 m/s2} acceleration in X, Y, and Z directions.
Shock resistance
Durability: 30 G, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions.
Malfunction: 20 G, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions.
Dimensions (mm)
190 (W) x 110 (H) x 58 (D) mm
Weight
0.7 kg max.
Enclosure ratings
Front panel:
Equivalent to IP65 (front face waterproof construction).
Applicable standards
Rear case:
IP20
Terminals:
IP00
IEC1131-2 (1992)
EN50081-2 (1992)
243
Specifications
Appendix A
Performance Specifications
Display Specifications
Item
Specification
Dot matrix of STN
liquid crystal display
panell
Number of dots
(resolution)
128 dots (vertically) x 256 dots (horizontally) (dot size: 0.407 mm)
Effective display area
56 mm (vertically) x 112 mm (horizontally)
Display mode 1
Blue mode (NT20S-ST12j)
Monochrome mode (NT20S-ST16j)
View angle
Left/right direction: "35_
Life expectancy
50,000 hours minimum
Backlight
(white cold cathode
tube)
b )
Life expectancy
10,000 hours minimum
(average: 20,000 hours)2
Automatic turn-off
Can be set to turn off in 10 minutes or 1 hour, or to remain on.
Indicators
POWER indicator
(Green LED)
Lit while power is being supplied.
RUN indicator
(Green LED)
Lit during operation
1: The contrast in the monochrome mode is five times that in the blue mode.
2: This is the time it takes for the brightness to decline to half its original value under normal temperature and
humidity conditions.
Panel Specifications
Item
Touch panel
Specification
Number of switches: Max. 72 registerable per screen
(6 vertically x 12 horizontally)
Input:
Pressure-sensitive type
Operating force:
100 gf min.
Life expectancy: 1 million operations minimum
244
Specifications
Appendix A
Display Capacity
Specification
Item
Display
p y
elements
l
NT20S-ST128
Fixed character data (character strings registered for each screen)
Character string
displays
128 strings per file (32 bytes per string), 32 positions per screen
Numeral displays
50 positions per screen, 8-digit display
Graph displays
50 per screen
Graphic displays
Can be displayed wherever required
Lamps
128 per screen
Max. 256 strings per file
Touch switches
72 per screen
Max. 256 strings per file
Numeral
Screen types
yp
NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1
Character displays
settings
Display of set numerical values 50 per screen
Normal screen
Displays screens registered as normal.
Overlapping screens
A maximum of 8 registered screens can be displayed overlapped with each
other.
Continuous screens
A maximum of 8 screens can be displayed sequentially by scrolling.
(The screen can be changed by pressing the and touch switches)
Screen attributes
Buzzer, numeral setting
Max. number of registered screens
495
Screen registration method
Transfer screen data created using the support tool to the PT.
Screen saving method
(screen data memory)
Saved to flash memory (recording format unique to NT20S)
: Number of numeral memory tables that can be set (number used for numeral display + number used for graphs +
number used for numeral settings) x 128
Display Element Specifications
Item
Display
p y characters
Specification
Half-size characters (8 x 8 dots): Alphanumerics and symbols
Normal characters (8 x 16 dots): Alphanumerics and symbols
Marks (16 x 16 dots): User-defined pictographs
Enlargement function
Horizontal and vertical magnifications of double width,double height,4x, 9x, and
16x
Smoothing processing
Enlarged characters up to 4x
Character display attributes
Normal, inverse, flashing, inverse flashing
Graphics
Continuous straight lines, circles
Data Quantities
Item
Specification
NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1
NT20S-ST128
Strings
128 strings comprising 32 characters each
Numeral data
128 max. (8 digits each)
Marks
64 marks
Touch switches
No maximum restriction
Max. 256 strings per file
Lamps
No maximum restriction
Max. 256 strings per file
245
Specifications
Appendix A
Special Features
Item
Specification
Buzzer
Two types: Continuous sound and intermittent sound
Setting:
Set “key press sound” in the “Memory Switch” menu of the
Maintenance Mode ON.
If “ERR ON” is set the buzzer only sounds when an error occurs.
ON: The buzzer sounds on designation from the PC, when a screen with a
buzzer-ON specification is called, or on display of an error screen such
as for a receive error.
OFF: The buzzer is turned off on designation from the PC, by touch switch
input, or when a screen without a buzzer-ON specification is displayed.
Sound pressure: Min. 80 dB, average 87 dB (measured 10 cm from front face)
Maintenance functions
S Self-test for memory, switches, etc.
S Status setting confirmation for communications and other conditions.
S Simple communications confirmation.
Key input sound setting
0.2 second input sound when a touch switch is pressed
Setting: Set “key press sound” of the “Memory Switch” menu in the
Maintenance mode ON.
Communications Specifications
[For a Host Link] (NT20S-ST121-EV3)
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Baud rate: 9600, 19,200 bps
Data length: 7 bits
Stop bit:
2 bits
Parity:
Even
Connector
9-pin, D-SUB connector (female)
Number of units connected
1 to 1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m
Communications protocol
C-series SYSWAY (1:N)
[For an NT Link (1 to 1)] (NT20S-ST121-EV3)
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female)
Number of units connected
1 to 1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m
[For an NT Link (1:N)] (NT20S-ST121-EV3)
Item
Specification
Communications standard
EIA RS-232C
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female)
Number of units connected
1:1 to 8
Transmission distance
S RS-232C cable : Max. 2 m (*)
S RS-422A/485 cable : Total length 500 m (*)
(*) When NT-AL001 used
246
Specifications
Appendix A
[For RS-232C] (NT20S-ST128)
Item
Specification
Communication standard
EIA RS-232C
Communication settings
Start-stop synchronization
Baud rate: 2400/4800/9600/19200 (bps)
Data length: 7, 8 bits
Stop bit:
1, 2 bits
Parity:
Even/Odd/None
Flow control:RS/CS control
XON/XOFF control
None
Connector
9-pin D-SUB female
Number of units connected
1-to-1
Transmission distance
Max. 15 m
247
Dimensions
Appendix B
APPENDIX B
Dimensions
[Outside Dimensions]
178 (7.00)
RUN
100 (3.93)
110 (4.33)
POWER
4.5 (0.17)
58 (2.28)
190 (7.48)
[Dimensions for Installation]
124 (4.88)
Unit: mm (in.)
NT20S
Installation
fitting
15.5 (0.61)
140 (5.51)
Installation
panel
34 (1.34)
(min.)
38 (1.5)
(max.)
248
Unit: mm (in.)
Handling the RS-232C/RS-422 Converter Unit
Appendix C
APPENDIX C
Handling the RS-232C/RS-422A Converter Unit
This section shows the dimensions of the RS-232C/RS-422A converter unit (NT-AL001), and describes the methods for installing and removing it. Refer to this information when designing the control panel.
Dimensions
53.5
(2.11)
110
(4.33)
om Ron NT-AL001
74.5 (2.93)
100.2 (3.94)
105 (4.13) or less
4
(0.16)
[30]
(1.18)
45 (1.77)
30 (1.18)
Unit = mm (in.)
With RS-422A terminal block cover closed:
30 [1.18] (W) x 114 [4.49] (H) x 100.2 [3.94] (D) mm [in.]
With RS-422A terminal block cover open:
30 [1.18] (W) x 114 [4.49] (H) x 119.5 [4.7] (D) mm [in.]
Installation and Removal
The RS-232C/RS-422A converter unit (NT-AL001) is installed on a DIN rail or in an operation panel.
The RS-422A terminal block of the converter unit can easily be removed.
249
Handling the RS-232C/RS-422 Converter Unit
Appendix C
Installation on a DIN Rail
Hook the top part of the rear of the converter unit ((a) in the figure) onto the top edge of the DIN rail, and push the unit
in direction (b).
Then fit end plates on the right and left sides of the converter unit so that the unit cannot shift sideways.
(a)
(b)
Removal from the DIN Rail
Remove the end plates at right and left, then insert a flat-tipped screwdriver into the rail stopper on the bottom of the
unit and pry the unit away.
Installation in an Operation Panel
Make two screw holes in an operation panel wall at least 2 mm thick and secure the converter to the wall with screws.
30
(1.18)
110 (4.33)
100 (3.94)
21
(0.83)
Note:
250
2-M4
Unit = mm (in.)
In order to ensure a strong installation, the wall of the operation panel must be at least 2 mm thick.
NT20S Installation Environment
Appendix D
APPENDIX D
NT20S Installation Environment
When installing the PT in the operation panel, observe the following points. See also the section “Getting Starting”.
S The view angle of the LCD display screen is 40_. Install it at a position and height where operators will be able to
see it well.
Caution:
S Do not install at a site exposed to chemicals, steam, etc, or subject to excessive airborne dust.
S Do not install the unit at locations where the ambient temperature goes outside the range 0 to
50_C or where the relative humidity goes outside the range 35 to 85% RH.
If the ambient temperature exceeds the range indicated above, install a fan or an air conditioner.
S Do not install the unit directly above equipment that generates a lot of heat (heaters, transformers, large capacity resistors, etc.)
S Take the following points into account in order to prevent noise
1 Avoid installing the unit in panels in which high-voltage equipment is also installed.
2 Install the unit at a distance of at least 200 mm from power lines.
3 If the unit is installed next to equipment that generates a strong electric or magnetic field
(solenoids, etc.), provide a gap of at least 40 mm.
S Secure sufficient space for ventilation.
S Do not install in sites subject to severe vibration or strong shocks.
S Install at a distance from high-voltage devices and power equipment in consideration of operability and safety during maintenance.
Note:
S The angle of visibility of the LCD display screen is 35 degrees to left and right. Install it at a position,
height, and orientation that will make it easy for personnel to see it.
S Install the PT at a location as far as possible from personal computers, radio equipment, radios, etc. The
electromagnetic waves generated by the PT will cause radio interference.
S When using the RS-232C +5V output, check the current capacity of the connected equipment. The maximum current value of the NT20S +5 V output is 150 mA.
Transportation and Storage of the PT
Note on transportation
Pack the PT in the packaging intended for it before transporting it.
Note on storage
Maintain the storage ambient temperature (-20 to 70 _C) and storage ambient humidity (35 to 85% RH).
251
NT20S Internal Processing
Appendix E
APPENDIX E
NT20S Internal Processing
When the direct connection function is used, the following processing is executed inside the NT20S. Processing is
divided into two types: periodic processing and event processing.
Periodic Processing (When Using Direct Connection)
The following processing is executed inside the NT20S to enable high-speed control from the PC.
Usually, the only data read from the PC area the elements used for the currently displayed screen. Even if the contents of the PC words allocated to memory tables are changed, these contents are not updated at the PT unless the
memory table is used for the displayed screen.
[NT20S (PT) processing]
[Details of processing]
PT power ON
Initial processing
Hardware check, communication status check, etc., executed.
Operation start
Initial values written to the memory
tables
(PT ³ PC)
When the values registered in the NT20S are used as the initial
values in the memory tables, these values are written into the
allocated words of the PC.
(PT ³ PC)
In order to enable fast batch processing, the elements used in
the displayed screen are registered in the PC in advance.
Approximately 120 words can be registered per screen.
Screen switching
Screen element registration
Reading of registered
elements
252
(PT ² PC)
The statuses of the registered elements are read from the PC
and the display is changed.
Reading of elements
that could not be
registered.
(PT ² PC)
The status of the elements that were in excess of the registrable
number and could not be registered is read from the PC, and
the display is changed. This processing is continued until the
statuses of all the remaining elements has been read.
Reading of the
elements that could not
be registered.
(PT ² PC)
Reading the PT status
control area
(PT ² PC)
Reading of elements
that could not be
registered
(PT ² PC)
Reading of elements
that could not be
registered
(PT ² PC)
Reading of the PT
status control area
(PT ² PC)
If the number of elements that could not be registered is large,
the PT status control area is read after every two element
readings.
: Processing performed if necessary
NT20S Internal Processing
Appendix E
S Number of words for screen element registration
The number of words used for screen element registration is as follows.
Allocated words: Number of words
Allocated bits : Number of words calculated by summing the number of bits in
each area and taking 1 word to be 16 bits.
[Example]
Character string memory tables : 3 of 12 allocated words each
Numeral memory tables
: 4 of 2 allocated words each
Allocated bits for control
: 19 I/O relays, 7 link relays (contiguous bits)
The number of words assigned to character string memory tables and numeral
memory tables is as follows:
12 words X 3 + 2 words X 4 = 44 words
The assignment for bits is as follows:
19 I/O relays B 16 = 1 word with a remainder of 3 bits ³ 2 words
7 link relays B 16 = 0 words with a remainder of 7 bits ³ 1 word
The total is therefore 44 words + 2 words + 1 word = 47 words
Elements occupying up to approximately 120 words, calculated in this way, can be
registered. If the number of elements is larger than this, internal processing is increased in proportion to the excess number and this generates a delay in processing.
If the point where the registrable quantity is exceeded is in the middle of an element that spans several words (for example a character string memory table), registration is quit without registering that element.
S Order of priority for registration
Elements are registered in the following order of priority according to their type.
(1) Allocated words of the PT status control area
(2) Allocated bits for control (lamps, touch switches)
(3) Allocated words of numeral memory tables
(4) Allocated words of character string memory tables
If there is more than one element for each of (2) through (4), the elements are registered in accordance with the following priority of word and bit areas:
(1) Data memory (DM)
(2) I/O relays (CH)
(3) Timers (TIM)
(4) Counters (CNT)
(5) Holding relays (HR)
(6) Auxiliary relays (AR)
Within each area, words and bits are allocated from the smallest number up.
253
NT20S Internal Processing
Appendix E
Event Processing (When Using Direct Connection)
When the status of the NT20S changes during operation, the processing for writing the changed data to the relevant
area of the PC memory is executed.
This kind of processing is only executed when statuses change. When changes occur simultaneously, the processings are executed in accordance with the order of priority.
[NT20S processing]
Order of priority
High
Low
[Details of processing]
Writing to PT status notify area
(PT ³ PC)
Writing to the PT status notify area in order to inform the PC
of changes in the PT operation status.
Bit writing
(PT ³ PC)
Updating the contents of words allocated to the PC when the
value in a numeral memory table has changed.
Writing to numeral memory tables
(PT ³ PC)
Updating the contents of words allocated to the PC when the
contents of a character string memory table have changed.
Writing to character string memory tables
(PT ³ PC)
Writing to bits in order to inform the PC of touch switch
statuses.
Data is only written to PC bits and numeral/character string memory tables for elements in screens currently being
displayed. If the contents of numeral/character string memory tables that are not being displayed change, the
changed data is not written to the PC.
254
Function Restrictions Depending on the Support Tool
Appendix F
APPENDIX F
Function Restrictions Depending on the Support Tool
Screens can be created for an NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST122-V1 by using the conventional support tools indicated below.
S NT series NT20M/NT2000M/NT600M support tool (Ver.4.j)
In addition, the NT series support tool (Ver.2.j) can be used with Ver.4 of the direct connection function.
However, when the above support tools are used or Ver.4 direct connection is used, restrictions apply to some functions, as shown in the table below.
The expressions used for support tools in the table have the following meanings.
NTM V4 : NT series NT20M/NT2000M/NT600M support tool (Ver.4.j)
NT V2 : NT series support tool (Ver.2.j)
Support Tool
NT Model
Direct Connection
Communication Mode
Support Tool
Mode
(NT20S
memory switch)
NTM V4
NT20M
OMRON
– (Standard)
NT20M
NT20M
Ver. 4
Standard
NT20M
NT20S
Ver. 4
Standard/High-speed
NT20S
NT20S
Ver. 5
Standard/High-speed
NT20S
NT V2
Restrictions
Max. 250 screens, Thumbwheel numeral settings not
possible, no upper/lower limits,
hexadecimal input not possible, indirect specification not
possible, touch switch input nono
tification fixed as “momentary”,
data transmission in screen
units not possible.
No restriction
The NT20S cannot be used with combinations of support tools and settings other than those indicated above.
Reference: The NT20S-ST128 can be used in the same way with the NT series support tool (Ver.2.j). The necessary support tool and “Support Tool Mode” (NT20S memory switch) settings in this case are as follows:
NT Model
: NT20S
Direct setting
: No
Communication mode : Standard/High-speed
Support Tool Mode
: NT20S
255
Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host
Appendix G
APPENDIX G
Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host
Explained below is the method for making the cable that connects the NT20S-ST121-EV3/ST128 with the PC.
Connect the wires to the connectors in accordance with the connector specification for each unit.
Parts Required
Two connectors, two connector covers and one cable are required to make up a connecting cable. One connector
and one connector cover is supplied with most PCs.
The parts supplied with each unit are indicated in the table below.
Name
Connector
Connector cover
Model
Delivered with
Remarks
XM2A-0901
C series CQM1
CVM1/CV series CPU unit
CV500-LK201
9-pin, manufactured by OMRON
XM2A-2501
C500-LK203
C500-LK201
C200H-LK201
25-pin, manufactured by OMRON
DB-25P
C500-LK201-V1
C120-LK201-V1
25-pin, manufactured by JAE
XM2S-0911
C series CQM1
CVM1/CV series CPU unit
CV500-LK201
9-pin, manufactured by OMRON
XM2S-2511
C500-LK203
C500-LK201
C200H-LK201
25-pin, made by OMRON
DB-C2-J9
C500-LK201-V1
C120-LK201-V1
25-pin, made by JAE
When connecting the NT20S to a CjjH PC manufactured by OMRON, the connector and connector hood must
be prepared separately since they are not supplied with the CjjH.
The connector provided in the CPU unit of the CjjH is a 9-pin connector. For the connection, the following connector and connector hood should be prepared.
S Connector
: XM2A-0901 (9-pin, OMRON)
S Connector cover : XM2S-0911 (9-pin, OMRON)
Use the cable recommended by OMRON.
The recommended cables are indicated in the table below.
Name
Cable
256
Model
Remark
AWG28 5P
IFVV-SB
Multiconductor shielded cable (FUJIKURA, Ltd.)
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P 28AWG
Multiconductor shielded cable (HITACHI Cable, Ltd.)
Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host
Appendix G
Connector Specifications and Wiring for OMRON Units
The combination of pin numbers to which the connecting wires are connected differs according to the connector
specifications for each unit. Check the connector specifications of the unit to be connected and make the wiring
connections for the items in the connection combination indicated below which are applicable.
[NT20S Connector Specifications (9-pin)]
S Electrical characteristics:
Complies with EIA RS-232C
S Signal direction:
Signal input and output is relative to NT20S.
1
6
9
5
Correct Use:
Connector
Pin No.
Signal Name
Abbreviation
2
Send data
SD (TXD)
3
Receive data
RD (RXD)
4
Request to send
RS (RTS)
5
Clear to send
CS (CTS)
6
+5 V output, 150 mA max.
+5V
9
Signal ground
SG
Signal Direction
Input
Output
f
f
f
f
f
–
–
If using the +5 V supply of pin No.6, check first that the equipment that is to receive the supply has a
current capacity no greater than 150 mA. The +5 V output of the NT20S is +5 V"5%, max. 150
mA.
Connecting an NT20S to a C-Series Host Link
S C-Series Host Link Unit 25-pin Connector Specifications
Applicable Host Link Unit:
C200H-LK201(-V1)
C500-LK201-V1
C500-LK203
C120-LK201-V1
S Electrical characteristics:
Complies with EIA RS-232C
S Signal direction:
Signal input and output is relative to the PC.
1
13
14
25
Connector
Pin No.
Signal Name
Abbreviation
Signal Direction
Input
Output
–
–
1
Frame ground
FG
2
Send data
SD (TXD)
3
Receive data
RD (RXD)
4
Request to send
RS (RTS)
5
Clear to send
CS (CTS)
f
7
Signal ground
SG (GND)
–
–
14
Optical connector +5V (see note 2)
+5V
–
–
15
Send signal element timing 2 (see note 1)
ST2
f
17
Receive signal element timing
(see note 1)
RT
f
20
Data terminal ready
ER (DTR)
f
24
Data signal element timing (see note 1)
ST1
f
Note
f
f
f
1. No element timing signals on C200H-LK201(-V1)
2. C500-LK201 and C200H-LK201(-V1) only
257
Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host
Appendix G
S Wiring Connections
The NT20S does not use pin 4 (RS) or pin 5 (CS). Either short the RS and CS pins of the PC connector together or
set the CTS setting selector switch at the rear face of the host link unit to “0V” (see in the figure).
Connect the cable shielding wire to the connector cover and pin 1 at the host link unit end of the cable only.
NT20S
PC (host link unit)
Abbreviatioon
RS-232C
interface
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
Pin
number
Pin
number
Abbreviatioon
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
–
–
–
–
20
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
–
SG
–
–
–
–
–
ER
Shielding
wire
RS-232C
interface
25-pin connector
Connecting an NT20S to a C-Series CPU (CjjH)
S C-Series CPU Unit (CjjH) 9-pin Connector Specifications
S Applicable CPU:
C20H/C28H/C40H/C60H
S Electrical characteristics:
Complies with EIA RS-232C
S Signal direction:
Signal input and output is relative to the PC.
1
5
258
6
9
Connector
Pin No.
Signal Name
Abbreviation
Signal Direction
Input
1
Frame ground
FG
2
Send data
SD (TXD)
–
3
Receive data
RD (RXD)
4
Request to send
RS (RTS)
5
Clear to send
CS (CTS)
f
7
Signal ground
SG (GND)
–
Output
–
f
f
f
–
Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host
Appendix G
S Wiring Connections
The NT20S does not use pin 4 (RS) or pin 5 (CS). Short the RS and CS pins of the PC connector together (see in
the figure).
Connect the cable shielding wire to the connector cover and pin 1 at both the NT20S and CPU ends of the cable.
NT20S
PC CPU
RS-232C
interface
Abbreviatioon
Pin
number
SD
RD
RS
CS
–
–
–
SG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pin
number
Abbreviatioon
1
FG
2
SD
3
RD
4
RS
5
CS
6
–
7
SG
–
–
–
–
9-pin connector
Shielding
wire
RS-232C
interface
Connecting an NT20S to a CVM1/CV-Series Host Link Unit
S CVM1/CV-Series Host Link Unit Connector Specifications
S Applicable host link unit:
CV500-LK201
S Electrical characteristics:
Complies with EIA RS-232C
S Signal direction:
Signal input and output is relative to the PC.
Communication Port 1 (25-pin Connector)
1
13
14
25
Connector Pin
No.
Signal Name
Abbreviation
Signal Direction
Input
Output
Connector cover
Frame ground
FG
–
–
1
Frame ground
FG
–
2
Send data
SD (TXD)
3
Receive data
RD (RXD)
4
Request to send
RS (RTS)
5
Clear to send
CS (CTS)
7
Signal ground
SG (GND)
–
8
Carrier detected
CD (DCD)
f
14
Optical connector +5V
+5V
–
20
Data terminal ready
ER (DTR)
–
f
f
f
f
–
f
f
Communication Port 2 (9-pin Connector)
1
6
Connector
Pin No.
9
Abbreviation
Signal Direction
Input
Frame ground
FG
2
Send data
SD (TXD)
3
Receive data
RD (RXD)
4
Request to send
RS (RTS)
5
Clear to send
CS (CTS)
f
9
Signal ground
SG (GND)
–
Connector cover
5
Signal Name
–
Output
–
f
f
f
–
259
Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host
Appendix G
S Wiring Connections
CVM1/CV-series host link units have two types of connector, which must be wired differently.
The NT20S does not use pin 4 (RS) or pin 5 (CS). Either short the RS and CS pins of the PC connector together or
set the CTS setting selector switch at the rear face of the host link unit to “0V” (see in the figure).
Connect the cable shielding wire to the connector cover and pin 1 at the host link unit end of the cable only.
Communication Port 1 (25-pin Connector)
NT20S
RS-232C
interface
PC (host link unit)
Abbreviatioon
Pin
number
Pin
number
Abbreviatioon
SD
RD
RS
CS
–
–
–
SG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
–
–
–
–
20
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
–
SG
–
–
–
–
–
ER
Shielding
wire
RS-232C
interface
25-pin connector
Communication Port 2 (9-pin Connector)
NT20S
PC (host link unit)
Abbreviatioon
RS-232C
interface
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
Pin
number
Pin
number
Connector
cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
–
9
Abbreviatioon
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
–
CD
–
SG
9-pin connector
Shielding
wire
260
RS-232C
interface
Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host
Appendix G
Connecting an NT20S to a C-Series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE, CPM1, CQM1, CVM1/CV-Series (-EVj)CPU
S C-Series C200HX/HG/HE, CPM1, CQM1, CVM1/CV-Series (-EVj) CPU Unit 9-pin Connector Specifications
Applicable CPU:
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-E
CQM1-CPU42-E
CQM1-CPU43-E
CQM1-CPU44-E
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
Note:
CV2000-CPU01-EVj
CVM1-CPU01-EVj
CVM1-CPU11-EVj
CVM1-CPU21-EVj
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU32-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HG-CPU33-E
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU53-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HX-CPU34-E
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU54-E
C200HX-CPU64-E
The host link function incorporated in CV/CVM1 CPUs (with the exception of -EVj) cannot be used.
S Electrical characteristics:
Complies with EIA RS-232C
S Signal direction:
Signal input and output is relative to the PC.
1
6
Connector
Pin No.
9
Signal Direction
Input
Frame ground
FG
2
Send data
SD (TXD)
3
Receive data
RD (RXD)
4
Request to send
RS (RTS)
5
Clear to send
CS (CTS)
f
9
Signal ground
SG (GND)
–
Connector cover
5
Abbreviation
Signal Name
–
Output
–
f
f
f
–
S Wiring Connections
The NT20S does not use pin 4 (RS) or pin 5 (CS). Either short the RS and CS pins of the PC connector together or
set the CTS setting selector switch at the rear face of the host link unit to “0V” (see in the figure).
NT20S
RS-232C
interface
PC (host link unit)
Abbreviatioon
Pin
number
SD
RD
RS
CS
–
–
–
SG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pin
number
Connector
cover
2
3
4
5
–
–
–
9
Abbreviatioon
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
–
–
–
SG
RS-232C
interface
9-pin connector
Shielding
wire
261
Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host
Appendix G
Connecting an NT20S to an RS-232C/422A Converter Unit (NT-AL001)
Connecting an RS-232C/422A converter unit enables the transmission distance to be made greater than 15 m (up
to 500 m).
NT-AL001
Host
NT20S
RS-232C
RS-422A
Max. 2 m
Max. 500 m
Reference: When connecting the C200HX/HG/HE and an RS-232C/RS-422A converter unit, use a converter unit
whose lot number is 15Y5 or later. Converter units of lot numbers previous to 15Y5 cannot be connected.
NT-AL001 RS-232C connector specifications (9-pin type)
Electrical characteristics: Comply with EIA RS-232C
Signal direction:
Signal input and output is relative to the NT-AL001
1
6
Connector
Pin No.
9
Abbreviation
Signal Direction
Input
Output
–
–
Frame ground
FG
2
Send data
SD (TXD)
3
Receive data
RD (RXD)
4
Request to send
RS (RTS)
5
Clear to send
CS (CTS)
f
6
+5 V input
+5V
f
9
Signal ground
SG (GND)
–
Connector cover
5
Signal Name
f
f
f
–
NT-AL001 RS-422A terminal block specifications
Connected terminal block: RS-422A terminal block (M3 screws)
Electrical characteristics: Comply with EIA RS-422A
Signal direction:
Signal input and output direction is relative to the NT-AL001
Terminal No.
No
7
5
3
1
262
Signal Name
Abbreviation
Signal Direction
Input
Output
–
1
Frame ground
FG
–
8
2
Signal ground
SG
–
6
4
3
Send data (+)
SDB
4
Send data (–)
SDA
5
Receive data (+)
RDB
f
6
Receive data (–)
RDA
f
7
Request to send (+)
CSB
f
8
Request to send (–)
CSA
f
2
–
f
f
Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host
Appendix G
Wiring method
NT-AL001
NT20S
Abbreviation
RS-232C
interface
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
–
–
SG
9-pin
RS-232C
Pin No.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Abbreviation
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
DSR
ER
SG
9-pin
Abbreviation
RS-232C
interface
Terminal
No.
FG
SG
SDB
RS-422A
SDA
interface
RDB
RDA
CSB
CSA
Terminal block
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RS-422A
HOST
Signal bame
Frame ground
Signal ground
Receive data(+)
Receive data(–)
Send data(+)
Send data(–)
RS-422A
interface
263
Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host
Appendix G
Preparing RS-232C Connector Cables
Prepare a connector cable to connect a NT20S to a Host separated by more than 5 m so that the standard connector
cable cannot be used. The maximum cable length is 15 m.
Recommended Parts
Name
Model
Remarks
Connector
(NT20S)
XM2A-0901
9-pin, manufactured by OMRON
Connector cover
(NT20S)
XM2S-0911
9-pin, manufactured by OMRON
Cable
AWG28X5P
IFVV-SB
Multicore cable, manufactured by Fujikura, Ltd.
CO-MA-VV-SB
5PX28AWG
Multicore cable, manufactured by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
On the other end of the cable use the type of connector and connector cover which matches the host computer
connector type.
Connection For Host
The shielding wire of the cable is connected at the host side only, to the connector
cover and pin No.1.
The figure below shows the wiring when RS/CS control is used. If RS/CS control is
not used, short RS and CS at both the NT20S side and host side.
NT20S
RS-232C
interface
HOST
Abbreviation
Pin
number
Pin
number
Abbreviation
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
–
–
–
SG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
–
–
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
–
SG
–
–
Shielding
wire
(25-pin type)
264
RS-232C
interface
Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host
Appendix G
Making the Cable
The procedure to make up the cable is described below.
Refer to the following explanation when making an RS-422A cable also.
Cable Preparation
The preparation of the cable differs according to whether or not the shielding wire is to be connected to the FG.
S Cable with Shielding Wire Connected to FG
(1) Cut the cable to the required length.
(2) Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the shielding
underneath.
(3) Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
(4) Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
(5) Fold back the shielding wire.
(6) Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded-back shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40(1.57)(RS-232C)
25(RS-422A)
(3)
10(0.39)
(4)
5(0.19)
(5)
(6)
[Units: mm (in.)]
Aluminum foil tape
265
Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host
Appendix G
S Cable with Shielding Wire Not Connected to FG
(1) Cut the cable to the required length.
(2) Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the shielding
underneath.
(3) Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
(4) Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
(5) Wrap vinyl tape over the cut off end of the shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40(1.57)(RS-232C)
25(RS-422A)
(3)
(4)
5(0.19)
(5)
[Units: mm (in.)]
266
Vinyl tape
Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host
Appendix G
Soldering
(1) Slide heat-shrink tube over each wire.
(2) Pre-solder each wire and connector cable.
(3) Solder each wire to the connector terminal.
Soldering iron
Heat-shrink tube
(Hishitube F, 1.5 dia, l = 10)
(4) Push the heat-shrink tube over the soldered joint and heat the tube to shrink it in place.
Heat-shrink tube
Connector Cover Assembly
Assemble the connector covers as shown in the diagram below.
Aluminum foil tape
End connected to FG
End not connected to FG
267
Making the cable for Connection to the Support Tool
Appendix H
APPENDIX H
Making the Cable for Connection to the Support Tool
The wiring to be done depends on the type of RS-232C connector at the personal computer.
S For a 25-pin connector
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
20
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
SG
CD
ER
SD
RD
Personal
computer
RS
CS
SG
FG
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
7
9
1
Shielding
wire
1
SD
RD
RS
Peripheral device
connector on PT
body
CS
SG
FG
When making the connecting cable, use the following recommended parts.
Name
Model
Connector
Connector cover
Cable
Remarks
XM2A-2501
25-pin, manufactured by OMRON (personal computer side)
XM2A-0901
9-pin, manufactured by OMRON (PT side)
XM2S-2511
25-pin, manufactured by OMRON (personal computer side)
XM2S-0911
9-pin, manufactured by OMRON (PT side)
AWG285P
IFVV-SB
Multiconductor shielded cable (FUJIKURA, Ltd.)
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P28AWG
Multiconductor shielded cable (HITACHI Cable, Ltd.)
S For a 9-pin connector
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CD
RD
SD
DTR
SG
DR
RS
CS
RD
SD
Personal
computer
RS
CS
SG
2
2
3
3
7
4
8
5
5
9
Shielding
wire
1
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
FG
When making the connecting cable, use the following recommended parts.
Name
Connector
Connector cover
Cable
268
Model
Remarks
XM2D-0901
9-pin, manufactured by OMRON (personal computer side)
XM2A-0901
9-pin, manufactured by OMRON (PT side)
XM2S-0911
9-pin, manufactured by OMRON (two)
AWG285P
IFVV-SB
Multiconductor shielded cable (FUJIKURA, Ltd.)
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P28AWG
Multiconductor shielded cable (HITACHI Cable, Ltd.)
Peripheral device
connector on PT
body
Connecting to an RS-232C/RS-422A Converter Unit (1:1)
Appendix I
APPENDIX I
Connecting to an RS-232C/RS-422A Converter Unit (1:1)
By using an RS-232C/RS-422A converter unit (NT-AL001), RS-232C can be converted to RS-422A, allowing longdistance communication of up to 500 m.
Connection Method
OMRON PC
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-422A cable
(max. 500 m)
RS-232C/RS-422A
converter unit,
type NT-AL001
RS-232C cable
(max. 2 m)
NT20S
Wiring
S Wiring of RS-232C cable
PT or PC
Abbrev.
RS-232C
interface
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
SG
NT-AL001
Pin No.
Pin No.
Connector
cover
Connector
cover
2
3
4
5
6
9
2
3
4
5
6
9
The pin numbers are the numbers at the NT20S.
For the pin numbers at the PC, refer to the manual
for the PC used.
Shielding
wire
Abbrev.
SD
RD
RS
CS
+5V
SG
RS-232C
interface
Only connected at PC
269
Connecting to an RS-232C/RS-422A Converter Unit (1:1)
Appendix I
S RS-422A Cable Wiring
NT-AL001
RS-422A
terminal
block
NT-AL001
Abbrev.
Pin No.
Pin No.
Abbrev.
FG
SDA
SDB
RDA
RDB
1
3
4
5
6
1
3
4
5
6
FG
SDA
SDB
RDA
RDB
Shielding
wire
DIP Switch Settings at RS-232C/RS-422A Converter Unit
270
RS-422A
terminal
block
Model List
Appendix J
APPENDIX J
Model List
PT
Model
Specification
NT20S-ST121-EV3
NT20S-ST121B-EV3
Host link/NT link Blue mode display
(Beige)
(Black)
NT20S-ST161-EV3
NT20S-ST161B-EV3
Host link/NT link Monochrome mode display
(Beige)
(Black)
NT20S-ST122-V1
NT20S-ST122B-V1
C200H direct communication
(Beige)
(Black)
NT20S-ST128
NT20S-ST128B
RS-232C
Blue mode display
(Beige)
(Black)
NT20S-ST168
NT20S-ST168B
RS-232C
Monochrome mode display
(Beige)
(Black)
Host Link Unit
Model
Specification
Applicable PC
C120-LK201-V1
S Features a connector for RS-232C connections
S Type mounted to a CPU
C-series
C120
C200H
C500(F)
C1000H
C2000(H)
C200H-LK201(-V1)
S Features a connector for RS-232C connections
S Type mounted to C200H base
C-series
C200H(S)/HE/HG/HX
C500-LK201-V1
Features a connector for RS-232C/RS-422A connections
(switchable type).
C500-LK203
Type mounted to C500 base
CV500-LK201
S Features a connector for RS-232C connections and a
connector for RS-232C/RS422A connections
(switchable type).
S Type mounted to base for CVM1/CV use.
C-series
C500(F)
( )
C1000H
C2000(H)
CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
271
Model List
Appendix J
CPUs (For Connection Via a Host Link)
Model
Specification
PC Type
C20H/C28H/C40H/C60H
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
C20H
C28H
C40H
C60H
CPM1-10CDR-j
CPM1-20CDR-j
CPM1-30CDR-j
Connect an RS-232C adapter to the peripheral port.
C-series
CPM1
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-E
CQM1-CPU42-E
CQM1-CPU43-E
CQM1-CPU44-E
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CQM1
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C200HS
C200HE-CPU32-E()
C200HE-CPU42-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HE
C200HG-CPU33-E()
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU53-E()
C200HG-CPU63-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HG
C200HX-CPU34-E()
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU54-E()
C200HX-CPU64-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HX
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU11-EV1
CVM1-CPU21-EV1
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
Note:
272
For CPU units marked (), a communications board is required.
Model List
Appendix J
CPUs (For Connection Via an NT Link (1:1))
Model
Specification
PC Type
CPM1-10CDR-j
CPM1-20CDR-j
CPM1-30CDR-j
Connect an RS-232C adapter to the peripheral port.
C-series
CPM1
CQM1-CPU41-E
CQM1-CPU42-E
CQM1-CPU43-E
CQM1-CPU44-E
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
CQM1
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C200HS
C200HE-CPU32-E()
C200HE-CPU42-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HE
C200HG-CPU33-E()
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU53-E()
C200HG-CPU63-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HG
C200HX-CPU34-E()
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU54-E()
C200HX-CPU64-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HX
CV500-CPU01-V1-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-V1-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-V1-EV1
CV2000
CPU01 V1 EV1
CVM1-CPU01-V1-EVj
CVM1-CPU11-V1-EVj
CVM1-CPU21-EVj
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1-series
Note:
For CPU units marked (), a communications board is required.
CPUs (For Connection Via an NT Link (1:N))
Model
C200HE-CPU32-E()
Specification
PC Type
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HE
C200HG-CPU33-E()
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU53-E()
C200HG-CPU63-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HG
C200HX-CPU34-E()
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU54-E()
C200HX-CPU64-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HX
C200HE-CPU42-E
Note:
For CPU units marked (), a communications board is required.
273
Model List
Appendix J
CPU Unit (Connection by C200H Direct Communication)
Model
Product Name
C20H-CjDR-DE-V1
C20H-CjDT-DE-V1
C20H
C28H-CjDR-DE-V1
C28H-CjDT-DE-V1
C28H
C40H-CjDR-DE-V1
C40H-CjDT-DE-V1
C40H
C60H-CjDR-DE-V1
C60H-CjDT-DE-V1
C60H
C200H-CPU01-E
C200H-CPU03-E
C200H-CPU11-E
C200H-CPU21-E
C200H-CPU23-E
C200H-CPU31-E
C200H
C200HS-CPU01-E
C200HS-CPU03-E
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HS
C200HE-CPU11-E
C200HE-CPU32-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HE
C200HG-CPU33-E
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU53-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HG
C200HX-CPU34-E
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU54-E
C200HX-CPU64-E
C200HX
RS-232C/RS-422A Converter Unit
Model
Specification
RS-232C : 9-pin connector
RS-422A : 8-pin terminal block
NT-AL001
RS-232C Adapter
Model
CPM1-CIF01
274
Specification
Connect the RS-232C port of the NT20S and the peripheral
port of the CPM1.
Model List
Appendix J
Related Parts and Equipment for PT
Name
Model
Remarks
Support Tool
NT-ZA3AT-EV2
3.5 inch FD for NT Series
Options
p
NT20S-CFL01
Replaceable backlight
NT20M-KBA04
Reflection-suppressing protective sheet
Parts Used for Connection
Cables with connectors
Model
Cable Length
XW2Z-200S
2m
XW2Z-500S
5m
XW2Z-200T
2m
XW2Z-500T
5m
C200H-CN311
30 cm
NT20M-CNP711
C200H-CN711
70 cm
NT20M-CNP221
C200H-CN221
2m
NT20M-CNP521
C200H-CN521
5m
NT20M-CNP131
C200H-CN131
10 m
C20H-CN312
30 cm
NT20M-CNP712
C20H-CN712
70 cm
NT20M-CNP222
C20H-CN222
2m
Applicable Units
Communication Method
Host link units with 25-pin
connectors
Host link
Host link units and CPU units with
9-pin connectors
Host link,
NT link (1 to 1)
C200H, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE
C200H direct communication
CjjH
Connecting cables (for host link, NT link, RS-232C)
Model
Specification
AWG285P
IFVV-SB
Multiconductor shielded cable (FUJIKURA, Ltd.)
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P28AWG
Multiconductor shielded cable (HITACHI Cable, Ltd.)
Applicable connectors (for host link, NT link, RS-232C)
Name
Connector
Connector cover
Model
Remark
XM2A-2501
25-pin, manufactured by OMRON
XM2A-0901
9-pin (Plug), manufactured by OMRON
DB-25P
25-pin, manufactured by JAE
XM2S-2511
25-pin, manufactured by OMRON
XM2S-0911
9-pin, manufactured by OMRON
DB-C2-J9
25-pin, manufactured by JAE
275
Option List
Appendix K
APPENDIX K
Option List
Replaceable Backlight ... NT20S-CFL01
This is a backlight for replacement purposes.
Note:
The disposal of used backlights may be regulated by national or local authorities. Dispose of them in accordance with the laws and regulations of the relevant country and local authority.
Reflection-Suppressing Protective Sheet ... NT20M-KBA04
Stuck to the display to prevent it from being soiled. The entire sheet is colorless and transparent.
276
Option List
Appendix K
Chemical-resistant Cover .. Type NT20S-KBA01
Covers the front panel and protects it from chemical agents. The entire sheet is milky white and made of silicone
rubber.
The protection the cover affords is summarized below.
Protects Against
Boric acid
Sulfuric acid
Nitric acid
Ammonia gas
Carbon dioxide
Phenol
Glycerin
Ammonia water
Calcium chloride
Developing fluid (“hypo”)
Acetaldehyde
Lard
Does Not Protect Against
Hexane
Lubricating oils
Benzene
Butane
Carbonic acid
Chlorinated solvents
Napthalene
Soya oil
Toluene
For information on protection against chemical agents not included in the table above, please ask OMRON. (If it is a
chemical agent to which silicone rubber is recognized to be resistant, the cover can be used with confidence even if
that chemical agent is not listed in the “Protects Against” column above.
Reference: S This cover does not afford protection against all chemical agents.
S Since the cover is milky white, it reduces the clarity of the display a little.
S This cover is intended to be affixed to the display in order to provide protection against chemical
agents. It will not provide protection against chemical agents that enter through the installation panel or through the gap between the cover and the display.
277
PC Memory Map
Appendix L
APPENDIX L
PC Memory Map
OMRON C-Series Memory Map
Timer/Count
er Area
DM Area
0000 to 0511
0000 to 1999
0000 to 0127
0000 to 0051
0000 to 0511
0000 to 1999
0000 to 0027 0000 to 0063
0000 to 0511
0000 to 6655
0000 to 9999
0000 to 0031
0000 to 0031
0000 to 0127
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0255
0000 to 0099
0000 to 0027 0000 to 0063
0000 to 0051
CPM1
0000 to 0019
0200 to 0255
0000 to 0019
0000 to 0015 0000 to 0015
0000 to 0127
0000 to 1023
6144 to 6655
C500F
0000 to 0063
0000 to 0031
0000 to 0031
0000 to 0127
0000 to 0511
C1000HF
0000 to 0255
0000 to 0099
0000 to 0027 0000 to 0063
0000 to 0511
0000 to 4095
Area
Ladder type
AR Area
Link Relay
Area
IR Area
HR Area
C20H
C28H
C40H
C60H
0000 to 0255
0000 to 0099
C120
0000 to 0063
0000 to 0031
C200H
0000 to 0255
0000 to 0099
0000 to 0027 0000 to 0063
C200HS
C200HE
C200HG
C200HX
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0099
C500
0000 to 0063
0000 to 0027 0000 to 0063
C1000H
0000 to 4095
C2000(H)
CQM1
Flow type
yp
0000 to 6655
OMRON CV-Series Memory Map
Area
IR Area
HR Area (1)
AR Area
Link Relay
Area
Timer/Counter
Area
DM Area
CV500
CVM1-CPU01(-Vj)
0000 to 2555
0000 to 0511
0000 to 0511
0000 to 8191
CV1000
CVM1-CPU011(-Vj)
CV2000
CVM1-CPU21(-Vj)
0000 to 2555
0000 to 0511
0000 to 1023
0000 to 9999
(2)
(1)
(2)
278
Included in the IR area in the case of CVM1/CV-series PCs.
This is the area that can be used with an NT20S. The DM area itself occupies the range 00000 to 24575.
Special Characters
Appendix M
APPENDIX M
Special Characters
English Character Codes
Pin 2 of SW2 must be ON to enable English language messages to use the following codes.
Example: Hex code is represented by 30, decimal code by 48, and character by 0.
30
48
0
Code 20 and 32 in the table represents a space, as indicated by “SP”.
Hex Digits
1st
2nd
-0
2-
20
3-
SP
32
-1
21
22
!
23
”
24
#
25
$
26
%
27
&
28
29
(
2A
)
2B
*
2C
+
2D
-E
2E
,
47
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
-
3D
.
3E
3F
63
C
44
45
46
47
8
48
D
49
E
4A
F
4B
4C
H
4D
>
4E
I
J
79
55
56
57
58
59
5A
K
5B
U
5C
V
5D
N
5E
X
95
64
65
66
67
68
Y
69
d
6A
e
6B
f
6C
6D
h
6E
i
6F
111
t
75
76
77
78
79
j
7A
u
7B
v
7C
7D
x
o
7E
84
85
86
87
88
y
89
ä
8A
à
8B
å
8C
8D
ê
8E
126
142
7F
8F
127
143
94
ö
95
ò
96
û
97
ù
98
ÿ
152
ë
99
Ö
153
è
9A
Ü
154
ï
9B
¢
155
î
9C
£
156
ì
141
~
ô
151
140
}
93
150
ç
139
|
Æ
149
138
{
92
148
137
z
æ
147
136
125
n
â
135
124
m
83
91
146
134
w
123
l
é
133
122
k
82
É
145
132
121
110
_
74
ü
131
120
109
^
s
119
108
]
73
81
90
144
130
118
g
107
\
r
117
106
[
72
Ç
129
116
105
Z
q
115
104
94
5F
c
103
93
O
63
71
80
9-
128
114
102
W
92
M
b
101
91
L
62
p
113
100
90
78
4F
T
89
77
?
54
a
99
88
76
=
S
87
75
<
53
61
70
8-
112
98
86
G
74
;
R
85
73
:
52
‘
97
84
72
9
Q
83
71
62
/
43
51
60
7-
96
82
70
7
61
46
2F
6
60
45
-F
36
B
69
59
44
-D
5
58
43
-C
35
42
P
81
68
57
42
-B
4
56
41
-A
34
A
67
55
40
-9
3
54
’
39
-8
33
41
50
6-
80
66
53
38
-7
2
52
37
-6
32
@
65
51
36
-5
1
50
35
-4
31
40
5-
64
49
34
-3
0
48
33
-2
30
4-
9D
¥
157
Ä
9E
Pt
158
Å
9F
ƒ
159
279
Special Characters
Hex Digits
1st
2nd
-0
Appendix M
A-
A0
B-
á
D0
E0
176
192
208
224
B1
C1
D1
E1
177
193
209
225
B2
C2
D2
E2
178
194
210
226
B3
C3
D3
E3
179
195
211
227
B4
C4
D4
E4
180
196
212
228
B5
C5
D5
E5
181
197
213
229
B6
C6
D6
E6
182
198
214
230
B7
C7
D7
E7
183
199
215
231
B8
C8
D8
E8
168
184
200
216
232
A9
B9
C9
D9
E9
169
185
201
217
233
AA
BA
CA
DA
EA
170
186
202
218
234
BB
CB
DB
EB
187
203
219
235
BC
CC
DC
EC
188
204
220
236
BD
CD
DD
ED
189
205
221
237
BE
CE
DE
EE
190
206
222
238
BF
CF
DF
EF
191
207
223
239
A1
í
A2
ó
162
-3
A3
ú
163
-4
A4
ñ
164
-5
A5
Ñ
165
-6
A6
a
166
-7
A7
o
167
-8
-9
-A
-B
A8
AB
¿
1/
2
171
-C
AC
1/
4
172
-D
AD
¡
173
-E
AE
«
174
-F
AF
175
»
<1: Used as the prefix for mark data codes (2 bytes).
280
E-
C0
161
-2
D-
B0
160
-1
C-
F-
α
F0
≡
240
β
F1
"
241
Γ
F2
≥
242
π
F3
≤
243
Σ
F4
⌠
244
σ
F5
⌡
245
m
F6
÷
246
τ
F7
≈
247
Φ
F8
_
248
Θ
F9
.
249
Ω
FA
250
δ
FB
Ǹ
251
∞
FC
n
252
ø
FD
2
253
ε
FE
J
254
∩
FF
255
<1
INDEX
A
Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii, xiii
Allocatable bits and words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Changing displayed numerals or
character strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 171, 174
Allocated bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Allocated word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Changing the contents of
allocated words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 171, 174
Alternate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Changing the lamp display status . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Automatic reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Changing the status of allocated bits . . . . . . . . . 183
Automatic reset function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Changing the system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
B
Character-string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 239
Backlight OFF function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Backlight attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Backlight mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Bar graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Batch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Before operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Bit input attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 208
Bit touch switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Bit touch switch method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Buzzer attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Buzzer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Character-string memory table . . . . . . . . . 126, 168
Character specify size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 119, 126
Checking the LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Checking the LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Checking the PT setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Checking the buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Checking the communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Checking the screen memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Checking the touch switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Child screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122, 123
Classification of screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Clear screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Comm. check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 102
Comm. type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
C
Communication is automatically reset . . . . . . . . . 84
C200H/C200HS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Communication procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
C200H direct communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 58
Comparison between NT20S and NT20M . . . . . . . 7
CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 273
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CjjH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Compatible PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 45, 49
Cables with connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Connecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Cannot be normally started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Connecting the NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 46, 49
Cannot communicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
281
Connector cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Direct conn. setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Connector specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Direct connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Direct information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Content upgrade memory table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Direct setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Continuous buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Direct specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 165, 169
Continuous screens . . . . . . . . . 123, 140, 159, 161
Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Continuous sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 125
Display frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Contrast control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Display specified screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Control bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Draw circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Controlling the NT20S status . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 191
Draw polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Controlling the display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
E
Copy memory table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
ERR ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Copy memory table setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Copy type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 175
Edit screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Copying the memory table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8-digit number input notify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Creating numeric keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
8-digit write numeral memory table . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Creating screen data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
End flashing display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Crimp terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
End inverse display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Currently displayed screen word . . . . . . . . 160, 161
End plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
D
Enlarged display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
DIP-SW status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Error message when the NT20S is started . . . . . 72
DIP switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 42
F
DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
FA site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Data memory (DM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
File list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Data transmission in screen units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
File units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Decimal fraction parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Flash memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Determining the numeral memory table
number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 138
Determining touch switch status . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Flashing display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 127
Difference between direct connection Ver. 4 and
Ver. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Difference between the NT20S-ST12j and
NT20S-ST16j . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4-digit number input notify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
282
Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4-digit write numeral memory table . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Inverse display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Function restrictions depending on the
support tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
K
Key press sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
G
Graph frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
L
Guide display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 138
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
LCD panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
H
Host I/F tool connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Host communication conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Host link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 78
Host link method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
LSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 42, 43, 47
Lamp and touch switch display
(Bit specification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Lamp and touch switch display
(Number specification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Host link unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 37, 271
Lamp and touch switch display status
enquiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
I
Lamp and touch switch display status
response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
I/O check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Lamp bit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
I/O connection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 15, 133
IP65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 28
Lid for backlight replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Indirect specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 165, 171
Lit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 138
Init. Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 74
Initialization by using the DIP switch . . . . . . . . . . 89
Initialization by using the DIP switch
(Forced initialization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Initialization by using the system menu . . . . . . . . 72
Initialization error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Initialization setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 166
Initialize the screen data memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Initializing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Initializing memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Installation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Integer fraction parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Intermittent buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Intermittent sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 125
M
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Maintenance mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Making up a connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Mark data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 119, 127
Memory error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Memory size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Memory switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
More than one lamp can be lit in batch . . . . . . . 134
Internal processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
283
N
Operation commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
NT-AL001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
NT20S has made a buzzer sound . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Operations with the system menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
NT link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 13, 45, 78
Order for writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Names of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Overlapping screen . . . . . . . . . . 122, 140, 159, 161
9-pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
P
Normal display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Normal screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Notes on the notification operation . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Nothing is displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Notification of numbers to the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Notify bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Notifying the NT20S status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Notifying the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Notifying the display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Notifying the display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Number of registration words . . . . . . . . . . 164, 166
Numeral memory table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 167
Numeral setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123, 140
Numeral setting attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 143
Numeral setting strobe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 197
Numeric key type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Numeric keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Numeric values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 45, 48
PC memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
PC switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 47
PC system setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 42, 43, 47
POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
POWER LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 271
PT operating status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
PT setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
PT status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
PT status control area . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 154, 191
PT status notify area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 156
Page number display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Panel fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Parent screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122, 123
Parity check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
% display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
O
% values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
OMRON product references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Peripheral tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 42, 43, 47
100% value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Power input terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 29
Operating status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 197
Power to the computer is interrupted . . . . . . . . . . 89
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Programmable terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Operation by operating commands . . . . . . . . . . . 202
+5V output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Operation by terminal commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
284
Q
Screen list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
QQ command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Screen number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Screen number “0” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
R
RS-232C/422A converter unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
RS-232C I/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
RS-232C cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
RS/CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
RUN LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Reflection-suppressing protective sheet . . . . . . 276
Related manuals and their contents . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Screen number response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Screen switch setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Screen switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Screen switching strobe . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 160, 196
Screen switching timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Selecting communication speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Selecting the host communication method . . . . . 78
Selecting the items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Replaceable backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Selecting the numeral setting area for
data input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Replacing the backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Request screen number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Set cursor position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 181
Set flashing display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Set inverse display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Reverse and flashing display . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 127
Setting a screen number for a
touch switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reverse display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 127
Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Rotary switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Setting a system key function for a
touch switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Setting error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
S
Setting the buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Setting the support tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Setting the words of the character-string
memory table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Screen #0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Screen No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Setting the words of the numeral
memory table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Screen attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Sign display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Screen data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 237
Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 127
Screen data displayed on the NT20S . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Specify character enlargement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Screen data memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Specify displayed characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Screen display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Screen display control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
285
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Statuses of touch switches are changed . . . . . . 183
Stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Support tool mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 255
Support tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 31, 86, 113
Switching predetermined values or character
strings according to the situation . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Touch switches used to call the
system menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Transmission in file units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Transmit mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 88, 117
Transmitting screen data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 117
Transportation and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Switching the continuous screens . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Turn ON the power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Switching the power ON/OFF when using
C200H direct communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Types of notification operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
25-pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Switching the screen display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Switching to the RUN mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
U
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Unit number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
System key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Unlit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
System menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Upgrading bar graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
System menu display permission . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Upper/lower limit check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Used for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
T
Terminal commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Thumbwheel type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
To stop the buzzer sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 104
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Using numeric keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Using the thumbwheel type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Using touch switches for notification to the
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
W
Tool I/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Tool settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Waterproof requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Wide angle of visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 251
Touch switch number output
(from NT20S to host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 264
Touch switch # method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Write character-string memory table . . . . . . . . . 205
Touch switch bit output
(from NT20S to host) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
X
Touch switch disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
XON/XOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Touch switch enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Z
Touch switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 16, 70, 136
Zero suppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
286
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. V020-E1-4
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
Date
1
September 1994
Original production
2
June
1995
Overall revision by addition of a new model
3
May
1997
Overall revision by addition of a new model
S Revisions due to addition of NT link (1:N)
S Revisions due to addition of new model (NT20S-ST16j), addition of
an applicable PC (CDM1), addition of explanations, and correction of
errors.
4
August
1997
Correction of errors
Revised content
287
OMRON Corporation
Control Devices Division H.Q.
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81)75-344-7109/Fax: (81)75-344-7149
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173
U.S.A.
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
83 Clemenceau Avenue,
#11-01, UE Square,
Singapore 239920
Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120 China
Tel: (86)21-5037-2222/Fax: (86)21-5037-2200
Authorized Distributor:
Cat No. V020-E1-04
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
This manual is printed on 100% recycled paper.
Printed in Japan
0897-1.5M (0597)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement